https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10792-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/byAyBIc0JoY/hqdefault.jpg Identify if You Need a Permit — Deck Construction Before starting any deck construction, it is crucial to determine if a building permit is required. Local planning divisions have different regulations, so it is advisable to check with your local council or relevant planning authority. This initial step ensures compliance with local building codes and avoids potential legal issues or demolition orders later on. https://www.youtube.com/embed/byAyBIc0JoY 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10792-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GI70mvXBIic/hqdefault.jpg Understand Local Building Codes and Planning — Deck Construction Before beginning any physical work, understand and comply with local building codes. Building codes vary significantly by region, state, county, and even city or township, though they are generally based on the International Building Code. It is crucial to contact your local building authority and inspector with your deck plans to ensure they meet all requirements. Key elements that can vary by code include post sizes, the span distance between beam posts, and the size and span of joists. Consulting a resource like the 'Deck Codes & Standards' book from Black & Decker, which simplifies complex code information, is highly recommended. This initial planning step ensures the structural integrity and legality of your deck project. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GI70mvXBIic 109 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10792-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/v79flY1pIKk/hqdefault.jpg Check Permits and Utility Lines — Deck Construction Begin your deck project by contacting your local building department and homeowners association to inquire about necessary permits and specific building requirements that apply to your area. This ensures your project complies with all regulations. Furthermore, it is critical to call 811 before any digging begins to have all underground utility lines marked. This prevents accidental damage to water, gas, or electrical lines and ensures a safe work environment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/v79flY1pIKk 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10793-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ij8dmeG-l2U/hqdefault.jpg Plan the Deck Layout and Consult Building Codes — Deck Construction Begin the deck planning process by drawing the desired shape and proportion of the deck. Crucially, determine the orientation of the decking, as this will influence joist placement. Always refer to relevant building codes and guides, such as the 'Prescriptive Residential Wood Deck Construction Guide' (DCA 6), to ensure compliance and structural soundness. This initial planning helps to accurately determine material needs and proper spacing for all structural components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ij8dmeG-l2U 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10793-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QsPQM6JPZJ8/hqdefault.jpg Plan Your Deck and Prepare Timber — Deck Construction Before starting construction, it's crucial to plan the deck's location and design. Consider factors like shade, privacy, and ground conditions. If choosing a permanently shady spot, be prepared for annual cleaning and treatment of the wood to prevent dampness and algae. Avoid overly wet areas entirely. Sketch your deck to scale on paper, being as precise as possible with measurements. This helps minimize cutting and material waste. Remember that any deck higher than 300mm off the ground typically requires planning permission. When building, use structural treated timber and always apply two coats of preservative to all holes and cut ends of the wood to protect against rot and insects. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QsPQM6JPZJ8 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10793-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4W7PpUYPT0s/hqdefault.jpg Research and Plan the Deck — Deck Construction Begin by conducting thorough research and planning for your deck project. Consult resources such as the "Ultimate Guide to Decks: Plan / Design / Build" book for general knowledge and specialized websites like decks.com for free design plans, design tools, and material cost calculators. The presenter also highly recommends watching instructional videos on YouTube to gather practical tips and skills. Once sufficient information is gathered, sketch out your deck plan on quad-ruled notebook paper, detailing the placement of every board, beam, and connection. This detailed drawing will help in creating a comprehensive materials list. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4W7PpUYPT0s 55 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10794-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eiZoCH5SMPI/hqdefault.jpg Dig Footings and Set Anchoring Hardware — Deck Construction After the ledger board is installed, mark the locations for the deck's support posts. Dig holes for the footings, ensuring they are at least 42 inches deep (or below the frost line in your area) and wide enough to accommodate 12-inch diameter Sonotubes. Insert the Sonotubes into the holes, ensuring they are level, and pour concrete into them. Before the concrete sets, embed J-bolts and post bases (e.g., Simpson Strong-Tie) into the wet concrete, ensuring they are perfectly centered and level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eiZoCH5SMPI 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10794-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nwW_mW_iRrk/hqdefault.jpg Mark Footing Locations and Square the Deck — Deck Construction With the ground leveled, the next step is to accurately mark the locations for the deck's footings. This involves re-establishing precise perimeter lines using the batter boards and string lines, ensuring the deck will be square to the house. The '3-4-5 method' (or a scaled version like 9-12-15 feet for larger decks) is used to verify squareness by measuring the diagonal. Once the perimeter is confirmed, individual footing locations are marked, typically 16 inches away from the house and spaced at approximately 4.5-foot intervals along the beams. These marks guide the placement of the auger for drilling. Before any digging commences, it's essential to call 811 to locate underground utilities. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nwW_mW_iRrk 123 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10794-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XtRdyoX-cqQ/hqdefault.jpg Layout and Digging Footings — Deck Construction Using a tape measure, accurately mark out the perimeter of the planned deck and the locations for the footings. Drive stakes into the ground at these marked points to create a visual guide. Then, use a compact excavator (mini excavator) with a 25-inch bucket to dig the footing holes. The holes should be 36 inches deep and 25 inches wide to accommodate the Sonotube concrete forms. Clean up the edges of the holes with a shovel to ensure a comfortable fit for the Sonotubes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XtRdyoX-cqQ 193 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10795-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SUxS4QJpeiU/hqdefault.jpg Pour Concrete Footings — Deck Construction Mix concrete according to the manufacturer's directions, typically in a wheelbarrow. Fill each form tube approximately halfway with the mixed concrete. Use a shovel or a 2x4 to 'vibrate' the concrete and remove any trapped air pockets, which helps prevent voids and ensures strength. Then, fill the remainder of the tube with concrete, leaving the top surface smooth. Carefully embed an anchor bolt into the wet concrete, ensuring it's plumb and no more than an inch of its thread is showing. Backfill around the form tubes with gravel to provide stability and keep them in place while the concrete cures. Allow the concrete to cure fully according to the manufacturer's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SUxS4QJpeiU 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10795-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hMbhJlvsuk4/hqdefault.jpg Pour Concrete and Finish Footing Tops — Deck Construction Begin pouring concrete into the footing holes, carefully ensuring that the rebar cage remains centered and doesn't shift. As the holes are filled, place short, cylindrical cardboard forms, such as 12-inch QUIK-TUBE Building Forms, at the very top of each footing. These forms serve to help level the concrete surface and create a cleaner, more uniform appearance for the top of the footing. While full-length forms can be used, utilizing shorter sections allows the concrete to directly connect with the surrounding soil, which can potentially reduce the chance of footing movement. Once the concrete is poured to the top of the form, use a concrete float or trowel to smooth and shape the surface. Float the concrete in a circular motion to create a slightly convex (domed) top. This subtle slope helps water drain off the footing, preventing pooling and protecting the future post base from moisture damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hMbhJlvsuk4 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10795-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jk8Tt_Eyumk/hqdefault.jpg Pour Concrete Footings and Install Anchors — Deck Construction After placing the Sonotube forms, rocks are added to the bottom of each hole to ensure proper drainage and prevent water buildup. Next, bags of Quikrete 5000 concrete mix are prepared. The dry mix is poured into a large tub, followed by the addition of water. The concrete is thoroughly mixed with a shovel until a consistent, workable consistency is achieved. The mixed concrete is then shoveled into each Sonotube form, ensuring it fills the form completely. Finally, a post base anchor is inserted into the wet concrete at the top of each footing, carefully leveled using a spirit level, and secured in place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jk8Tt_Eyumk 166 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10796-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eiZoCH5SMPI/hqdefault.jpg Install Deck Posts — Deck Construction Once the concrete footings are cured, measure and cut 6x6 pressure-treated posts to the exact height required to meet the deck frame at the desired level, with a slight pitch away from the house for drainage. Place the cut posts into the post bases and use a level to ensure they are plumb. Fasten the posts to the post bases according to the manufacturer's instructions, typically using specialized fasteners or nails. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eiZoCH5SMPI 26 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10796-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MtViNAQUn08/hqdefault.jpg Installing Support Posts with Post Bases — Deck Construction Once the concrete footings have been poured and cured, the next phase of construction involves installing the support structure for the deck. This typically includes pressure-treated wooden support posts, the ledger board, and the support beams, all installed simultaneously to ensure the deck is level. To secure the support posts, a hole is first drilled into the center of the cured concrete footing. An expandable bolt is then inserted into this hole. A metal post base connector is placed over the bolt, which often features a flat plate to lift the wood off the concrete, preventing moisture accumulation. A washer and nut are then used to securely fasten the post base. Finally, a pressure-treated wooden post is set into the post base connector, ready to support the beams. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MtViNAQUn08 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10796-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hMbhJlvsuk4/hqdefault.jpg Attach Post Bases and Set Posts — Deck Construction Once the concrete footings have fully cured and reached adequate strength, proceed to attach metal post bases to the top of each footing. These bases are typically secured using 6-inch concrete anchors that are drilled and fastened into the cured concrete. Ensure that each post base is correctly aligned and plumb before permanently anchoring it. After the bases are securely attached, carefully set the wooden posts into position within the metal bases. Secure the posts to the bases using appropriate fasteners, such as screws or bolts, as recommended by the post base manufacturer. It is highly advisable to have this work inspected by your local building department, as they often have specific requirements for inspecting footings and post installations before further construction proceeds. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hMbhJlvsuk4 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10797-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XtRdyoX-cqQ/hqdefault.jpg Installing the Ledger Board — Deck Construction Attach a 2x10 pressure-treated ledger board directly to the house's exterior. Crunch the numbers beforehand to ensure that the top surface of your finished decking will be approximately 1 inch below the house's threshold. The builder mentions he learned this from a previous mistake of assuming 3/4 inch decking. Secure the ledger board to the house's rim joist or wall studs using lag bolts, following a staggered pattern (e.g., 15 inches on center, in a 'W' pattern) for maximum holding power. For areas that require extra weather protection, especially against moisture intrusion, apply a house wrap (e.g., Tyvek) or similar flashing tape along the house framing before attaching the ledger. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XtRdyoX-cqQ 80 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10797-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GID4f0QAWMw/hqdefault.jpg Attaching the Ledger Board — Deck Construction The first step in construction is to attach a ledger board to the home's exterior. This board provides a crucial attachment point for the deck, helping with weight distribution and securely connecting the deck to the house. Typically, 2x12 or 2x10 pressure-treated lumber is used for ledger boards, depending on the deck's size. Before attaching, install Protecto Wrap or a similar flashing product between the ledger board and the house to protect against moisture. Secure the ledger board using lag bolts, ensuring a strong and safe connection. The video shows two workers installing a 2x12 ledger board, first using a nail gun for temporary attachment, then securing it with bolts and a wrench. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GID4f0QAWMw 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10797-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LmdFqKOgy1Q/hqdefault.jpg Install Ledger Board and Drip Edge — Deck Construction Install the ledger board directly to the house. First, measure and mark the desired height for the ledger board along the house wall. Use a level to ensure the mark is perfectly horizontal. Secure the ledger board to the house framing using Simpson Strong-Tie SDWS Timber Screws, which are designed to be drilled directly without pre-drilling or the need for nuts and bolts. Confirm that the ledger board is perfectly level before fully tightening. After the ledger board is in place, install a drip edge (metal flashing) along its top edge. This drip edge should be carefully tucked under the existing siding of the house to create a barrier that prevents any moisture or rain from getting behind the ledger board and causing damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LmdFqKOgy1Q 72 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10798-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PkvKO8GchyE/hqdefault.jpg Assemble and Secure Beams — Deck Construction Construct the main support beams for the deck. The video demonstrates creating beams by nailing two 2x8 pieces of lumber together. Use four 10-penny galvanized nails every 16 inches, staggering them, to firmly join the two boards. Once the beams are assembled, place them on top of the installed posts. Use metal brackets (such as post-to-beam connectors) to secure the beams to the posts. Before fully securing, use a tape measure to double-check the diagonal measurements of the beam layout. This ensures that your beams are perfectly square. Once confirmed, nail the metal brackets to both the posts and the beams, ensuring every pre-drilled hole in the brackets is filled with a nail for maximum stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PkvKO8GchyE 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10798-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XtRdyoX-cqQ/hqdefault.jpg Setting Main Support Beams — Deck Construction With the post bases secured, position the main support beams (6x10s) onto the posts. The beams are 20 feet long and will be seamed together to cover the 30-foot width of the deck. Use appropriate Simpson Strong-Tie hardware, specifically angle brackets and structural screws, to connect the beams to the posts and to each other where they seam. Use a circular saw to make any necessary cuts to the beams for precise fitting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XtRdyoX-cqQ 70 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10798-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1I9ZCz5k_44/hqdefault.jpg Install Main Support Beams — Deck Construction With the posts set and protected, and string lines established, the main support beams are installed. These beams are lifted and carefully positioned onto the ledger boards and between the posts, ensuring they align perfectly with the string lines for level and straight placement. For existing beams that are slightly higher than the new string line, a grinder is used to carefully trim down the top surface of the wood or any protruding fasteners to match the desired level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1I9ZCz5k_44 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10799-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XtRdyoX-cqQ/hqdefault.jpg Installing Floor Joists and Blocking — Deck Construction Position the 2x10 pressure-treated floor joists into the installed joist hangers on the ledger board, running perpendicular to the house and resting on the main support beam. Secure the joists to the hangers using 3-inch exterior-grade nails. At the main beam, back-nail the joists by driving nails or screws through the side of the joist into the beam for added lateral stability. The main beam is designed to handle the vertical load, so no hangers are needed on this side. Once joists are installed, cut and fit blocking between them along the perimeter of the deck. This blocking provides a solid attachment point for the perimeter decking boards and prevents lateral movement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XtRdyoX-cqQ 72 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10799-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SFNaKDkbkQs/hqdefault.jpg Install Floor Joists and Blocking — Deck Construction With the main beams and ledger board (if applicable) securely in place, proceed to install the floor joists. These are the numerous parallel pieces of lumber clearly visible in the video, typically 2x8 or 2x10 treated lumber, which will support the deck surface. Install the joists perpendicular to the main beams and typically parallel to the house. Attach them to the ledger board (if used) and the outer perimeter beams using appropriate joist hangers and specialized hanger nails or structural screws. It's crucial to maintain consistent spacing between joists, commonly 12, 16, or 24 inches on center, as specified by local building codes and the type of decking material you plan to use. After installing the joists, install blocking or bridging between them at regular intervals (usually at the midpoint of spans greater than 8 feet) to enhance the stability of the frame and prevent joists from twisting over time. Use a framing square to ensure all connections are perfectly square. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SFNaKDkbkQs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10799-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WOGaS19VZ8Q/hqdefault.jpg Install Joists and Joist Hangers — Deck Construction Install joists typically at 16-inch intervals on center, but always verify this against your local building codes. Before securing them permanently with joist hangers, use a pneumatic air gun to tack the joists to the ledger board. This ensures they are correctly positioned. Once tacked, install the joist hangers. These hangers are crucial for holding the deck's framing in place. Connect the joist hanger to the ledger board first, then use a drill to screw through the joist hanger, through the joist, and finally into the ledger board for a robust connection. Torque head bits are recommended for this step as they are less prone to stripping and provide a better bite. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WOGaS19VZ8Q 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10800-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tdISH1ooSYc/hqdefault.jpg Install Composite Decking Boards — Deck Construction Before laying the main decking boards, install any perimeter trim or starter strips. The video shows a black trim piece installed along the edge of the house, which serves as a clean starting point and edge. Secure this trim using screws. Next, place the first composite decking board against the house, carefully aligning it. Use a cordless drill/driver to secure the board with appropriate composite deck screws or hidden fasteners, ensuring they are flush or slightly countersunk. Continue by laying subsequent composite decking boards, using spacers or hidden clips for consistent gaps between boards. Tap each board with a rubber mallet to ensure a snug fit before fastening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tdISH1ooSYc 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10800-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GI70mvXBIic/hqdefault.jpg Install Deck Boards and Trim Joists — Deck Construction Install the deck boards over the joist framework. These deck boards were wet when installed, so they were placed tightly together. As the wood dries, it will naturally shrink, creating a quarter-inch gap between boards. This gap is ideal for water runoff and proper drainage. Use appropriate exterior-grade deck screws to fasten the deck boards to the joists. Ensure to use two screws per joist for each board. To create a clean, finished edge, leave the joists long during initial installation. Once all deck boards are screwed down, dry-fit the last two deck boards and mark the ends of the joists, subtracting 1 1/2 inches (the thickness of the rim joist). Then, cut all the joists to this marked length using a circular saw, ensuring the final deck board and rim joist will sit perfectly flush. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GI70mvXBIic 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10800-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PkvKO8GchyE/hqdefault.jpg Install Decking Boards — Deck Construction Install the decking boards, starting from the house and working your way outward. Before fastening, pre-drill and countersink all holes near the edges of the boards to prevent the wood from splitting. Then, secure the deck boards by driving two exterior-grade screws into each joist they cross, typically every 16 inches. As you lay the boards, periodically stop (e.g., every fourth board) and measure the width of the installed decking near the house and at the far end of the deck. This helps ensure that your deck boards are remaining square and parallel as you progress. If working with wet, pressure-treated lumber, push the boards snugly against each other. They will shrink slightly as they dry, naturally forming small gaps for drainage. If using dry boards, you'll need to intentionally add an 1/8-inch gap between each board as you install them. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PkvKO8GchyE 110 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10801-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PkvKO8GchyE/hqdefault.jpg Build and Install Railing Posts — Deck Construction Begin by preparing the posts for the railings. Railing construction is subject to strict building codes, particularly concerning height, attachment methods, and baluster spacing. Always confirm these requirements with your local inspector. To create a clean look, cut a decorative notch into the railing posts where the horizontal rails will sit. Use a circular saw with the blade set to 1.5 inches deep to make several parallel relief cuts within the notch area. Break out the waste wood with a hammer, then clean and refine the notch using a chisel and a block plane for a smooth finish. Once notches are complete and posts are cut to the required height (with a 45-degree bevel on top for aesthetics), lay out their positions along the deck perimeter, ensuring they meet minimum spacing codes. Drill pilot holes for carriage bolts, checking that each post is plumb and square before drilling the second hole. Insert carriage bolts, with washers and nuts, and tighten them down with a wrench to secure the posts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PkvKO8GchyE 74 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10801-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WOGaS19VZ8Q/hqdefault.jpg Install Railing Posts and Spindles — Deck Construction Determine the desired height of your handrailing, measuring from the top of the notch on the posts. Cut the railing posts to be an inch shorter than the final desired handrail height, as the handrail itself will sit on top. To ensure consistent spacing for the spindles (balusters), use a 3-inch wooden block as a spacer between each spindle. This eliminates the need for repeated tape measure use and ensures a precise, uniform look for your railing. Once the posts are cut and positioned, secure them to the deck frame, ensuring they are level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WOGaS19VZ8Q 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10801-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nRBgIe-ApTU/hqdefault.jpg Install Railings and Balusters — Deck Construction Now that the posts are attached and decking is installed, you can begin constructing the railings. Use 2x4 lumber for both the top and bottom rails. Attach the bottom rail along the backside of the posts, ensuring it is 3-1/2 inches from the deck surface. Secure the top rail flush with the top of the posts, also on the backside. Use screws to firmly attach the rails to the posts at each joint. For a neat, finished appearance, center a 5/4 x 6 inch rail cap on top of the top rail, mitering the corners where sections meet to create clean seams. To install the balusters, use a scrap piece of 2x4 lumber as a consistent spacer to ensure even gaps between them. Drill pilot holes into each end of the balusters, then secure them with screws to both the top and bottom rails. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nRBgIe-ApTU 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10802-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bog0TDqtUfA/hqdefault.jpg Build and Install Deck Stairs — Deck Construction Construct the stair stringers, which are the main angled supports for the stair treads. These are carefully measured and cut from sturdy lumber to ensure proper rise and run for each step. The stringers are then securely attached to the main deck frame at the top and supported by a solid foundation (e.g., concrete pad or ground-level framing) at the bottom. Risers (vertical boards between treads) are then added to the stringers, creating the enclosed structure of the stairs. This step highlights the precise framing required for safe and functional stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bog0TDqtUfA 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10802-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PKUS77duDqk/hqdefault.jpg Build and Attach Stairs — Deck Construction For convenient pool access, add stairs to the deck. Begin by cutting another treated 2x6 board and screwing it securely to the 4x4 posts where the stairs will connect to the deck. This provides a solid attachment point. Level the ground where the stairs will rest and place several pavers to support the bottom of the stair stringers, ensuring stability. Use pre-made stair stringers, which can be purchased from stores like Home Depot, to simplify the process. Hold the stair stringers in place against the deck and mark where adjustable stringer connectors will be attached. Use galvanized adjustable stringer connectors, like the Simpson Strong-Tie LS0Z, which are designed specifically for stairs. Attach these connectors using their specialized galvanized hex screws, first to the 2x6 board on the deck and then to the stringer. Repeat for the second stringer, ensuring both are level with each other. For the stair treads, cut five-quarter decking boards to the desired width and screw two of them onto each tread, butting them up against each other. Finally, cut and install one decking board for each riser (the vertical piece between each tread). https://www.youtube.com/embed/PKUS77duDqk 70 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10802-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZmaJT2I4GKY/hqdefault.jpg Install Multi-Level Deck Steps — Deck Construction Construct and install steps that provide access from ground level to the various deck elevations. This involves cutting stringers (the angled structural supports) to the correct rise and run for each step, then securely attaching them to the deck frame and a stable foundation at ground level. Apply composite decking boards to form the treads (the horizontal walking surface) and, if desired, risers (the vertical face of the step). Ensure consistent dimensions for all steps for safety. The video shows multi-level steps, indicating varying heights and transitions, likely utilizing the 'matching end grains' and 'Cortexed' fastening methods for a cohesive look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZmaJT2I4GKY 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10803-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/P6rSJuaU6T0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stain or Sealer — Deck Construction With the deck completely clean and dry, it is now ready for a protective finish. Apply a high-quality deck stain or sealer according to the manufacturer's instructions. Choose a product that offers UV protection and water repellency to prolong the life and beauty of your resurfaced deck. Apply the finish evenly using a roller, brush, or sprayer, working in small sections and following the wood grain. Allow adequate drying time between coats if multiple coats are recommended. This final step protects the newly exposed wood from weather, rot, and UV damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/P6rSJuaU6T0 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10803-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hQbGVHgtS9E/hqdefault.jpg Stain the Entire Deck — Deck Construction Apply a protective and decorative stain to all new and existing wood surfaces of the deck and railing. Thoroughly clean the deck before staining, ensuring it is free of dirt, dust, and mildew. Use a paint brush, roller, or stain pad to apply the stain evenly. The video shows a person applying brown stain to the deck boards. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hQbGVHgtS9E 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10803-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GID4f0QAWMw/hqdefault.jpg Protecting the Deck with Stain and Sealer — Deck Construction The final step in completing your new deck is to properly protect it from the elements. Apply a combination stain and sealant product to the entire wooden surface of the deck. This type of product not only enhances the wood's natural grain and beauty but also provides crucial protection against damage from sun and rain. Use a paintbrush for edges and hard-to-reach areas, and a paint roller for broader surfaces to ensure even coverage. This protective layer will extend the life of your deck and reduce the frequency of maintenance. The video shows a person using an Olympic Elite Advanced Stain + Sealant in One product, applying it with a paintbrush and then a roller. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GID4f0QAWMw 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10804-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XImjl3-6TbI/hqdefault.jpg Final Clean-up and Inspection — Deck Construction Once all the deck boards have been installed, the project moves to final clean-up and inspection. Thoroughly sweep or rake the entire area, removing any sawdust, wood scraps, tools, and construction debris. Inspect the deck surface for any sharp edges, splintered wood, or proud screw/nail heads that could be a safety hazard. Address any such issues by sanding, planing, or driving fasteners flush. The completed ground-level deck provides an attractive and functional extension of the living space. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XImjl3-6TbI 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10804-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bY3J0YutsXs/hqdefault.jpg Complete Trim and Final Cleanup — Deck Construction Conduct a final inspection of all installed fascia, trim, decking, and railing. Make any necessary adjustments or apply touch-ups to ensure a seamless and professional appearance. Ensure all fasteners are secure and no sharp edges or protruding elements are exposed, which could cause injury. Clean the entire deck surface of any construction debris, dust, or sawdust, leaving the area tidy and ready for the homeowner to use and enjoy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bY3J0YutsXs 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10804-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZmaJT2I4GKY/hqdefault.jpg Final Review and Project Cleanup — Deck Construction Conduct a thorough final review of the entire composite deck system, including all decking surfaces, benches, steps, and handrails. Check for any loose fasteners, uneven surfaces, or any remaining unfinished details. Ensure all components are structurally sound, safe, and comply with any relevant building codes. After the final inspection, perform a comprehensive cleanup of the construction site, removing all tools, excess materials, and debris. The presenter mentions 'buttoning this up tomorrow,' indicating these final stages of completion and cleanup are being finalized. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZmaJT2I4GKY 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10784-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SRNjf4-F9Tg/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Power to AC Unit — AC System Maintenance Before working on any electrical appliance, ensure all power is completely shut off. First, locate your main breaker box (often outside near the meter) and flip the circuit breaker labeled for your 'AC' or 'A/H' (air handler) to the 'Off' position. Next, go to the AC unit itself and locate the outdoor electrical disconnect box. Open its cover and pull out the disconnect switch (a black plastic block that states 'On/Off') to fully isolate the unit from power. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SRNjf4-F9Tg 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10784-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WJrNMPx_JyI/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Power to AC Units — AC System Maintenance For safety, it is crucial to turn off the power to both the indoor and outdoor AC units before beginning any maintenance. Locate the corresponding circuit breaker in your home's breaker box and switch it off for the indoor unit. For the outdoor unit, identify and turn off its dedicated on-off switch, which is typically found near the unit itself. This prevents accidental startup and electrical hazards while working on the system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WJrNMPx_JyI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10784-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/M3NYdZIzx2U/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power to AC Unit — AC System Maintenance To begin, ensure complete safety by disconnecting all power to the AC condenser unit. First, locate and switch off the corresponding circuit breaker inside your house. Next, proceed to the outdoor unit's disconnect box and pull out the breaker or switch it to the 'OFF' position. Confirm that the power is completely off before proceeding with any further steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/M3NYdZIzx2U 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10785-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/peymGz_8BkA/hqdefault.jpg Check and Replace Indoor Air Filter — AC System Maintenance Move to the indoor unit (air handler). Locate the media filter cabinet, typically near where the return air duct connects to the unit. Open the access panel and pull out the old air filter. Inspect its condition; if it's dirty (not white/gray as new), it needs replacement. Insert a new filter, ensuring the 'airflow' arrow on the filter points in the direction of the furnace or air handler. https://www.youtube.com/embed/peymGz_8BkA 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10785-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MtQOxvsnzkA/hqdefault.jpg Change Your Air Filter — AC System Maintenance Locate the air filter slot in your HVAC system, which is usually found in the return air duct or within the furnace unit itself. Note the direction of the airflow arrow printed on the filter frame. Slide out the old, dirty filter and replace it with a new, clean air filter of the correct size and MERV rating. Ensure the airflow arrow on the new filter points in the same direction as the old filter. Properly dispose of the old air filter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MtQOxvsnzkA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10785-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1O1DGre8xK8/hqdefault.jpg Change Air Filter — AC System Maintenance While you're near the AC unit, take the opportunity to check and change the air filter. Locate the air filter compartment, typically a slot near the air handler or return vent. Pull out the old, likely dirty air filter, noting its size (e.g., 20x20x1 inches). Replace it with a new, clean air filter of the same size, ensuring it's oriented correctly according to the airflow arrows printed on the filter frame. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1O1DGre8xK8 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10786-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pzDNFuiAESE/hqdefault.jpg Deep Clean Condenser Unit — AC System Maintenance Before cleaning the condenser unit, consult your manufacturer's guidelines to avoid voiding your warranty. Crucially, turn off all power to the outdoor condenser unit. This is typically done at the external A/C disconnect switch located near the unit, or at the main circuit breaker panel inside your home. Remove the top grill or fan guard of the unit; the method for this varies by manufacturer, often involving unscrewing a few bolts with a screwdriver or wrench. Carefully reach into the unit and remove any large debris such as leaves, twigs, or dirt by hand or with a shop vacuum. Inspect the delicate metal fins for any minor bends or damage. Use a fin tool to gently straighten any bent fins, being careful not to damage them further. Next, take an AC coil cleaner, such as WEB Coil Cleaner, and liberally spray it onto the fins from the inside of the unit outwards. Allow the cleaner to sit and foam for about 10 minutes. After 10 minutes, use a garden hose to rinse the cleaner through the fins from the inside to the outside, ensuring the dirt and grime are flushed out. Do not use a pressure washer, as it can easily damage the fins. Finish by rinsing the outside of the unit. Once clean, reassemble the top grill/fan guard and secure it. Finally, restore power to the unit by flipping the disconnect switch or circuit breaker back on. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pzDNFuiAESE 53 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10786-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1yPk4OideMM/hqdefault.jpg Clean Outdoor Condenser Coils — AC System Maintenance Clean the outdoor condenser unit's coils. First, turn off the power to the condenser unit at the outdoor disconnect switch for safety. Use a specialized alkaline condenser coil cleaner, such as Nu-Brite Condenser Coil Cleaner, mixed with water according to the dilution chart on the product. Spray the cleaner thoroughly onto the condenser coils, ensuring it penetrates inside. Allow the cleaner to penetrate and foam for 5-10 minutes, then rinse it off with a hose until the water runs clear. The cleaner will lift away dirt, grime, and grease that accumulate, improving the unit's ability to dissipate heat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1yPk4OideMM 61 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10786-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rpANlj_leho/hqdefault.jpg Clean Outdoor Unit Coils and Drain — AC System Maintenance Regularly clean the outside air intake grill of the outdoor unit by hand or with a brush to remove debris. Additionally, use a garden hose to clean the condenser coil, spraying water gently from the outside towards the inside of the unit to dislodge dirt and leaves. Finally, inspect and clean the condensate drain, which is typically a small PVC pipe protruding from the side of the unit, especially at the beginning and end of the cooling season. Use a thin, flexible wire or a similar tool to clear any blockages, as a clogged drain can lead to water damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rpANlj_leho 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10787-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0eQ43CVKICk/hqdefault.jpg Examine Refrigerant Line Connections — AC System Maintenance Examine the refrigerant line set, including the liquid and suction lines, connecting the outdoor unit to the indoor unit. Specifically, check the connections at the service valves on the outdoor unit for any signs of refrigerant leaks (e.g., oil residue). Ensure the suction line is properly insulated to prevent condensation and maximize efficiency. Verify that the service valves are in their fully open position (unless a specific service procedure requires otherwise). https://www.youtube.com/embed/0eQ43CVKICk 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10787-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EdOYlbVDd74/hqdefault.jpg Check Refrigerant Line Temperatures — AC System Maintenance With the cooling system running, locate the refrigerant lines leading into the outdoor unit. There should be two lines: a larger insulated 'suction line' and a smaller 'liquid line' (which might also be insulated). After the system has been running for a while (e.g., 5-10 minutes), the larger suction line should feel cold to the touch, and the smaller liquid line should feel hot. You can use your infrared thermometer to measure the exact temperatures and observe the differential, but simply feeling the lines by hand can give a good indication of whether the system is properly charged and functioning. A significant temperature difference between the two lines (cold suction, hot liquid) suggests proper refrigerant flow and heat exchange. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EdOYlbVDd74 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10787-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/n3d6aKaB5Qg/hqdefault.jpg Check Suction Line for Condensation — AC System Maintenance Locate the two refrigerant lines that connect to your outdoor air conditioning unit. Identify the thicker of the two lines, which is referred to as the 'suction line'. This line might be covered with insulation, which may be torn. If so, gently pull back any insulation to expose the copper pipe underneath. Place your fingers on the exposed suction line; it should feel icy cold and wet with condensate (sweating). If it is, this indicates that your freon level is likely at or very close to the correct level, and a freon problem is probably not the issue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/n3d6aKaB5Qg 34 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10788-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1yPk4OideMM/hqdefault.jpg Clean Indoor Evaporator Coils — AC System Maintenance Access the indoor blower unit, typically located in an attic or utility closet, to clean the evaporator coils. Before doing so, turn off the AC system at the thermostat. Use an 'Evap Foam No Rinse' evaporator coil cleaner, such as Nu-Calgon's product. Spray the foam directly onto the evaporator coils. The foam will expand, encapsulate dirt, and then condense into a liquid that drains through the unit's condensate pan, eliminating the need for rinsing. Cleaning these coils is essential to prevent ice buildup and ensure efficient cooling of the air circulating through your home. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1yPk4OideMM 56 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10788-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3DdrRYyLv18/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Evaporator Coil and Ductwork — AC System Maintenance With the evaporator A-coil now exposed, perform a thorough visual inspection. Examine both sides of the A-coil for any signs of heavy dirt, dust, lint, pet hair, or mold buildup on the fins and tubing. The video notes this unit is almost 20 years old. Also, inspect the inside of the surrounding ductwork for cleanliness and any obstructions. Pay close attention to the heat exchangers (the copper tubes that carry refrigerant) for any signs of cracks, pinholes, or corrosion. Check the drain pan located beneath the coil for water accumulation, sludge, or blockages, which could indicate a problem with the condensate drain line. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3DdrRYyLv18 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10788-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WJrNMPx_JyI/hqdefault.jpg Clean Evaporator Coil — AC System Maintenance Move to the indoor unit to clean the evaporator coil. You may need a drill to remove screws securing the access panel. Once the evaporator coil door is open, carefully dust the coils with a duster to remove loose particles. Then, spray the coils thoroughly with a commercially available no-rinse evaporator coil cleaner (e.g., AC Flow Evaporator Coil Cleaner, as seen in the video). The cleaner will foam up, liquefy dirt, and drip into the drain pan below. Be sure to periodically clean the drain pan with a mixture of hot water, soap, and a small amount of bleach to prevent mildew and blockages. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WJrNMPx_JyI 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10789-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pzDNFuiAESE/hqdefault.jpg Check Vents for Obstructions — AC System Maintenance Walk through your home and inspect all supply and return air vents. Look for any furniture, rugs, curtains, or other household items that might be obstructing the grilles. Ensure that there is nothing blocking the airflow into or out of these vents, as obstructions can significantly reduce the efficiency of your air conditioning system and lead to uneven cooling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pzDNFuiAESE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10789-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HXxmq2PqACA/hqdefault.jpg Clear HVAC Vents — AC System Maintenance Ensure all supply and return air vents throughout your home are fully open and clear of any obstructions such as furniture, rugs, or drapes. Blocked vents restrict the proper distribution and return of air, forcing your HVAC system to work harder and potentially leading to inefficient heating or cooling and increased energy consumption. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HXxmq2PqACA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10789-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MtQOxvsnzkA/hqdefault.jpg Open Your Vents — AC System Maintenance Walk through your home and identify all heating and cooling vents (registers) in each room that are connected to your HVAC system. Ensure that all vents are fully open by adjusting their louvers and are completely unobstructed by furniture, rugs, or any other items. Vents should remain open to allow proper airflow throughout your home, ensuring even temperature distribution and efficient operation of your HVAC system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MtQOxvsnzkA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10790-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kUo1Kw3aSM4/hqdefault.jpg Monthly Condensate Drain Line Cleaning — AC System Maintenance For monthly maintenance, locate the cleanout opening on the condensate drain line, typically a T-joint with a removable cap. Remove the cap to expose the drain line. Pour 1 to 2 cups of white vinegar down the drain line. This vinegar will travel through the primary drain line and out to the exterior drip line of the house, helping to dissolve algae and mold buildup. Allow the vinegar to sit in the line for about 5 to 10 minutes. Follow the vinegar with hot water to flush out any remaining debris and ensure the line is clear. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kUo1Kw3aSM4 54 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10790-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/peymGz_8BkA/hqdefault.jpg Clear Condensate Drain Line — AC System Maintenance The condensate drain line, including the P-trap, can become clogged with algae and sludge. First, inspect the P-trap by removing its cap (if present). If it's dirty, manually clear it using a zip tie or a small brush to push out any buildup. Pour some water down the line to ensure it flows freely. Alternatively, if your drain line has a flush valve, attach a nitrogen tank (with regulator and hoses) or an air compressor to it. Turn the valve so the arrow points away from the system, attach the hose, and push pressurized air to clear the line. If a union is present, disconnect it, direct the pressure into the pipe, and cap the vertical pipe to prevent water from coming back at you. Recharge the P-trap with water after flushing by pouring water into the cleanout. https://www.youtube.com/embed/peymGz_8BkA 183 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10790-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8UvT6v-Tq6E/hqdefault.jpg Clear the Condensate Drain Line — AC System Maintenance With the problem confirmed, you can attempt to clear the clog. Start by carefully using your finger to feel for and remove any visible debris or sludge from the drain opening located in the condensate pan. Next, locate the condensate drain line, which is typically a white PVC pipe. The video suggests gently pushing downward on the drain line, especially at the P-trap (a U-shaped bend in the pipe), to dislodge any internal blockages. This manual intervention can often resolve minor clogs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8UvT6v-Tq6E 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10791-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yzX2MOmI7ik/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Set Thermostat — AC System Maintenance Return to your breaker box and flip the HVAC breaker back to the 'on' position to restore power to the system. Once power is restored, go back to your thermostat. Set the thermostat to your desired mode (either 'cool' or 'heat') and then dial it to your preferred temperature setting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yzX2MOmI7ik 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10791-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fufqIrp1m8s/hqdefault.jpg Test AC System Functionality — AC System Maintenance After the unit is fully reassembled and power is restored, go inside your home and set your thermostat to 'Cool' mode, lowering the temperature significantly below the current room temperature. This will activate the AC system. Listen for the outdoor unit to turn on and run smoothly. Verify that cool air is coming from your indoor vents. This final step confirms that the AC unit is functioning properly and that your cleaning efforts have improved its performance and efficiency. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fufqIrp1m8s 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10791-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZqBo5z351yQ/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble and Test the Unit — AC System Maintenance Once the coils are clean and any necessary elevation adjustments are made, carefully replace the fan assembly onto the top of the condenser unit, securing it with the previously removed screws or fasteners. Reinsert the T-handle disconnect into the power box, ensuring it is fully seated. Then, return to your home's main electrical panel and switch on all the breakers associated with the AC unit. Finally, test the unit by turning on your air conditioning. The fan should start spinning and the unit should begin cooling. This final check confirms that all steps were completed correctly and the unit is functioning as intended, indicating successful maintenance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZqBo5z351yQ 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10782-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e42OOnatZvs/hqdefault.jpg Align and Install Carpet Stair Tread — install stair treads over splitting LVP on square-nosed stair Begin by taking one pre-made carpet stair tread and positioning it on the first wooden stair. Carefully align the front edge of the carpet tread with the front edge of the stair. Ensure the tread is centered horizontally on the step, leaving an even gap on both sides. Once the tread is perfectly aligned, firmly press it down onto the stair surface, working from the front edge towards the back. This action activates the adhesive backing or secures the non-slip material integrated into the tread, ensuring it adheres securely to the wooden stair. Repeat this process for each subsequent stair, maintaining consistent alignment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e42OOnatZvs 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10782-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — install stair treads over splitting LVP on square-nosed stairs Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10782-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — install stair treads over splitting LVP on square-nosed stairs Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10781-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — install stair treads over splitting LVP on square-nosed stairs Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10781-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — install stair treads over splitting LVP on square-nosed stairs Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10781-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — install stair treads over splitting LVP on square-nosed stairs Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10771-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9cSqoY_1zRs/hqdefault.jpg Initial Lawn Preparation — Lawn Renovation Begin by preparing the lawn area. This involves mowing the existing grass to a short height to allow new seeds to receive adequate sunlight. Following mowing, use a garden rake to clear away any dead grass, thatch, or debris, ensuring a clean surface. For areas with compacted soil, use a garden fork to aerate by pushing the tines into the ground and gently wiggling to create small holes, which improves drainage and root penetration for new grass. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9cSqoY_1zRs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10771-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3t-JcXRpA4Q/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Site by Removing Weeds — Lawn Renovation The first crucial step involves physically removing all existing weeds from the backyard area. This ensures that new grass seed won't have to compete with established weeds for nutrients and space. After clearing the weeds, it's important to assess the existing soil to ensure it's suitable for growing a new lawn. This might involve checking for compaction, drainage issues, or obvious nutrient deficiencies, although the video primarily focuses on weed removal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3t-JcXRpA4Q 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10771-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2xzq5Jp2uxo/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Soil — Lawn Renovation Good soil preparation is highlighted as crucial for establishing a new lawn. Begin by thoroughly preparing the soil: clear away any existing debris, vegetation, or weeds from the area. If a weed killer is used, it is essential to consult and follow the manufacturer's instructions to determine the required waiting period before proceeding with sowing the new lawn. After clearing, dig over the soil using a digging fork, meticulously breaking down any large lumps. Simultaneously, remove any stones or roots encountered during the digging process to ensure a clean and even bed for the grass seeds. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2xzq5Jp2uxo 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10772-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NVSjCy046tM/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Soil — Lawn Renovation A well-prepared soil surface is crucial for success. Begin by thoroughly removing any weeds or debris from the area. Then, use a rake or a garden fork to turn the soil, breaking up any large clumps to create a smooth surface for the seeds to settle. For compacted soil, consider using a cultivator. You can choose between a manual cultivator (like a hand tiller with multiple prongs) or a powered version (such as a Ryobi 36V HP Brushless Tiller/Cultivator) to effectively loosen the soil and prepare it for planting. Finally, use a soil spreader or the back of a rake to level out the surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NVSjCy046tM 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10772-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KqnfX9MuwX4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Soil for Seed to Soil Contact — Lawn Renovation The first crucial step is to prepare the bare soil to ensure proper seed-to-soil contact. Use a cultivator, specifically a 'Garden Weasel' as demonstrated, to thoroughly loosen the top layer of soil. Work the cultivator over the entire bare area to break up any compacted soil. This creates a suitable environment for the seeds to settle, be protected, stay moist, and develop roots. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KqnfX9MuwX4 55 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10772-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ewFRavOuYHU/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Soil Bed — Lawn Renovation Before planting, prepare the soil thoroughly. Begin by manually removing any weeds and debris from the planting area. You can use your hands, wearing garden gloves, or a small weeding tool. Once cleared, loosen the soil using a rake or a garden fork to a depth of at least 2-3 inches. For larger areas, a tiller, such as the Ryobi Cultivator, can be used to efficiently break up and aerate the soil, creating a smooth and even surface that is conducive to seed germination and root development. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ewFRavOuYHU 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10773-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1ILTTQESvjI/hqdefault.jpg Level the Soil — Lawn Renovation Once the soil has been rotary hoed and cleared of weeds, it's crucial to level the ground. Spread new topsoil or compost evenly across the entire area, using shovels and a wheelbarrow to distribute it. Then, use rakes and a specialized levelling tool (like a soil screed) to ensure a perfectly flat and even surface. This prevents puddles and promotes uniform grass growth. Use string lines or a laser level to guide the levelling process for precision. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1ILTTQESvjI 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10773-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9geTqHwopOw/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Soil Bed — Lawn Renovation Begin by thoroughly forking over the entire area of soil using a garden fork to loosen compacted earth and improve aeration. Next, use a landscape rake to break down any large clods of soil and carefully remove any large stones or debris that could hinder grass growth. Continue raking until the soil is fine and relatively level. Once the surface appears even, firm the ground by walking over it in short, shuffling steps. This removes air pockets and creates a solid foundation. Finally, use the landscape rake again to gently re-rake the entire area, breaking up any footprints and leaving a perfectly fine, smooth seedbed. For an even finer finish and to remove any remaining small stones or weeds, use a metal rake. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9geTqHwopOw 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10773-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/F3x3UAvVbpE/hqdefault.jpg Level the Applied Topsoil — Lawn Renovation Once the topsoil has been applied, use a lawn leveling rake to spread and smooth the material. This specialized rake, often available commercially or as a DIY creation, effectively levels wider areas. It is designed to float over existing grass while allowing the soil to settle into the lower spots, ensuring an even grade without pulling up too much turf. https://www.youtube.com/embed/F3x3UAvVbpE 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10774-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yeh7rB7mJEU/hqdefault.jpg Understand Grass Types and Select Seed — Lawn Renovation The creator explains that his grass, tall fescue, does not spread on its own, meaning any dead or thin spots will not naturally fill in and require reseeding. He emphasizes the importance of choosing the correct grass type for your climate zone (cool-season in New Jersey, requiring tall fescue). He then explains how to select quality grass seed by examining the seed label. Key indicators of high-quality seed are low percentages of 'Other Crop Seed' and 'Weed Seed', ideally 0% for both, to avoid introducing unwanted plants into your lawn. He also highlights the importance of a recent 'Test Date' on the seed bag to ensure good germination rates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yeh7rB7mJEU 190 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10774-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EjhleF5b9qs/hqdefault.jpg Choose the Right Grass Seed — Lawn Renovation The video introduces the benefits of overseeding, such as touching up bare spots, thickening the turf, and blocking weeds. It then moves into selecting the appropriate grass seed. Considerations include your region's weather, the conditions in your yard (e.g., sun exposure, foot traffic), and the specific grass types (Fescue, Ryegrass, Kentucky bluegrass, Bermuda, St. Augustine, Zoysia). The easiest way to choose is to check the seed mixture's label. The video emphasizes choosing high-quality seed, highlighting products like Ace Green Turf and Scotts Turf Builder, as these have higher germination rates and fewer weed seeds. Seed with moisture control, such as Scotts Turf Builder with WaterSmart Plus coating technology, is also recommended as it absorbs more water and feeds to jumpstart growth, making watering less of a hassle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EjhleF5b9qs 66 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10774-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XYCuUbLy2Nc/hqdefault.jpg Choosing the Right Grass Seed — Lawn Renovation Choose grass seed based on your lawn's specific conditions. For quick germination and soil stabilization, select a 'Quick' blend containing annual ryegrass, Kentucky bluegrass, and fescue. For shaded areas, a 'Shady' blend (primarily fescue) is suitable. Avoid using weed-and-feed products or crabgrass preventers when seeding, as these will kill new grass seeds. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XYCuUbLy2Nc 112 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10775-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XJU271VjiQ0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Grass Seed — Lawn Renovation Fill the handheld spreader with the chosen grass seed. Adjust the spreader's dial to approximately halfway to ensure a good, even distribution. While walking steadily across the prepared area, squeeze the trigger and continuously spin the handle to broadcast the seed evenly over the soil. For larger areas, a rotary spreader can be used, with its settings determined by the instructions provided on the grass seed bag for optimal coverage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XJU271VjiQ0 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10775-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ewFRavOuYHU/hqdefault.jpg Spread Grass Seeds — Lawn Renovation Now it's time to sow the grass seeds. For even distribution, load your chosen grass seeds into a hand-held spreader, such as the 'Scotts Easy Hand-Held Spreader'. Operate the spreader evenly over the entire prepared area, following the manufacturer's recommendations for application rates. This ensures that the seeds are distributed uniformly, preventing overly dense or sparse patches in your new lawn. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ewFRavOuYHU 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10775-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KPNgaHfvIW8/hqdefault.jpg Sow the Grass Seed — Lawn Renovation Next, sow your grass seed. For small areas, you can broadcast the seed by hand, ensuring even distribution. For larger areas, use a broadcast spreader or a smaller hand spreader for more uniform coverage. Aim to distribute the seeds so they are about 1/4 to 1/2 inch apart, avoiding both overly thick and overly sparse application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KPNgaHfvIW8 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10776-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XJU271VjiQ0/hqdefault.jpg Ensure Seed-to-Soil Contact — Lawn Renovation After the grass seed has been spread, use a rake to lightly brush the seed into the very top layer of the soil. This action is critically important for establishing what is known as 'seed-to-soil contact,' a fundamental requirement for successful germination. Furthermore, gently raking helps to more evenly distribute any seed that may have fallen too densely or too sparsely in certain spots, creating a more uniform seed bed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XJU271VjiQ0 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10776-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Sa4DRw3yDDw/hqdefault.jpg Lightly Rake Seeded Areas — Lawn Renovation After applying the seed, lightly rake the area using a flexible wire rake. This action ensures good seed-to-soil contact, which is vital for germination. Be careful not to apply too much pressure or bury the seeds too deep; a slight covering is sufficient. The goal is to gently work a small amount of soil over the seeds to protect them from washing away, being eaten by birds, or drying out, while still allowing them access to sunlight. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Sa4DRw3yDDw 63 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10776-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xl4mlZy0Ixw/hqdefault.jpg Lightly Rake Seed into Soil — Lawn Renovation After applying the grass seed, take a wire rake and very lightly drag it across the seeded area. The goal is to barely cover the seeds with a small amount of soil, not to bury them deeply. This process helps achieve optimal seed-to-soil contact, which is crucial for successful germination and root establishment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xl4mlZy0Ixw 31 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10777-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hXc63ZWWqOQ/hqdefault.jpg Apply Starter Fertilizer — Lawn Renovation The final step before watering is to apply a specialized 'starter fertilizer' over the newly covered seeds. The speaker explicitly warns against using regular 'adult' lawn fertilizer, as it is too strong for new grass and can 'burn' or kill the delicate seedlings. Apply a very small amount of the starter fertilizer evenly over the patch. This step is optional and depends on your specific soil conditions, as healthy soil might not require it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hXc63ZWWqOQ 44 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10777-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VT73LKxPiWo/hqdefault.jpg Apply Starter Fertilizer — Lawn Renovation Immediately after seeding, apply a starter fertilizer using the same broadcast spreader. It's crucial to use a starter fertilizer, such as Lesco Professional Starter Fertilizer (Triple 19, like 19-19-19), as these formulations are designed to promote root development in new seedlings without burning the delicate new grass. Standard fertilizers can be too strong and harm emerging grass. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VT73LKxPiWo 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10777-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bZwXj879ZVE/hqdefault.jpg Apply Starter Fertilizer — Lawn Renovation Load a starter fertilizer (such as Scotts Starter Fertilizer) into the broadcast spreader. Starter fertilizers are high in phosphate, which is crucial for promoting strong root growth in new seedlings. Apply the starter fertilizer evenly across the entire newly seeded area using the same techniques as for the grass seed application (edge pass then main passes). https://www.youtube.com/embed/bZwXj879ZVE 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10778-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9cSqoY_1zRs/hqdefault.jpg Water the Seeded Area — Lawn Renovation Once the seeds are incorporated and firmed, it's crucial to water the lawn. You can either use a garden hose with a fine spray nozzle or rely on natural rainfall to initiate the germination process. The key is to keep the seeded area consistently moist, especially during the initial germination period, without overwatering. Overwatering can wash away seeds or lead to fungal growth, while insufficient moisture will prevent germination. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9cSqoY_1zRs 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10778-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HYE76Ds9RHU/hqdefault.jpg Water the Seeded Area — Lawn Renovation The final crucial step after applying grass seed and top dressing is to water the area. It is important to water the newly seeded lawn thoroughly to encourage germination. You can either actively water the area with a water hose (using a gentle spray setting to avoid washing away seeds) or rely on natural rainfall if it's anticipated shortly after seeding. Consistent moisture is vital for grass seeds to sprout and establish healthy roots. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HYE76Ds9RHU 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10778-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wTn8ygnspDo/hqdefault.jpg Water the Newly Seeded Lawn — Lawn Renovation Immediately after seeding, thoroughly water the entire lawn. Be very careful to use a gentle watering method, such as a mist setting on a hose nozzle, to avoid disrupting the newly laid seeds. Ensure the top layer of soil remains consistently moist. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wTn8ygnspDo 53 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10779-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ewFRavOuYHU/hqdefault.jpg Establish and Enjoy the Lawn — Lawn Renovation Once the grass seeds have been sown and watered, it is crucial to avoid walking on the newly seeded lawn. Foot traffic can displace seeds, compact the soil, and hinder the germination and establishment process. Continue to maintain consistent moisture in the soil until the grass seedlings emerge and are well-established. Within four to six weeks, your efforts should result in a beautiful, lush new lawn. Regular maintenance, such as proper watering and timely mowing, will ensure its continued health and beauty. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ewFRavOuYHU 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10779-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KFALK1L5ny0/hqdefault.jpg Monitor and Maintain Growth — Lawn Renovation Continue watering the patched area lightly twice a day to keep it damp until the grass germinates and establishes. You should begin to see grass peaking through in about two weeks, and it will be well established in approximately three weeks. To further aid growth, it's recommended to keep traffic off the newly seeded area. If you have pets, consider placing a small fence around the patch to prevent them from disturbing the young grass. Remember to choose the correct seed mix for your area, whether it's sun, shade, or a combination, as the amount of sunlight affects growth speed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KFALK1L5ny0 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10779-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IKfg52HdfgE/hqdefault.jpg Water and Care for New Grass Seed — Lawn Renovation After spreading the grass seed, the presenter emphasizes crucial aftercare steps. He advises thoroughly watering the newly seeded area immediately after application. He also recommends staying off the newly seeded lawn for at least a couple of weeks to allow the seeds to sprout and establish without disturbance. He notes that sprouts should typically appear within one to two weeks, and the lawn can be mowed approximately four weeks later, stressing the importance of allowing "Mother Nature to take its course." https://www.youtube.com/embed/IKfg52HdfgE 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10780-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2xzq5Jp2uxo/hqdefault.jpg Perform First Mowing — Lawn Renovation Once your new grass has grown to a height of 5 to 8 centimeters (approximately 2 to 3 inches), it is ready for its first mowing. When mowing for the first time, use your lawn mower set to its highest possible setting. This ensures that you only trim the very tips of the new grass blades, allowing the roots to continue developing without stress. Before you begin, always make sure that the grass is completely dry, as mowing wet grass can lead to uneven cuts, clumping, and potential damage to the young lawn. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2xzq5Jp2uxo 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10780-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NVSjCy046tM/hqdefault.jpg First Mow and Weed Management — Lawn Renovation As your grass starts to grow, avoid walking on it until it is well established. Once the grass reaches a height of about 5 to 8 cm (approximately 2 to 3 inches) tall, you can give it its first mow. When mowing, make sure to only trim a small amount off the top; never cut more than one-third of the blade height at a time to avoid stressing the young grass. In the weeks that follow, keep an eye on any weeds that pop up and remove them promptly to prevent them from competing with your new lawn. At around 4-6 weeks after sowing, consider applying a low-dose fertilizer to support continued healthy growth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NVSjCy046tM 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10780-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m8vmEj0qt-Q/hqdefault.jpg First Mow of the New Lawn — Lawn Renovation Once the new grass reaches a height where it starts to flop over on itself (around 2 to 2.5 inches for perennial ryegrass, approximately 1.5 weeks after seeding), it's time for the first mow. Use a reel mower, as its scissor-like action provides a clean cut without lifting or pulling the delicate new grass blades. Alternatively, a lightweight battery-powered rotary mower with a high cutting height can be used, ensuring it doesn't actually cut but merely presses the grass to create stripes and avoid ruts. Aim for smooth turns to prevent damaging the young turf. The gentle nature of the reel mower or a high-set battery mower is crucial to avoid stressing the new seedlings and promoting healthy growth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m8vmEj0qt-Q 4910 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10768-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — install treads on a curved staircase Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10768-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for First Winder Step — install treads on a curved staircase Begin by taking a roll of kraft paper and unrolling it onto the second winder step (the first winder step to be templated). Line up one straight edge of the paper along the back edge of the tread, against the riser of the next step. Use an electric stapler to secure the paper in the middle of the riser, making sure the paper is flat and conforms to the step's shape. Fold the paper neatly around the nosing (the front edge of the step) and along the side edge of the winder. Secure it again with staples in the middle, ensuring staples are placed where they will be covered by the finished carpet runner and do not damage the visible part of the stairs if they were real finished stairs. Use a utility knife to carefully cut along the edges of the step, forming the exact shape of the winder tread and riser. This creates the first paper template. The presenter mentions that on actual stairs, the nosing would be thicker than the demo stairs, and emphasizes care when using the knife to avoid damaging the stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 108 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10768-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for Second Winder Step — install treads on a curved staircase Repeat the templating process for the next winder step using a fresh piece of kraft paper. This involves aligning the paper, securing it with staples, folding it around the nosing and side edges, and cutting it to the exact shape of the step. As with the previous template, mark the runner's width, center line, and straight edges. Crucially, ensure that the measurements (e.g., 28 inches wide) for the runner remain consistent across all winder steps to maintain a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10770-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads with Template Tool — install treads on a curved staircase Utilize a specialized stair measuring tool, often referred to as a stair jig or tread template tool, to accurately capture the exact length and precise angles of each individual stair tread. Carefully adjust the tool to fit snugly against the walls and any existing nosing, ensuring that it provides a perfect, custom template for the laminate cut that will follow. This step is critical for ensuring a seamless and gap-free fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10770-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — install treads on a curved staircase Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10770-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hwZQcHGafM0/hqdefault.jpg Mark Tread Dimensions for Curved Sections — install treads on a curved staircase After placing the pre-cut nosing in position, the installer makes new marks along the edges where the tread will meet the wall and the nosing. He uses a measuring tape to measure the dimensions, such as 5 inches on one side and 10 and 5/8 inches on the other, for the long board. To ensure a straight cut line between these two points, he applies diagonal tape and then marks the line with a pencil using a beam level as a guide. This method helps account for any irregularities in the wall or the staircase itself. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hwZQcHGafM0 269 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10769-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for First Winder Step — install treads on a curved staircase Begin by taking a roll of kraft paper and unrolling it onto the second winder step (the first winder step to be templated). Line up one straight edge of the paper along the back edge of the tread, against the riser of the next step. Use an electric stapler to secure the paper in the middle of the riser, making sure the paper is flat and conforms to the step's shape. Fold the paper neatly around the nosing (the front edge of the step) and along the side edge of the winder. Secure it again with staples in the middle, ensuring staples are placed where they will be covered by the finished carpet runner and do not damage the visible part of the stairs if they were real finished stairs. Use a utility knife to carefully cut along the edges of the step, forming the exact shape of the winder tread and riser. This creates the first paper template. The presenter mentions that on actual stairs, the nosing would be thicker than the demo stairs, and emphasizes care when using the knife to avoid damaging the stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 108 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10769-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for Second Winder Step — install treads on a curved staircase Repeat the templating process for the next winder step using a fresh piece of kraft paper. This involves aligning the paper, securing it with staples, folding it around the nosing and side edges, and cutting it to the exact shape of the step. As with the previous template, mark the runner's width, center line, and straight edges. Crucially, ensure that the measurements (e.g., 28 inches wide) for the runner remain consistent across all winder steps to maintain a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10769-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m0TM4PCC8Tw/hqdefault.jpg Creating Custom Templates for Each Step — install treads on a curved staircase First, use painter's tape to mark the desired outline of the carpet runner on the stair treads, particularly around the quarter round and edges. Then, unroll the brown paper over the first tread and secure it temporarily with painter's tape. Use a pencil or marker to meticulously trace the exact shape of the stair tread onto the paper. Once traced, cut out the paper template with scissors or a utility knife. Repeat this process for all six pie-shaped steps, carefully numbering each template to maintain order. Secure the templates in place with a hammer stapler to prevent movement while tracing and cutting. Remember to account for the orientation of each step when numbering and preparing the templates, as they will be flipped for cutting the carpet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m0TM4PCC8Tw 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10764-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10764-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10764-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10766-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10766-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10766-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10765-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10765-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10765-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IOgUldDtg1c/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Measure the width of the stair tread from stringer to stringer (e.g., 36 1/8 inches) and the depth from the nose to the back riser (e.g., 13 inches). To allow for trimming and a snug fit, cut the carpet pieces slightly larger than these measurements (e.g., 37 inches wide by 14 inches deep). Use a utility knife and a straight edge to ensure clean, straight cuts. You will need one carpet piece per tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IOgUldDtg1c 107 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10767-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10767-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10767-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — how to measure your stairs for carpet treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10761-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c7jak2TlfDA/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Bullnose Stair — measure stairs for bullnose treads Begin by measuring the total length and width of the bullnose stair. First, measure from the inside corner of the wall around the bullnose curve to the outer corner, bending the tape measure around the nose. This measurement is 28 inches. Next, measure the length of the entire stair, wrapping the tape measure along the base where the carpet will be installed. This measurement is 57 inches. Finally, measure the width of the stair tread, which is 29 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c7jak2TlfDA 34 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10761-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs for bullnose treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10761-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YAi3vAulu7A/hqdefault.jpg Test Fit Bullnose and Measure for Tread Planks — measure stairs for bullnose treads Test fit the cut bullnose piece on the stair tread, ensuring its small lip correctly catches over the front of the riser for a snug fit. This bullnose has approximately a 1/2-inch overlap onto the tread. With the bullnose in place, measure the remaining depth from the live edge of the bullnose (the finished surface, not including the part that locks into the plank) to the back of the tread against the riser. Remember that most houses are not perfectly square, so measure this distance at both ends of the tread. Manufacturers often recommend a 3/8-inch expansion gap between the flooring plank and the back riser. Account for this when determining the final plank width to be cut. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YAi3vAulu7A 142 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10763-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZrWNkbh5j4M/hqdefault.jpg Position Carpet Treads — measure stairs for bullnose treads It is crucial to properly position each carpet tread on the hardwood stair for both safety and aesthetics. Ensure a gap of approximately 0.5 to 1 inch is left between the front edge of the carpet tread and the bullnose (the protruding front edge) of the stair. This gap is vital to prevent any tripping hazards when ascending or descending the stairs. For consistent alignment and ease of installation, butt the back edge of the carpet tread flush against the riser (the vertical part of the stair). https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZrWNkbh5j4M 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10763-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nCu4uIwBOOE/hqdefault.jpg Install Carpet Pads — measure stairs for bullnose treads Prepare a carpet pad for each stair tread. The depth of the pad should be the depth of the tread plus three additional inches. The width of the pad should be two inches narrower than the width of the runner. Measure, mark, and cut the carpet pad according to these dimensions. Then, cut off the two front corners of each pad at 45-degree angles. Use the first cut pad as a guide to cut as many additional pads as needed for your staircase. Center the pad on the bottom tread, aligning its long edge with the riser. Leave a fingertip width space between the pad and the riser. Place a staple in the center and on both sides of the pad to secure it. Smooth the pad over the tread and over the nose (the front edge of the tread). Pull it tight, then staple the pad to the underside of the nose. Repeat this process until all treads are covered with padding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nCu4uIwBOOE 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10763-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Install Stair Tread Padding — measure stairs for bullnose treads Begin by placing a pre-cut piece of carpet padding onto a stair tread. Ensure it fits snugly on the flat surface of the tread. Use a hammer tacker to securely attach the padding to the wooden step. Apply multiple staples around the perimeter and in the center to prevent the padding from shifting or bunching up over time. Ensure the padding is tight before moving to the next step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10762-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure stairs for bullnose treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10762-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs for bullnose treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10762-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YAi3vAulu7A/hqdefault.jpg Test Fit Bullnose and Measure for Tread Planks — measure stairs for bullnose treads Test fit the cut bullnose piece on the stair tread, ensuring its small lip correctly catches over the front of the riser for a snug fit. This bullnose has approximately a 1/2-inch overlap onto the tread. With the bullnose in place, measure the remaining depth from the live edge of the bullnose (the finished surface, not including the part that locks into the plank) to the back of the tread against the riser. Remember that most houses are not perfectly square, so measure this distance at both ends of the tread. Manufacturers often recommend a 3/8-inch expansion gap between the flooring plank and the back riser. Account for this when determining the final plank width to be cut. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YAi3vAulu7A 142 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10754-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PFOFt7QiWsA/hqdefault.jpg Locate Dishwasher Filter — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Begin by opening your dishwasher. Locate the filter assembly, which is typically a round component situated at the bottom of the dishwasher, often near the spray bar. This specific dishwasher is a Whirlpool, but the filter location and removal process are similar across many different makes and models. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PFOFt7QiWsA 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10754-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QbXEe7_0GOw/hqdefault.jpg Locate the Dishwasher Filter — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning To locate the filter, open the dishwasher door and pull out the bottom rack. The filter is typically located at the bottom of the dishwasher tub, usually under the lower spray arm. Initially, you might see a screen or grid, but the actual filter component is underneath this visible screen. On most machines, the filter will have a handle or a section that can be turned counter-clockwise to unlock it. The video shows an arrow indicator on the screen to guide the user in which direction to turn. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QbXEe7_0GOw 31 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10754-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/T43vZjUwICQ/hqdefault.jpg Access the Dishwasher Filter — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning To access the filter assembly, first, fully open the door of the LG dishwasher. Once the door is down, locate the lower dish rack and carefully pull it all the way out of the dishwasher tub. This provides an unobstructed view of the filter located at the bottom center of the tub. https://www.youtube.com/embed/T43vZjUwICQ 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10755-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3ONSoFb1x5o/hqdefault.jpg Remove Fine Filter Assembly — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Once the fine filter nut is removed, simply lift the entire fine filter assembly straight up and out of the dishwasher tub. Take note of a small spoke on the underside of the filter that aligns with an opening in the drain filter at the back of the tub. This will help with the alignment during installation of the new filter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3ONSoFb1x5o 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10755-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qjk5eSGDiPE/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Filter and Mesh Screen — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning With the lower dish rack removed, identify the lower spray arm. Rotate the spray arm to ensure it is positioned away from the filter assembly, allowing sufficient room for removal. Next, grasp the cylindrical filter and turn it counter-clockwise. This motion will release the filter. Lift the entire filter assembly, including the fine mesh screen, straight out of the dishwasher. Once removed, carefully separate the cylindrical filter component from the larger fine mesh screen. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qjk5eSGDiPE 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10755-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QbXEe7_0GOw/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Dishwasher Filter — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Once located, grasp the handle or grid section of the filter and turn it counter-clockwise, following any indicated arrows. You should feel a slight unlock or click. After unlocking, carefully lift the filter upwards to remove it from its housing. Be prepared, as the filter might be heavily soiled, especially if it has never been cleaned before. The video shows a filter caked with white, slimy buildup and food debris. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QbXEe7_0GOw 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10756-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zyqCOmHte9U/hqdefault.jpg Clean/Install Fine Mesh Filter — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning If cleaning the old filter, use warm soapy water and a brush to thoroughly remove any food particles or debris from both the fine mesh and large particle filters. If replacing, prepare the new filter. To reinstall the fine mesh filter, carefully place it back into the well at the bottom of the dishwasher sump, ensuring it sits flat and is properly seated. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zyqCOmHte9U 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10756-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zyqCOmHte9U/hqdefault.jpg Remove Fine Mesh Filter — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning With the large particle filter removed, you can now access the fine mesh filter located underneath it. Simply reach into the sump area, take hold of the fine mesh screen, and lift it straight out of the dishwasher. This filter is responsible for trapping finer food particles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zyqCOmHte9U 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10756-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QDZ2W3AT68Y/hqdefault.jpg Remove dishwasher filter assembly — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Locate the removable filter assembly at the bottom of your dishwasher. This assembly typically consists of a coarse filter and a finer mesh filter. To remove it, turn the outer ring counter-clockwise and then lift the entire assembly out. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QDZ2W3AT68Y 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10757-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0a7nLLxbqXk/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Filter Components — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Take all the removed filter components (filter cover, coarse filter, and fine filter) to a sink. Use a dish brush and a generous amount of dish soap to thoroughly scrub all surfaces of each component. Pay close attention to mesh areas and crevices where food particles, grease, and residue accumulate. Rinse each component thoroughly under running water until all soap and debris are removed and the water runs clear. Ensure there are no visible blockages or residues left. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0a7nLLxbqXk 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10757-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JlH2WtxCf2k/hqdefault.jpg Clean Filter Components — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Take all removed filter components to a sink. Use warm running water to thoroughly rinse each part, removing any trapped food particles, grease, or residue. For stubborn debris, a soft brush (like an old toothbrush) can be used. While cleaning, inspect all filter parts for any visible signs of damage, such as cracks, tears in the mesh, or warping. If any damage is found, the filter or its damaged components should be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JlH2WtxCf2k 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10757-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NW3asK4epk4/hqdefault.jpg Disassemble and Rinse Filter Parts — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Once removed, you'll likely notice that the filter is composed of two parts that twist apart. Separate these components. Take the individual filter parts to a sink and use running water, preferably with good pressure, to rinse off any large pieces of food debris, slime, or gunk. This initial rinse will remove the bulk of the build-up before deep cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NW3asK4epk4 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10758-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-ThIFyp_p0g/hqdefault.jpg Clean Filters — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Take both filter parts to a sink and rinse them thoroughly under hot water. For any stubborn food particles or grime that do not rinse off easily, use a soft-bristled toothbrush to gently scrub the mesh and perforated areas. It is crucial to avoid using abrasive materials or harsh tools, as these can damage the delicate filter components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-ThIFyp_p0g 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10758-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kxRDs3GrdEk/hqdefault.jpg Clean Filter Components — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Take all three separated filter components and rinse them thoroughly under hot running water. If you notice any stubborn food particles or debris still adhering to the mesh or plastic parts, use a soft-bristle toothbrush to gently scrub them away. It's important to clean all surfaces, including the coarse metal filter, as debris can accumulate everywhere. Avoid using any abrasive cleaning materials, as these can damage the delicate mesh of the filter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kxRDs3GrdEk 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10758-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/61sED-ABR28/hqdefault.jpg Wash Filters — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Take both the ultra-fine filter and the fine filter to a kitchen sink. Rinse them thoroughly under warm, running water. Apply a small amount of dish soap to a sponge and gently scrub both filters to remove any stubborn food particles, grease, or other debris that may have accumulated. Ensure that all mesh and perforated surfaces are clean and free of blockages. https://www.youtube.com/embed/61sED-ABR28 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10759-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/T43vZjUwICQ/hqdefault.jpg Inspect the Filter for Damage — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Once the old filter is removed, perform a thorough visual inspection. Look closely for any signs of wear, such as fraying, tears, or actual holes in the mesh screen of the filter. If you've been experiencing issues with food particles getting onto your dishes, it is highly likely that there is a hole or tear in the mesh, which would necessitate replacing the filter. If the filter is merely clogged with debris but otherwise intact, it can often be cleaned and reused, but a damaged filter requires replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/T43vZjUwICQ 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10759-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JlH2WtxCf2k/hqdefault.jpg Clean Filter Components — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Take all removed filter components to a sink. Use warm running water to thoroughly rinse each part, removing any trapped food particles, grease, or residue. For stubborn debris, a soft brush (like an old toothbrush) can be used. While cleaning, inspect all filter parts for any visible signs of damage, such as cracks, tears in the mesh, or warping. If any damage is found, the filter or its damaged components should be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JlH2WtxCf2k 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10759-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/61sED-ABR28/hqdefault.jpg Wash Filters — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Take both the ultra-fine filter and the fine filter to a kitchen sink. Rinse them thoroughly under warm, running water. Apply a small amount of dish soap to a sponge and gently scrub both filters to remove any stubborn food particles, grease, or other debris that may have accumulated. Ensure that all mesh and perforated surfaces are clean and free of blockages. https://www.youtube.com/embed/61sED-ABR28 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10760-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kxRDs3GrdEk/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble and Reinstall Filter — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Once all filter components are clean, begin reassembly in reverse order. First, slide the central plastic piece back into the coarse metal filter until it clicks securely into place. Next, align and snap the fine silver mesh filter back onto the assembled plastic and coarse metal filter. Finally, carefully place the fully reassembled filter back into its position at the bottom of the dishwasher tub. Ensure the larger area of the filter is facing towards the front of the dishwasher. Twist the filter clockwise until the arrows on the filter housing align, indicating it is locked securely in place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kxRDs3GrdEk 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10760-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rrwZ2PnkQkk/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Main Filter Assembly — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Open the dishwasher door again. Take the newly assembled main filter (grey). Carefully lower it into the base of the dishwasher tub. Depending on your specific dishwasher model, you will need to align a curved opening on the filter with a corresponding slotted opening in the pump housing. The video mentions that on some models this alignment point is on the left-hand side, and on others, it's towards the back. Gently press the filter down until it sits flush into the base of the tub. It should be able to rotate easily, indicating proper seating. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rrwZ2PnkQkk 48 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10760-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N97e5Vwn_Is/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Main Filter Assembly — Dishwasher Filter Cleaning Open the dishwasher door again. Carefully place the newly assembled filter (new large filter with fine filter attached) into the base of the dishwasher tub. It is crucial to align the curved opening on the filter with the corresponding slotted opening in the pump housing. Depending on your dishwasher model, this slotted opening might be on the left-hand side or towards the rear. Once correctly aligned, the filter should sit flush with the tub's base and be able to turn easily, indicating proper seating. https://www.youtube.com/embed/N97e5Vwn_Is 50 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10750-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bfKYvRRw8bI/hqdefault.jpg Install Roofing Underlayment and Shingles — Shed Construction Start the roofing process by rolling out a layer of roofing underlayment, such as a synthetic felt, over the roof sheathing. Secure it with cap nails or staples. This provides an additional waterproof barrier. Next, install a starter course of asphalt shingles along the bottom edge of the roof. Then, apply successive rows of asphalt shingles, ensuring proper overlap and alignment as per manufacturer instructions. Fasten each shingle with roofing nails, using either a roofing nail gun or a hammer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bfKYvRRw8bI 13 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10750-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YRciDPll_NY/hqdefault.jpg Install Starter Row of Shingles — Shed Construction Begin by installing a starter row of shingles along the lower edge of the roof. Position these shingles with the rain slots facing upwards and the shingle's colored side exposed. Place the first starter shingle flush with the drip edge and allow a one-inch overhang on the side of the roof. Nail down each shingle using four roofing nails. Continue attaching subsequent shingles flush to each other, maintaining a one-inch overhang at the sides, to complete the starter row. At the back of the roof, allow the shingles to overhang; these will be trimmed later. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YRciDPll_NY 30 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10750-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4z0_QHE7a4w/hqdefault.jpg Install Shingles — Shed Construction After the starter strip is in place, begin installing the main shingles. The first shingle of the first course is installed along the bottom of the eave and against the rake. To achieve a proper 'book out' pattern, the second shingle in the next course is installed 6 inches inward from the previous shingle; cut off the excess and set it aside for later use. Continue this pattern by laying the next shingle 6 inches further in, cutting it to size, and saving the remaining piece. Shingles should be installed in a diagonal pattern moving up the roof, ensuring that the cut lines do not overlap or align with the lines of the previous shingles. Each shingle typically requires nails shot an inch from the edge, with the second nail placed a foot from the first. Use six nails on the windward side of the roof and five on the leeward side, or adhere to the specific nailing pattern recommended by the shingle manufacturer on their packaging. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4z0_QHE7a4w 93 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10751-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Sk3bTp0AbP4/hqdefault.jpg Install Siding and Cut Openings — Shed Construction Measure and cut siding panels (T1-11 style shown) to fit the shed walls. Use a circular saw with a track guide (PowerTec brand shown) for straight and accurate cuts. Position each siding panel onto the framed wall and secure it using a pneumatic nailer. As you install the siding, use a reciprocating saw to cut out the openings for windows and doors that were created during framing. Ensure the panels are flush and cover the framing adequately. Repeat this process for all walls and gable ends. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Sk3bTp0AbP4 106 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10751-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1odKlfrfoCw/hqdefault.jpg Install Exterior Siding and Cut Openings — Shed Construction Once the wall frames are installed, proceed with covering them with exterior siding. For this project, an inexpensive exterior paneling with a wood-grain texture was chosen. Measure and cut the siding panels to fit the wall sections using a circular saw. Secure the siding to the wall frames using an impact driver and appropriate screws. After the siding is installed, mark the locations for the door and window openings. Drill pilot holes in the corners of these marked openings, then use a reciprocating saw or jigsaw to carefully cut out and trim the openings for a clean finish. The siding not only provides aesthetics but also significantly increases the structural rigidity of the walls. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1odKlfrfoCw 62 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10751-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6Mar52-tEAs/hqdefault.jpg Install Masonite Siding — Shed Construction With the framing complete, move on to installing the siding. Measure the area of each wall and cut the masonite siding sheets to the needed size using a circular saw. Nail the siding into place, ensuring it is flush and securely attached to the wall studs. You may encounter difficulties with certain areas, such as a back wall obstructed by an existing staircase. In such cases, carefully 'finesse' or 'finagle' the siding into place, making small adjustments and ensuring a tight fit. Attach the siding just like the rest of the walls, making sure all edges are covered. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6Mar52-tEAs 50 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10752-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Sk3bTp0AbP4/hqdefault.jpg Install Windows, Doors, and Exterior Trim — Shed Construction Apply flashing tape (Tyvek Window/Door Flashing shown) around the rough window openings to create a waterproof barrier. Install pre-fabricated windows into the rough openings, securing them with screws through the window frame into the wall studs. The video shows the windows being installed from the exterior. From the interior, apply expanding foam sealant around the perimeter of the installed windows to seal any gaps and improve insulation. Add decorative trim boards around the exterior of the windows and secure them with a pneumatic nailer. The video demonstrates using a pocket hole jig to create strong joints for the door frames, then assembling the door frames and covering them with siding. The siding used for the door is different from the shed wall siding; it's a smooth board-and-batten style. Finally, paint the door panels and window trim. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Sk3bTp0AbP4 122 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10752-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PMcIbAi42oU/hqdefault.jpg Install Windows and Doors — Shed Construction Carefully install the pre-fabricated window frames into their respective openings. Ensure the windows are plumb and level, using shims if necessary. Secure the window frames to the timber studs with appropriate screws. Apply specialized sealing tape around the perimeter of each window frame, overlapping onto the breathable membrane, to create a watertight seal. For the door, install the pre-built door frame into the opening, ensuring it is plumb and square before securing it. Finally, attach the door panels to the frame using hinges and then apply the black wood paint for a protective and aesthetic finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PMcIbAi42oU 73 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10752-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLqZ2GW8Y9M/hqdefault.jpg Construct and Install the Door — Shed Construction Mark and cut the door opening in the front OSB wall using a circular saw and a jigsaw for precise corners. Construct a simple rectangular door frame from 2x4 lumber using a pneumatic nailer. Cut exterior-grade OSB panels to fit the door frame and attach them with a pneumatic nailer. Apply asphalt felt paper to the door panels for weather protection, trimming excess with a utility knife. Install door hinges to the door frame and the shed's door opening using a cordless impact driver and appropriate screws. Hang the door, ensuring it opens and closes smoothly, then install a latch mechanism. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLqZ2GW8Y9M 71 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10753-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/G8_DliMsnms/hqdefault.jpg Caulk, Paint, and Final Details — Shed Construction With the shed structure complete, it's time for the finishing touches. First, caulk all seams around the trim and soffit to seal gaps and provide a clean finish. DAP Dynaflex Ultra window and door caulk is recommended for this purpose. Once all caulking is done, proceed to paint the shed. The main body of this shed was painted in 'Site White,' though a slightly darker color like 'Agreeable Gray' could add more contrast to the 'Extra White' trim. After the painting is complete, carefully remove any tape covering the hinges, replace the door latch, and perform a final clean-up of the area. Your 12x12 shed is now ready! https://www.youtube.com/embed/G8_DliMsnms 30 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10753-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6CCZcGs84Ds/hqdefault.jpg Paint the Shed — Shed Construction The final step in completing the shed's exterior is painting. Begin by cleaning all exterior surfaces to ensure good paint adhesion. If your siding is unprimed, apply a coat of exterior primer first. Then, using paint rollers and brushes, apply at least two coats of exterior-grade paint to all walls, trim, and doors. Choose a color scheme that complements your home or landscaping. The video shows the builder painting the trim white and the doors and walls a reddish-brown color, using both a brush and a roller. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6CCZcGs84Ds 8 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10753-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bfKYvRRw8bI/hqdefault.jpg Paint the Shed — Shed Construction For the final touch, paint the exterior of the shed. Begin by masking off any areas you don't want painted, such as the roof edges, using painter's tape. Apply a suitable exterior primer if recommended for your paint, then proceed with painting. Use a paint roller with an extension handle for large flat surfaces, and brushes for trim and corners. Ensure thorough coverage for weather protection and a uniform, attractive finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bfKYvRRw8bI 4 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10742-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XYTy-KO9YSE/hqdefault.jpg Planning and Site Preparation — Shed Construction Before beginning any construction, it's crucial to thoroughly plan the shed's design, including its dimensions, architectural style, and specific location within your garden. Consider factors like sun exposure for optimal solar panel performance and local zoning regulations. Once the design is finalized, prepare the chosen site by clearing any existing vegetation, debris, and ensuring the ground is level. Proper site preparation is fundamental for a stable and long-lasting structure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XYTy-KO9YSE 8 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10742-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ah2-a-GADLQ/hqdefault.jpg Lay Out the Foundation and Square the Corners — Shed Construction The shed location is chosen by the customer, often next to an existing structure. To ensure the frame is perfectly square, use Pythagoras' Theorem. For a 10x12 ft shed, measure 12 ft along one side and 187.5 inches (the diagonal) from the corner. The intersection of two tape measures at these points defines the exact location for a perfect right-angle corner. Repeat this process for the opposite corner to align all four corners. Mark the positions with blue chalk. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ah2-a-GADLQ 55 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10743-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ELE7Hf8rjIM/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Site — Shed Construction The video begins by showing a grassy area, indicating the first step in any construction project: site preparation. This involves clearing the designated area of any vegetation, debris, or rocks, and ensuring the ground is level. A level site is crucial for a stable shed foundation, preventing future structural issues. Use a shovel to remove turf and a rake to clear smaller debris. Employ a spirit level and straightedge or a string line and stakes to check and achieve a level surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ELE7Hf8rjIM 1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10743-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ifZhgWdcyqo/hqdefault.jpg Site Preparation and Foundation Excavation — Shed Construction The project begins with clearing the existing gravel from the designated shed area. Using shovels and rakes, the gravel is moved to one side, exposing the underlying soil. Trenches are then dug to create a level and stable base for the shed's foundation, ensuring proper drainage and preventing moisture issues. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ifZhgWdcyqo 12 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10743-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MfcEQrfWcuE/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Site and Outline the Shed Base — Shed Construction Begin by choosing the ideal location for your shed base, ensuring it is out of the way and suits your needs. Using measuring tape, stakes, and string, carefully mark out an area that is slightly larger than the dimensions of your shed. For instance, if your shed is 8x10 feet, mark a 9x11 foot area. This extra space is crucial for accommodating the 4x4 posts and the gravel base. Once the area is defined with string, use marking paint to clearly outline the perimeter on the grass, which will guide your excavation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MfcEQrfWcuE 38 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10744-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Sk3bTp0AbP4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Site and Lay Foundation Blocks — Shed Construction Begin by preparing the site for the shed foundation. This involves clearing the ground and placing concrete blocks at strategic points to support the shed's floor frame. Use a shovel to level the ground beneath each block as needed. The video shows a laser level being used to ensure all foundation blocks are at the same height, which is crucial for a stable and level structure. Once the ground is adequately prepared, arrange the concrete blocks according to your shed's dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Sk3bTp0AbP4 32 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10744-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/G8_DliMsnms/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Site and Lay Foundation Blocks — Shed Construction Begin by deciding on the optimal location and desired foundation type for your shed. For a portable option that allows for airflow and easy relocation, concrete deck blocks are recommended. Before proceeding, consult local building codes to determine required setbacks from property lines. For this project, a 3-foot setback was required. Measure 3.5 feet from the fence and place the concrete blocks. Then, position additional blocks 3 feet inside each corner where the shed will be. Use a stake as a reference point for each block and excavate any sandy topsoil until firmer earth is reached. If a tamper is unavailable, use a 2x6 to pack the soil down. Finally, pour gravel into the excavated areas. To determine the correct block height, subtract the combined height of the 4x4 skid and the 2x6 foundation (which will sit on the block) from the desired shed height (no more than 12 inches off the ground at the front) to know how far the block should extend above the ground surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/G8_DliMsnms 77 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10744-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/G8_DliMsnms/hqdefault.jpg Level and Square the Foundation Blocks — Shed Construction After placing the foundation blocks, ensure they are perfectly level and square. You can achieve this using a line level, but for greater precision, a laser level is recommended. First, choose a 'control block' as your reference point. Then, adjust the remaining blocks to be level with the control block by adding or removing gravel underneath. Once all blocks are level, verify the foundation is square by measuring the diagonals; both diagonal measurements should be identical. Mark the center of each block. Finally, fill around the blocks with dirt or gravel, or concrete for added stability. These blocks will later have 4x4 squares installed in their center to which the skids will be attached, preventing lateral movement and securing the shed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/G8_DliMsnms 71 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10745-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Sk3bTp0AbP4/hqdefault.jpg Assemble Floor Frame and Install Subfloor — Shed Construction Measure and cut pressure-treated lumber (2x6s shown) for the shed's floor joists and rim joists. Assemble the perimeter of the floor frame by screwing the rim joists to the end joists. Use a measuring tape to accurately mark the spacing for the intermediate joists, typically 16 inches on center. Install metal joist hangers using a hammer to secure the intermediate floor joists to the rim joists, ensuring they are flush and square. Finally, use a circular saw to cut oriented strand board (OSB) panels, marked as 'Advantech' brand, to fit the floor frame. Secure the OSB subfloor panels to the joists using a pneumatic nailer and appropriate nails, ensuring proper spacing for expansion and contraction. The dog 'Sadie' is seen supervising the work. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Sk3bTp0AbP4 82 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10745-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ah2-a-GADLQ/hqdefault.jpg Install Floor Joists and Subflooring — Shed Construction Floor joists are delivered pre-cut to the customer's home. Take measurements every 16 inches along the outer frame to mark the placement of each floor joist. Install these joists within the outer frame, securing them using galvanized 3-inch framing nails with a nail gun. Work in tandem with a partner to ensure joists are flush with the outer frame height and do not protrude. Once all joists are installed, place Advantech OSB subflooring panels on top. These panels are pre-cut and feature a tongue-and-groove design, allowing them to slot into each other for a gap-free, squeak-free, and moisture-resistant floor. Secure the subflooring with a nail gun. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ah2-a-GADLQ 53 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10745-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2l4AfZZp6SI/hqdefault.jpg Assemble Floor Framing — Shed Construction While the stain on the subfloor panels dries, begin assembling the floor framing. This involves positioning the floor joists between the rim joists and nailing them together. The video demonstrates 'through nailing' the joists into the rim joists first. This temporary fastening method helps to quickly position and hold the joists in place before installing more permanent joist hangers. For added strength and load transfer to the foundation blocks, double up the front and back rim joists. This prevents future sagging. Two nails at each joist location are usually sufficient for initial positioning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2l4AfZZp6SI 39 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10746-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Sk3bTp0AbP4/hqdefault.jpg Frame Walls and Rough Openings — Shed Construction Using a speed square, measure and mark all the lumber needed for the wall frames: vertical studs, horizontal plates, and blocking for window/door openings. The video demonstrates using a speed square to mark angle cuts for door headers. Carefully cut these pieces using a circular saw or jig saw (DeWalt XR Jig Saw shown). Assemble each wall section (front, back, and two sides) on the completed subfloor by nailing the studs between the top and bottom plates. Ensure that all studs are spaced correctly, typically 16 or 24 inches on center. The wall framing process includes creating rough openings for windows and doors. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Sk3bTp0AbP4 103 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10746-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DUkDNjy9F6E/hqdefault.jpg Wall Frame Assembly — Shed Construction Assemble the timber frames for each wall section on the flat concrete pad. Ensure all studs have their natural 'crown' (slight bow) facing in the same direction to simplify leveling later. Use a framing nailer and 90mm collated framing nails to secure the top and bottom plates to the pre-cut studs, creating sturdy wall sections. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DUkDNjy9F6E 32 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10746-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fePj1aY5CKQ/hqdefault.jpg Assemble Wall Frames — Shed Construction Lay out 2x4 lumber on the completed subfloor to begin assembling the wall frames. Use a tape measure to ensure studs are spaced at 16 inches on center. Secure the studs to the top and bottom plates using 3.5-inch exterior screws, then follow up by hammering 3-inch framing nails for extra strength. Use a chalk line to mark the positions for blocking (short pieces of lumber installed horizontally between studs) and install them using the same screw and nail method. Repeat this process for all walls, ensuring all framing is robust and square. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fePj1aY5CKQ 39 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10747-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/S7uYZD2TCBk/hqdefault.jpg Install Roof Rafters — Shed Construction With the walls framed, install the roof rafters. These are typically cut at an angle to create a sloped roof. Use a jigsaw to cut out birdsmouth notches on the rafters where they sit on the top plate of the walls, ensuring a secure fit. Install and fasten the rafters to the top plates using screws and an impact driver, making sure they are evenly spaced and provide the desired roof overhang. https://www.youtube.com/embed/S7uYZD2TCBk 29 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10747-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FHux_hPD99c/hqdefault.jpg Install Roof Framing and Ladder Detail — Shed Construction Measure and mark each roof rafter (joist) at 150mm from the back edge using a speed square and pencil. This mark indicates the extent of the roof overhang. This process should be done for all rafters to save time later. Install the rafters, ensuring they are evenly spaced and securely fastened to the top plates. This roof design includes 'ladder' details on both sides, which are multiple pieces of timber installed perpendicular to the rafters at the edge of the roof to create the eaves. Install the ring beam, a continuous piece of timber, around the entire perimeter of the roof, attaching it to the outside edges of the rafters. This helps to unify the roof structure and provides a solid base for fascia boards. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FHux_hPD99c 264 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10747-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLqZ2GW8Y9M/hqdefault.jpg Frame the Roof — Shed Construction Measure and cut 2x4 lumber for the roof rafters. The rafters will span from the taller back wall to the shorter front wall, creating the roof's slope. Carefully mark and cut birdsmouth notches into each rafter using a miter saw and a jigsaw. These notches allow the rafters to sit securely and level on the wall's top plates. Position each rafter on the top plates and secure them using a pneumatic nailer and structural nails. Ensure the spacing between rafters is consistent. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLqZ2GW8Y9M 46 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10748-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LIvKMFThoAI/hqdefault.jpg Install Roof Sheathing — Shed Construction Install the roof sheathing panels, typically OSB or plywood, over the installed rafters. Secure these panels using a nail gun, following the same nailing pattern as the wall sheathing (6 inches on the perimeter and 12 inches in the field) to ensure a strong and stable roof deck. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LIvKMFThoAI 141 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10748-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/InNOJcQ4GLc/hqdefault.jpg Install Roof Sheathing — Shed Construction After the roof frame is complete, large sheets of plywood or OSB are installed as roof sheathing. These panels are nailed down to the rafters or trusses, creating a solid, continuous surface over the entire roof structure. This sheathing provides additional structural rigidity and serves as the substrate for the roof underlayment and final roofing materials. Workers carefully align and secure each panel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/InNOJcQ4GLc 21 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10748-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VjvWdvbAcfY/hqdefault.jpg Install First Layer of Plywood Sheathing — Shed Construction Begin installing the first layer of plywood sheathing on top of the rafters. Carefully lift and position the plywood sheets, ensuring they align with the rafters and are spaced correctly. Secure each sheet to the rafters using an impact driver and roofing screws or nails. Work systematically, covering the entire roof frame with the first layer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VjvWdvbAcfY 33 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10749-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4z0_QHE7a4w/hqdefault.jpg Install Drip Edge — Shed Construction Begin by installing the drip edge, starting from the eave on the far side of the roof, and then working towards and up the closer rake. Use tin snips to cut the bottom portion of the drip edge to allow it to 'scissor' over the ridge for a neat finish. Secure the drip edge by shooting nails every 12 to 16 inches. When making corners, fold the drip edge to create a clean, aesthetically pleasing look that also provides continuous support under the shingles. Ensure that the nails never penetrate the front flange of the drip edge; they should only go through the drip edge and into the roof decking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4z0_QHE7a4w 106 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10749-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GWT5ron81xw/hqdefault.jpg Install Drip Edge, Ice & Water Barrier, and Underlayment — Shed Construction Install aluminum drip edge around the entire perimeter of the roof, securing it with nails. The drip edge helps direct water away from the fascia and prevents water infiltration. Next, lay down an ice and water barrier (e.g., a synthetic peel-and-stick membrane) along the eaves and in valleys (if applicable). This provides an extra layer of protection against ice dams and water penetration. Finally, cover the remaining areas of the roof deck with synthetic underlayment (e.g., VB Shield), overlapping the ice and water barrier and securing it with plastic cap nails. This underlayment is preferred over traditional felt paper for its durability and water resistance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GWT5ron81xw 10 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10749-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FdLahiPBWWs/hqdefault.jpg Install Drip Edge Strips and Underlayment — Shed Construction To further protect the roof's edges and underside from moisture and wind, install corrosion-resistant drip edge strips. These strips are nailed securely to the perimeter of the roof decking, overlapping slightly at corners. Once the drip edge strips are in place, unroll and secure the Easy Shingle Underlay. Lay the underlay parallel to the lowest drip edge. When laying multiple sections, ensure a minimum 10 centimeter (cm) overlap between them. If the roof gradient (slope) is between 15 and 20 degrees, increase this overlap to 50 cm for enhanced protection. Critically, the Easy Shingle Underlay should be fastened over the drip strip at the bottom edge of the roof, but at the sides, it should extend just under the drip strip. This specific positioning ensures efficient drainage of water off the roof and prevents it from getting under the underlayment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FdLahiPBWWs 37 2026-10-07T14:17:06.576Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10731-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aH_vLiBJ6bg/hqdefault.jpg Assess Floor Imperfections — Flooring & Tiling Begin by inspecting the floor surface. Use a long level to identify any uneven areas, such as ridges in the plywood subfloor or areas where the floor might be rocking. The presenter notes a 1/16-inch ridge in the plywood and checks for rocking in the subfloor. Also, identify any significant gaps in the underlayment, as these will need to be filled. The goal at this stage is to identify all imperfections that need addressing before new flooring is installed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aH_vLiBJ6bg 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10731-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NuUbUxDmqNE/hqdefault.jpg Ensure Subfloor is Level — Flooring & Tiling Assess the levelness of your subfloor using a long level and a tape measure. The subfloor should be level within a variance of 3/16 of an inch over every 10 feet. If you find any high spots, use a sander to carefully sand them down. For low spots, follow your flooring manufacturer's instructions to apply a cementitious leveling compound to create an even surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NuUbUxDmqNE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10731-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1MSXF3VZQMs/hqdefault.jpg Check Existing Floor for Flatness — Flooring & Tiling Before laying down the new subfloor, use a 6-foot or 8-foot straight edge or level to check the existing floor for flatness. Run the straight edge in multiple directions (longitudinally, perpendicularly, and diagonally across the room) to identify any dips or humps. Any imperfections will affect the final flooring, so address them before proceeding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1MSXF3VZQMs 87 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10732-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WqyKhSYkpRQ/hqdefault.jpg Demolish Existing Flooring Layers — Flooring & Tiling Don personal protective equipment, including a dust mask, safety glasses, and hearing protection, as this step will create dust and noise. Set the blade depth of a circular saw to match the combined thickness of all existing flooring layers to avoid cutting into the subfloor unnecessarily. Carefully cut the old flooring into manageable squares or strips. Once cut, use a pry bar to lift and remove the sections. The goal is to remove all existing layers (old vinyl, luan, etc.) to get down to a solid, smooth subfloor, such as CDX plywood. After removal, inspect the subfloor for any damage or irregularities. In this case, the CDX subfloor was in good condition and didn't require additional leveling layers like luan. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WqyKhSYkpRQ 58 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10732-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NuUbUxDmqNE/hqdefault.jpg Remove Existing Flooring and Baseboards — Flooring & Tiling Carefully remove any existing carpet, padding, or other floor coverings from the subfloor. Use a hammer and pry bar to gently remove baseboards from around the perimeter of the room. Removing baseboards is important as it allows for the creation of an appropriate expansion gap for the new flooring, which is critical for preventing warping or buckling due to temperature and humidity changes. Note that certain types of new flooring may be installed directly over existing vinyl flooring, so check your manufacturer's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NuUbUxDmqNE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10732-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/afrUJ1YBtdE/hqdefault.jpg Remove Existing Flooring and Fixtures — Flooring & Tiling Proceed to remove any existing flooring components. Carefully remove baseboards from around the room. Next, pull up any carpet and its underlying tack strips. If your current flooring is vinyl, check the manufacturer's instructions for your new flooring, as some types can be installed directly over a single layer of vinyl. However, generally, it's best to remove all existing flooring for optimal subfloor preparation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/afrUJ1YBtdE 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10733-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tmm648dcX4U/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Subfloor — Flooring & Tiling Thoroughly prepare the subfloor by ensuring it is smooth, flat, dry, clean, and solid. Remove any existing carpet staples or adhesive residue using a scraper or adhesive remover. Check for moisture and fill any large holes or cracks with self-leveling compound. Ensure all screws are countersunk. Sand down any uneven spots exceeding 5 millimeters using a belt sander. If replacing vinyl flooring installed prior to 1990, consult a professional due to potential asbestos concerns. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tmm648dcX4U 26 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10733-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/argGr4i6T5k/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Subfloor — Flooring & Tiling Before laying any flooring, thoroughly prepare the subfloor. Ensure it is clean by removing any debris, dust, or old adhesive. The subfloor must also be completely dry and level. If there are any uneven areas or depressions, use a self-leveling compound to create a smooth, consistent surface, which is crucial for a professional-looking and durable installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/argGr4i6T5k 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10733-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/94Z7CR8_QjE/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Clean the Subfloor — Flooring & Tiling After removing the old flooring, thoroughly clean the subfloor to remove any dust, dirt, or small debris. Use a shop vac for this purpose. Once clean, use a level to check the flatness of the subfloor. Ensure it meets the manufacturer's specifications for your new hardwood flooring to prevent future issues with unevenness or gaps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/94Z7CR8_QjE 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10734-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tNcsE9CiDXw/hqdefault.jpg Acclimate Laminate Flooring — Flooring & Tiling Before beginning the installation, ensure the unopened laminate flooring planks are placed in the room where they will be installed. This allows the planks to acclimate to the room's temperature and humidity for 48 hours, which is crucial for preventing expansion or contraction issues after installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tNcsE9CiDXw 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10734-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GJ1oUj1zKAQ/hqdefault.jpg Acclimate Flooring and Establish Layout Guidelines — Flooring & Tiling Allow the new flooring to acclimate to the room's temperature and humidity for at least 72 hours before installation. Ensure the room conditions meet the manufacturer's recommendations. Next, determine the layout of your flooring. Use the sight lines of the room to decide which direction the planks will run. Mark the center of each wall with a pencil. Then, snap a chalk line between the opposing marks to create a cross in the center of the room. Measure from the center point to the starting wall. Subtract the manufacturer's recommended expansion gap from this measurement. Then, measure this new distance from the parallel center line to each end of the starting wall. Finally, snap a chalk line between these new marks to form a guideline for your first row of flooring. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GJ1oUj1zKAQ 48 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10734-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WqyKhSYkpRQ/hqdefault.jpg Acclimate Flooring Material — Flooring & Tiling Before starting the flooring replacement, the material (luxury engineered vinyl plank flooring) should be delivered to the homeowner's house and allowed to acclimate to the environment. This means letting the flooring sit in the room where it will be installed for a recommended period, usually 48-72 hours, to adjust to the temperature and humidity. This prevents expansion or contraction issues after installation, ensuring the planks lay flat and maintain their integrity. The material has already been sent and is acclimating. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WqyKhSYkpRQ 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10735-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7Nfaly9QwVw/hqdefault.jpg Plan Flooring Layout & Establish Start Point — Flooring & Tiling Before laying planks, carefully consider the desired visual effect for your room. Horizontal patterns can make the room appear wider, while vertical patterns will make it feel longer. For this project, a vertical pattern was chosen to accentuate the room's length. Since the room was not perfectly square (a common characteristic in older homes), the decision was made to begin the flooring installation from a measured center point. Use a tape measure to find the exact center of the room or the desired starting line. Then, snap a chalk line across the subfloor. This chalk line will serve as the primary reference for aligning all subsequent planks, so ensure it is precise. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7Nfaly9QwVw 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10735-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tNcsE9CiDXw/hqdefault.jpg Plan Plank Direction and Measure Room — Flooring & Tiling Determine the optimal direction for laying the laminate planks. For the best aesthetic appeal, it is recommended to lay the planks parallel to the main incoming light source in the room. Then, measure the room to ensure squareness and to calculate the width of the final row of flooring. If the calculated width of the last row is less than the width of a full plank, the first row of planks will need to be cut lengthwise to ensure the last row is a reasonable width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tNcsE9CiDXw 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10735-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/miJZQRplWXM/hqdefault.jpg Determine Flooring Direction — Flooring & Tiling Before you begin laying the hardwood planks, you must determine the optimal direction for the flooring. The two primary considerations are: installing the hardwood parallel to the main incoming light source (e.g., from a window) or installing it parallel with the longest wall in the room. Choosing one of these directions often enhances the aesthetic appeal of the flooring and can make the room appear larger or more cohesive. https://www.youtube.com/embed/miJZQRplWXM 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10736-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gYHMsk3cty0/hqdefault.jpg Lay the First Row of Planks — Flooring & Tiling Begin laying the first row of vinyl planks. Position the initial plank against the wall, ensuring it's properly aligned. Place 1/4-inch spacers all around the edges of the room where the flooring meets a wall. These spacers are essential as they create an expansion gap, allowing the flooring to naturally expand and contract with changes in temperature and humidity without buckling. For subsequent planks in the first row, align the tongue-and-groove or click-lock mechanism with the previous piece, lift one end slightly to engage, and gently drop it down to interlock. Continue this process to complete the entire first row, maintaining the 1/4-inch expansion gap with spacers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gYHMsk3cty0 26 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10736-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7Cr_F63p45o/hqdefault.jpg Lay the First Row of Planks — Flooring & Tiling Begin laying the first row of planks in a corner of the room, typically with the tongue side facing away from the wall or the groove side against the wall if starting from that edge. For the first plank, ensure its short end is against the wall. For subsequent planks in the first row, connect them end-to-end using the click-lock system. Gently tap them into place with a rubber mallet if needed, making sure the connections are even and the entire row is level. Use a laser level to ensure the first row is perfectly straight, which is crucial for the rest of the installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7Cr_F63p45o 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10736-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vz1X3O0XsCs/hqdefault.jpg Install First Row of Planks — Flooring & Tiling Begin laying the first row of planks starting from the right corner of the room. Orient the first plank so its tongue side faces the wall. Use spacers to establish a precise 10mm (0.4 inches) expansion gap between the planks and the surrounding walls, as well as any other fixed objects like columns or cabinets. To install subsequent planks in the first row, hold each new plank at an angle (approximately 20-30 degrees) against the previously installed plank, then gently lower it flat onto the floor. This action engages the integral locking mechanism, securing the planks together along their long sides. Continue this process until the entire first row is complete. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vz1X3O0XsCs 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10737-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WqyKhSYkpRQ/hqdefault.jpg Continue Laying and Cutting Planks — Flooring & Tiling Continue installing subsequent rows of flooring, maintaining the staggered pattern for joints. For any areas requiring special cuts, such as around floor vents, pipes, or cabinet bases, measure carefully using a tape measure and mark the cuts with a pencil. Use the flooring cutter for straight cuts or a jigsaw for curves and intricate shapes. Ensure that a 1/4 inch expansion gap is maintained around all fixed objects. Tap each plank into place, ensuring a tight seam along both the length and the ends. Working in sections, you'll see the new floor take shape. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WqyKhSYkpRQ 100 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10737-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uJ2oaCfjzCc/hqdefault.jpg Lay Subsequent Rows from Installed Surface — Flooring & Tiling Once a sufficient number of initial rows of flooring have been installed, shift your working position to operate from the newly installed surface. This approach makes the continuation of the installation process significantly easier by providing better leverage and a stable base. Continue laying the remaining floor one board at a time. For each new board, position it along the edge of the previously laid row, then pull the board toward you, engaging its tongue-and-groove or click-lock mechanism. A tapping block and rubber mallet, or a specialized pull bar, can be used to ensure each board fully snaps into its final locked position without creating gaps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uJ2oaCfjzCc 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10737-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gYHMsk3cty0/hqdefault.jpg Lay Remaining Rows and Stagger Seams — Flooring & Tiling As you continue to install subsequent rows, it's crucial to stagger the seams from the previous row to enhance the floor's stability and visual appeal. A common recommendation is to stagger seams by at least 8 inches, but always refer to your specific flooring manufacturer's instructions for their recommended minimum staggering distance. After locking a plank into place, use a tapping block and a hammer or mallet to gently tap it, ensuring it's secure and tightly fitted against the adjacent planks. For each new piece, first, engage the locking mechanism at the top edge, then carefully scoot the plank as close as possible to the previously installed plank in the row without fully locking the long edge. Use a tapping block with a bridge piece (or pull bar) at the end of the plank to tap it into final position, achieving a tight and secure connection along both the long and short sides. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gYHMsk3cty0 54 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10738-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2oeo_9DMZn0/hqdefault.jpg Custom Cuts for Obstacles — Flooring & Tiling When encountering obstacles like door frames, you'll need to make precise cuts. One effective method is to create a paper template of the irregular shape required to fit around the obstruction. Place the flooring board next to the obstacle, position a piece of paper over the area to be cut, and trace the contour of the door frame onto the paper with a pencil. Transfer this template to the flooring board. Use a jigsaw to carefully cut along the marked line on the board. This method ensures a snug fit around the door frame without excessive gaps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2oeo_9DMZn0 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10738-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kvo-n2AYZnA/hqdefault.jpg Cut Around Vents and Obstacles — Flooring & Tiling When encountering obstacles like air vents or irregular shapes, it's essential to plan cuts carefully. For a floor vent, avoid making the cutout on the very end of a plank if possible, as this can compromise the locking system's integrity. Instead, position your planks so that the vent cutout is at least 8 inches into a new plank. Use a carpenter's square or right-angle tool to transfer the vent's dimensions to the plank, marking the cut lines precisely. For cutting, you can use a multi-tool, a jigsaw (after drilling a starter hole), or a pull saw. Cut out the marked section, ensuring a snug fit around the vent opening. For the final rows along a wall, particularly if the wall is uneven or has a bump-out, you may need to cut narrow strips of planks to fit. Use a jigsaw guided by a T-square or a straight edge clamped to the board for precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kvo-n2AYZnA 101 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10738-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/t8zPm79ErRM/hqdefault.jpg Cut Around Obstructions — Flooring & Tiling If your room contains pipes, floor vents, or other obstructions, you will need to cut out the necessary space in the flooring planks to accommodate them. First, carefully measure the dimensions and location of the obstruction. Mark these measurements precisely onto the plank. Drill pilot holes using a paddle bit at the corners or entry points of your cut-out area. Then, use a jigsaw to cut out the required shape. Always remember to leave an expansion space around the obstruction to allow for the natural movement of the flooring. https://www.youtube.com/embed/t8zPm79ErRM 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10739-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XGI80_sovRI/hqdefault.jpg Install the Final Flooring Row — Flooring & Tiling For the final row of flooring, accurately measure the remaining width between the last full plank and the wall. Then, cut the planks for this row to the appropriate width using a hand saw, jigsaw, or miter saw, ensuring to account for the necessary expansion gap. Once cut, use a pull bar to carefully insert and engage the final planks into the previous row. A rubber mallet can be used with the pull bar to gently tap the planks into place. Throughout this process, double-check to maintain the required expansion gap along the wall to allow for any future movement of the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XGI80_sovRI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10739-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mWjBhzqptlg/hqdefault.jpg Fit and Secure the Final Row — Flooring & Tiling For the final row, measure the remaining gap and rip the final planks to the required width using a circular saw. If the final row is less than 1 inch in width, it is recommended to glue it to the previous uninstalled row and face-nail them together as one unit. Position the ripped board into place. Use a pull bar (also known as a pry bar) and a rubber mallet to pull the final board tight against the previous row, ensuring a snug fit against the wall, then face-nail it into the subfloor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mWjBhzqptlg 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10739-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nOrjCrRFDCs/hqdefault.jpg Complete the Last Row and Install Moldings — Flooring & Tiling As you reach the final row, it will likely need to be cut lengthwise to fit the remaining space. Mark the required size on the plank using a pencil and cut it with a utility knife and straightedge, similar to previous cuts. It's important that this last row is at least 2 inches wide for stability and a professional finish. Once all planks are installed, carefully remove all the 1/4-inch spacers from around the perimeter of the room. Finish the installation by attaching moldings, such as baseboards or quarter rounds, to the walls. These moldings will cover the expansion gap left around the edges of the room, providing a clean and finished look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nOrjCrRFDCs 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10740-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8iv5651rXDQ/hqdefault.jpg Install Baseboards and Trim — Flooring & Tiling The final step involves installing new baseboards and any necessary trim around the perimeter of the room and doorways. This conceals the expansion gap and provides a finished look. Secure the baseboards and trim with a brad nailer or hammer and finishing nails. Once installed, the room is complete with its new black-painted pine floors. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8iv5651rXDQ 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10740-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kvo-n2AYZnA/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Baseboards and Final Transitions — Flooring & Tiling After all the vinyl planks are installed, the final step is to reinstall the baseboards (if removed). Place the baseboards back in their original positions and secure them with finish nails. This covers the expansion gap around the perimeter of the room, creating a clean, finished look. Additionally, install the T-molding transition strip into the pre-installed U-channel at the doorway. Use a rubber mallet to gently tap the T-molding into the channel until it is securely seated. This completes the transition, even if there's a slight height difference between the vinyl plank and the adjacent flooring. Ensure the manufacturer's recommendations are followed, especially regarding underlayment. Some vinyl planks have built-in underlayment and may void the warranty if an additional underlayment is used. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kvo-n2AYZnA 59 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10740-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SSdXCXYQzpA/hqdefault.jpg Install Transition Strips and Finish Flooring — Flooring & Tiling After all laminate planks are laid, remove any temporary spacers used along the walls. Install transition strips at doorways or wherever the laminate flooring meets another type of flooring (e.g., carpet, tile) to create a smooth, finished edge and cover any expansion gaps. The video shows installing a metal transition strip that typically involves securing a track to the subfloor and then snapping the strip into place. Finally, reattach baseboards or install quarter-round molding along the perimeter of the room to conceal the expansion gaps, completing the professional look of your new laminate flooring. This will provide a durable and attractive finish, as seen in the final result. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SSdXCXYQzpA 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10741-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nmyItpmmQ2w/hqdefault.jpg Final Inspection and Cleanup — Flooring & Tiling After all the vinyl planks are installed, remove any remaining spacers along the walls. Perform a final thorough sweep and vacuum of the entire new floor to remove any sawdust or debris. Admire the finished product, noting the smooth, gap-free surface and the modern aesthetic that has replaced the old, damaged hardwood. The new flooring provides a clean, updated look that complements the home's interior. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nmyItpmmQ2w 84 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10741-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Mv2rWwBt7gg/hqdefault.jpg Clean Up New Flooring — Flooring & Tiling Once the entire floor is laid and skirting is installed, give the new floor a thorough clean. Use a microfiber mop or similar soft cleaning tool to remove any dust, debris, or fingerprints accumulated during the installation process. Proper cleaning and care will ensure your new floor lasts for many years. Always refer to the manufacturer's instructions for specific future cleaning and maintenance tips to preserve the floor's finish and durability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Mv2rWwBt7gg 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10741-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NaCeB4efdr8/hqdefault.jpg Final Cleanup — Flooring & Tiling Once the final coat of finish has cured sufficiently to be walked on, perform a thorough final cleanup. Use a backpack vacuum to remove any remaining dust and debris from the floor. Wipe down all surfaces, including baseboards and windowsills, to ensure a pristine finish. Double-check for any missed spots or messes created during the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NaCeB4efdr8 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10729-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — tear up a stair runner Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10729-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — tear up a stair runner Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10729-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — tear up a stair runner Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10730-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — tear up a stair runner Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10730-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — tear up a stair runner Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10730-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — tear up a stair runner Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10727-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — installing removable carpet stair treads Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10727-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing removable carpet stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10727-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — installing removable carpet stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10728-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing removable carpet stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10728-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — installing removable carpet stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10728-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — installing removable carpet stair treads Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10720-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ibs3wLb6nEk/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Work Area — Drain Snaking Before starting, clear the area under the sink to provide ample workspace. Place a bucket or a pan directly under the P-trap (the U-shaped section of the pipe) to catch any water that will spill out. Lay down old towels around the bucket to absorb any splashes. Ensure you have all your tools, such as a plunger, channel-lock pliers, and a drain snake, ready and within reach. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ibs3wLb6nEk 2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10720-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mlM1kuECosQ/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Work Area — Drain Snaking Prepare the area under the sink for the job. Since drain cleaning can be messy, clear out any items stored under the sink. Place rags or an old towel on the bottom of the cabinet to absorb any spills. Then, place a small bowl directly under the P-trap's cleanout plug to catch any water that will be released when you open it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mlM1kuECosQ 5 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10720-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/V2s-RJdNkok/hqdefault.jpg Preparation and Safety Precautions — Drain Snaking Begin by gathering your tools and preparing the workspace. If you've previously used chemical drain cleaners, it is crucial to wear protective rubber gloves to avoid skin contact with harsh chemicals. You will also need a bucket to catch water and debris. For older plumbing with metal fittings, have a pair of channel-lock pliers ready, although newer plastic fittings can often be loosened by hand. https://www.youtube.com/embed/V2s-RJdNkok 34 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10721-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8wD1dkUgMEU/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Drain Stopper — Drain Snaking With the pop-up stopper in the open (up) position, grip the top and twist it counter-clockwise. Continue twisting until the stopper is fully unscrewed from the drain opening. Lift the stopper out of the sink and set it aside. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8wD1dkUgMEU 18 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10721-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tL72r5iUWIU/hqdefault.jpg Disassemble and Inspect the Drain Stopper — Drain Snaking Begin by inspecting the drain stopper, as it's a common place for clogs to start. For this type of stopper, use adjustable pliers to gently loosen the top decorative cap by turning it counter-clockwise. Once loosened, unscrew it the rest of the way by hand. This will expose a central screw. Use a flathead screwdriver to remove this screw, which will release the main body of the stopper. Lift the stopper assembly out and check the drain opening and the crossbars for any accumulated hair or debris. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tL72r5iUWIU 63 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10721-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FM5pYiOajVY/hqdefault.jpg Loosen Drain and Remove Stopper — Drain Snaking Loosen the large mounting nut that holds the drain assembly to the underside of the sink. Use channel-lock pliers to turn the nut counter-clockwise. Once loose, push the entire drain pipe upwards slightly. From above the sink, lift the old stopper out of the drain opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FM5pYiOajVY 24 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10722-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uOE7eDBuaIk/hqdefault.jpg Snake the Bathtub Drain — Drain Snaking Begin by unlocking the set screw on the drain snake. Slowly feed the snake's cable into the overflow drain opening. Continue pushing the cable forward until you encounter resistance, which usually indicates you've reached the P-trap or the clog itself. Once resistance is felt, tighten the set screw to lock the cable in place. Now, crank the handle of the drum auger clockwise while simultaneously pushing the cable forward. This rotation helps the snake navigate the P-trap and hook onto or break apart the clog. If the snake can't pass, loosen the screw, push a bit more, re-tighten, and rotate again. Repeat this process, feeling for changes in resistance. Once you believe the clog is dislodged, carefully retract the snake while holding a rag around the cable to wipe off any accumulated hair, soap scum, or other debris. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uOE7eDBuaIk 82 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10722-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mlM1kuECosQ/hqdefault.jpg Feed the Drain Snake — Drain Snaking With your work gloves on, insert the head of the drain snake into the cleanout opening. Begin feeding the snake into the pipe, pushing it 8 to 12 inches at a time while simultaneously spinning the drum handle. This spinning action helps the snake navigate turns in the pipe and work its way through the clog. Continue feeding the snake until you feel you have reached and broken through the blockage. You may feel resistance, which could be a clog or simply a bend in the pipe; continue to gently push and rotate to move past it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mlM1kuECosQ 21 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10722-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b-n3bmPm9Bo/hqdefault.jpg Snake the Drain — Drain Snaking Put on gloves. Insert the drain snake into the drain opening and push it down, twisting it as you go. When you reach the p-trap or a bend in the pipe, engage the brake on the drain snake, twist to navigate the curve, release the brake, and continue pushing and twisting until you encounter resistance or the clog. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b-n3bmPm9Bo 122 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10723-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LncIxMbmvWc/hqdefault.jpg Break Up or Grab Clog — Drain Snaking Once the clog is located, rotate the handle of the plumbing snake while applying gentle pressure. This action causes the coiled end of the snake to break up or grab onto the obstruction. You may feel the snake pushing against the clog or starting to hook onto it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LncIxMbmvWc 10 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10723-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Z5WNCFCgGNA/hqdefault.jpg Engage the Clog with the Snake — Drain Snaking When the snake cable stops advancing, you have reached the obstruction. To engage the clog, hold the snake's housing steady and begin to turn the handle in a clockwise direction. This rotational motion will cause the auger tip, which has small spikes, to drill into and wrap around the blockage, whether it's a bird's nest, leaves, or other debris. You should be able to feel the cable twisting and tightening as it latches onto the clog. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Z5WNCFCgGNA 20 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10723-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Z5WNCFCgGNA/hqdefault.jpg Engage the Clog with the Snake — Drain Snaking When the snake cable stops advancing, you have reached the obstruction. To engage the clog, hold the snake's housing steady and begin to turn the handle in a clockwise direction. This rotational motion will cause the auger tip, which has small spikes, to drill into and wrap around the blockage, whether it's a bird's nest, leaves, or other debris. You should be able to feel the cable twisting and tightening as it latches onto the clog. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Z5WNCFCgGNA 20 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10724-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eEMidgtzf2A/hqdefault.jpg Retract Cable and Flush Drain — Drain Snaking After the blockage has been cleared, retract the cable from the drain. To do this, squeeze the auto-feed trigger and turn the drum handle in the counter-clockwise direction. Once the cable is fully retracted, run hot water down the drain for a few minutes to flush out any remaining debris and to help clean the snake's cable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eEMidgtzf2A 15 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10724-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CIKmTpyy_Qo/hqdefault.jpg Retract Snake — Drain Snaking Once the clog has been cleared, slowly retract the drain snake cable, reversing the steps you took during insertion, being careful not to twist the cable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CIKmTpyy_Qo 84 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10724-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mlM1kuECosQ/hqdefault.jpg Retract the Snake — Drain Snaking Once you believe the clog has been cleared, begin retracting the snake. Pull the snake back into the drum by reversing the feeding process. As the snake head comes out of the pipe, it may have debris from the clog wrapped around it. Be aware that some clogs, like those caused by grease, might be pushed through without being caught on the snake's head. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mlM1kuECosQ 15 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10725-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cu7bBVAvy6U/hqdefault.jpg Test Drain Flow — Drain Snaking After clearing the line, go inside to the kitchen. Run a large volume of hot water into the sink. Pull the drain stopper and observe the drainage. The water should drain rapidly with a strong vortex, indicating that the clog has been successfully removed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cu7bBVAvy6U 72 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10725-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FrVw-WhlgIQ/hqdefault.jpg Test drain flow — Drain Snaking Test the drain. Run the water in the shower again to make sure the water drains properly. This confirms the clog has been successfully removed and the drain is functioning correctly. Pay attention to how fast the water is draining and if there is any standing water. If the drain is still draining slowly or there is standing water, repeat the snaking process or try other methods. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FrVw-WhlgIQ 51 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10725-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FrVw-WhlgIQ/hqdefault.jpg Test drain flow — Drain Snaking Test the drain. Run the water in the shower again to make sure the water drains properly. This confirms the clog has been successfully removed and the drain is functioning correctly. Pay attention to how fast the water is draining and if there is any standing water. If the drain is still draining slowly or there is standing water, repeat the snaking process or try other methods. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FrVw-WhlgIQ 51 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10726-1 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jsaogl8g2T4/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Store Drain Snake — Drain Snaking Rinse the drain snake with water and let it dry to prevent rust and buildup. Wrap the tip of the drain snake in toilet paper to avoid accidents, then feed the snake back into the canister, lock the lever and store in a safe place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jsaogl8g2T4 117 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10726-2 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/h0Vjz2GLfCs/hqdefault.jpg Test Drain and Clean Up — Drain Snaking Once the drain has been snaked, remove the tool. Turn on the faucet to run water and test if the drain is now clear. The water should flow freely without backing up. Use a rag or paper towels to clean up any debris that was splattered onto the sink basin and surrounding areas. Check the plumbing underneath the sink to ensure no leaks were created during the process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/h0Vjz2GLfCs 23 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10726-3 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/h0Vjz2GLfCs/hqdefault.jpg Test Drain and Clean Up — Drain Snaking Once the drain has been snaked, remove the tool. Turn on the faucet to run water and test if the drain is now clear. The water should flow freely without backing up. Use a rag or paper towels to clean up any debris that was splattered onto the sink basin and surrounding areas. Check the plumbing underneath the sink to ensure no leaks were created during the process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/h0Vjz2GLfCs 23 2026-10-07T14:17:06.155Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10711-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Locate Septic Tank Access Points — Septic Tank Pumping The first step involves carefully locating the buried inlet and outlet access lids of the septic tank. This typically requires probing the ground and then digging to expose the lids. The video shows the process of excavating the soil to reveal these access points. Special care must be taken to avoid damaging any existing buried utility lines or irrigation systems during excavation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10711-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dZ9xUgOOElM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Septic Tank Lids — Septic Tank Pumping Begin by inspecting the septic tank lids. Ensure that all lids are accessible, not buried under excessive growth, and securely fastened with bolts. Unbolted lids can be extremely dangerous due to the risk of falling into the tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dZ9xUgOOElM 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10711-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZkRRxbq8DYs/hqdefault.jpg Locating Septic Tank — Septic Tank Pumping Identify the location of the vent pipes on the roof, which usually align with the sewer pipes under the house leading to the cleanout and the septic tank. This helps approximate the tank location. Probe the ground to get a rough estimate of the tank's depth. The echo indicates the tank's position. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZkRRxbq8DYs 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10712-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SurOHejmcZU/hqdefault.jpg pump out septic tank — Septic Tank Pumping Connect a large green corrugated hose to a septic pumping truck. Insert the end of the hose into the septic tank and begin pumping out the accumulated sludge and waste. The video shows the sludge being extracted. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SurOHejmcZU 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10712-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Vacuum Pump for Pumping — Septic Tank Pumping Before pumping can begin, the specialized vacuum pump on the septic truck must be activated. The video shows the operator engaging the Masport Cobra LCW vacuum pump by flipping a switch on the control panel, setting it to vacuum mode. This creates the necessary suction to extract the contents from the septic tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10712-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Pump Down Inlet Side — Septic Tank Pumping With the vacuum pump active, a large diameter vacuum hose is inserted into the inlet chamber of the septic tank. The pump then begins to draw out the liquid and semi-solid waste. Even if the scum layer at the top of the tank is not excessively thick, starting the pumping process is crucial for effective cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10713-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KiThznLYJ2U/hqdefault.jpg Locate and Access Septic Tank Lids — Septic Tank Pumping Begin by locating the septic tank lids. In this case, the customer had already dug up the outlet side lid. If the lids are buried, carefully excavate the soil around the access points until both the inlet and outlet lids are exposed and accessible. The video shows a shovel being used to clear soil around the access point. Note that septic tank lids can be heavy and require care when opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KiThznLYJ2U 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10713-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ShnwMn5Xo5U/hqdefault.jpg Identify and Open Septic Tank Access — Septic Tank Pumping The host, wearing protective gloves, identifies the septic tank access point. It's marked by a small, round concrete cover that is partially obscured by dirt and grass. He removes the dirt and lifts the concrete cover to reveal the circular opening of the septic tank, allowing access for the sewer hose. He notes that this is indeed the septic tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ShnwMn5Xo5U 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10713-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Open Septic Tank Lids — Septic Tank Pumping Once the septic tank lids are exposed, carefully remove them to access the tank's chambers. The video demonstrates using a tool, possibly a small pickaxe or lid lifter, to pry open the lids. Special attention is required for the outlet side lid, as irrigation lines may be closely situated. The operator carefully shimmies off the lid to avoid breaking these lines. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10714-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Pump Down Inlet Side — Septic Tank Pumping With the vacuum pump active, a large diameter vacuum hose is inserted into the inlet chamber of the septic tank. The pump then begins to draw out the liquid and semi-solid waste. Even if the scum layer at the top of the tank is not excessively thick, starting the pumping process is crucial for effective cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10714-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SurOHejmcZU/hqdefault.jpg pump out septic tank — Septic Tank Pumping Connect a large green corrugated hose to a septic pumping truck. Insert the end of the hose into the septic tank and begin pumping out the accumulated sludge and waste. The video shows the sludge being extracted. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SurOHejmcZU 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10714-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZkRRxbq8DYs/hqdefault.jpg Pumping and Rinsing — Septic Tank Pumping Pump out the septic tank until the bottom is visible. Rinse the bottom of the septic tank with a water hose to clean it. Ask someone to flush the toilet to make sure everything exits the house and enters the septic tank properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZkRRxbq8DYs 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10715-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Final Assessment and Completion — Septic Tank Pumping With the septic tank thoroughly cleaned and pumped down, a final assessment is made. The tank is visually inspected to ensure it is clear of waste and to check for any structural damage, such as cracks in the walls. Once confirmed to be in good condition, the lids are securely replaced. The professional indicates that the system is now properly maintained and should function effectively for the next three to five years, depending on usage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10715-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Rinse and Pump Both Chambers — Septic Tank Pumping After the initial pumping and breakdown of solids, both chambers of the septic tank are thoroughly rinsed. The video shows a high-pressure water nozzle being used to spray down the tank walls and bottom, dislodging any remaining sludge and residue. The vacuum pump then extracts this rinse water, along with any newly dislodged solids, ensuring a complete and thorough cleaning of the tank's interior. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10715-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dZ9xUgOOElM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Septic Tank Lids — Septic Tank Pumping Begin by inspecting the septic tank lids. Ensure that all lids are accessible, not buried under excessive growth, and securely fastened with bolts. Unbolted lids can be extremely dangerous due to the risk of falling into the tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dZ9xUgOOElM 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10717-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8BDBsLYbYI/hqdefault.jpg Secure and Maintain Access Lids — Septic Tank Pumping Ensure all septic system access lids are easily accessible for maintenance and inspection, but most importantly, securely fastened to prevent accidental entry. These lids should ideally include a safety screen underneath to prevent small animals or children from falling into the tank. This is a critical safety measure for any household with a septic system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8BDBsLYbYI 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10717-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dZ9xUgOOElM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Septic Tank Lids — Septic Tank Pumping Begin by inspecting the septic tank lids. Ensure that all lids are accessible, not buried under excessive growth, and securely fastened with bolts. Unbolted lids can be extremely dangerous due to the risk of falling into the tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dZ9xUgOOElM 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10717-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bJEm5WGfbYM/hqdefault.jpg Install the New Septic Tank Lid — Septic Tank Pumping With the concrete lid successfully cast and demolded, it is carefully lowered back into the septic tank opening. The presenter uses lifting straps, connected to the embedded rebar handle, to safely maneuver the heavy concrete lid into its final position. The custom fit ensures a tight seal, which is crucial for preventing odors and maintaining the integrity of the septic system. He notes that while it might not be a 'perfect' fit due to the irregular hole, it's a tight seal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bJEm5WGfbYM 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10718-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7hpDfi-Aa4Y/hqdefault.jpg Connecting and Discharging Septic Waste — Septic Tank Pumping A worker attaches the large, flexible discharge hose from the septic pump truck to a designated discharge point. While facilities may offer specific nozzles, it's common for waste to be discharged directly into a ground-level opening. The worker then opens a valve to release the accumulated septic waste from the truck, which flows out as a thick, dark material. The speaker highlights a past incident where a 'new guy' was hit with sewage after standing in front of the valve, emphasizing the importance of proper procedure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7hpDfi-Aa4Y 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10718-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SurOHejmcZU/hqdefault.jpg pump out septic tank — Septic Tank Pumping Connect a large green corrugated hose to a septic pumping truck. Insert the end of the hose into the septic tank and begin pumping out the accumulated sludge and waste. The video shows the sludge being extracted. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SurOHejmcZU 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10718-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7hpDfi-Aa4Y/hqdefault.jpg Facility Arrival and Access — Septic Tank Pumping The process begins with a septic pump truck arriving at a dedicated septic treatment plant. The driver navigates to the entrance and uses an identification badge to gain access to the secure facility. This highlights the controlled access required for waste disposal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7hpDfi-Aa4Y 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10719-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZkRRxbq8DYs/hqdefault.jpg Pumping and Rinsing — Septic Tank Pumping Pump out the septic tank until the bottom is visible. Rinse the bottom of the septic tank with a water hose to clean it. Ask someone to flush the toilet to make sure everything exits the house and enters the septic tank properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZkRRxbq8DYs 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10719-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Rinse and Pump Both Chambers — Septic Tank Pumping After the initial pumping and breakdown of solids, both chambers of the septic tank are thoroughly rinsed. The video shows a high-pressure water nozzle being used to spray down the tank walls and bottom, dislodging any remaining sludge and residue. The vacuum pump then extracts this rinse water, along with any newly dislodged solids, ensuring a complete and thorough cleaning of the tank's interior. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10719-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Y31FugjuBho/hqdefault.jpg Rinse Septic Chambers — Septic Tank Pumping Once each chamber has been thoroughly pumped down and emptied of its main contents, rinse the interior surfaces with a water hose. Direct a strong stream of fresh water along the walls and bottom of the chambers, as well as any internal pipes or components, to dislodge any remaining solids, film, or residue. This step is important for a complete cleaning, helping to prevent future buildup, ensure the system's continued efficiency, and facilitate proper visual inspection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Y31FugjuBho 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10704-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qbt8UPyRPNU/hqdefault.jpg Arrange Site Survey and Planning — Residential Solar Panel System Before any physical work begins, arrange for a reputable solar panel installation company to conduct a thorough site survey. During this survey, various factors will be assessed, including the size of your roof, the direction it faces (ideally East to West or South-facing for optimal sunlight exposure, avoiding North-facing), the amount of electricity you wish to generate, and your budget. This survey is crucial for developing a detailed plan for the installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qbt8UPyRPNU 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10704-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SD2uoj4-TW4/hqdefault.jpg Initial Site Assessment and Feasibility Study — Residential Solar Panel System Begin by assessing your property's suitability for solar panels. This involves evaluating your current energy consumption, checking for local regulations or homeowner association (HOA) restrictions (e.g., historical home restrictions on roof panels), and determining available space and sun exposure for either roof-mounted or ground-mounted systems. The video highlights a case where local regulations required a ground-mounted system. Understanding these initial constraints is vital before proceeding with design or application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SD2uoj4-TW4 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10704-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xGVOfox9xj0/hqdefault.jpg Schedule and Undergo Site Visit and Estimate — Residential Solar Panel System The next crucial step involves a site visit conducted by a Solar Fast expert, which can be performed either in-home or remotely, depending on your preference and the assessment needs. The primary purpose of this visit is for the expert to thoroughly assess your property's suitability for solar panels, considering factors such as roof orientation, potential shading from trees or other structures, and the structural integrity of your roof. Based on this comprehensive assessment, they will recommend the most suitable solar solution specifically designed for your home and provide an independently verified saving estimate, outlining the expected financial benefits and return on investment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xGVOfox9xj0 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10705-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ToxFObjnlF0/hqdefault.jpg Secure Permits & Plan Electrical/Structural Design — Residential Solar Panel System The creator explains the importance of obtaining both a building permit and an electrical code permit. He details the process for the building permit, which was relatively simple by checking a custom "PV install" box on the application. For the electrical code permit, he submitted a complex 16-page application containing detailed site plans, single-line diagrams, safety labels, attachment plans, datasheets for modules, optimizers, and inverters, a mounting system datasheet, an engineering letter, and fire/grounding certifications. He mentions using an online program to generate these professional documents and resorted to hand-drawing a simplified electrical diagram when the program proved too complex for a specific component. He also highlights the need to research the National Electrical Code (NEC) for wire types, conduit fill, and grid tie-in methods. Additionally, a structural engineer's approval for the roof trusses was required, which he obtained through an online service. Finally, an interconnection application with the power company was necessary to allow connection to the grid and receive credit for excess energy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ToxFObjnlF0 231 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10705-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SD2uoj4-TW4/hqdefault.jpg System Design and Permitting Application — Residential Solar Panel System Work with your chosen solar installer to finalize the system design and apply for all required permits. This step involves creating detailed engineering plans for the solar array, electrical wiring, and mounting structures, tailored to your property's specific characteristics (e.g., roof type, ground space, sun exposure). The installer typically handles the submission of these plans to local building departments and other relevant authorities (e.g., historical review boards for historic homes) to obtain necessary building and electrical permits. The video explicitly mentions that installation only proceeds 'once all permits are secured.' https://www.youtube.com/embed/SD2uoj4-TW4 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10705-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B-WrrMI_x28/hqdefault.jpg Verify Certifications and Check Local Regulations — Residential Solar Panel System Before operating the DIY solar kit, confirm that the micro inverter has all necessary certifications, particularly UL 1741, which is crucial for safety and generally acceptable to electrical inspectors and utilities. Contact your local electrical inspector and utility provider to understand their specific requirements for plug-and-play solar systems. In some cases, while direct plug-in might be technically feasible, utilities may not approve net metering (crediting you for excess power sent back to the grid), or homeowners associations (HOAs) might have restrictions on ground-mounted systems. Ensure your installation meets all local codes and regulations to avoid issues. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B-WrrMI_x28 91 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10706-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sGKY04fPzfE/hqdefault.jpg Install Mounting Rails — Residential Solar Panel System Once all roof attachments are in place, install the mounting rails. These aluminum rails run perpendicular to the rafters and are attached to the brackets previously installed. Use T-bolts or similar hardware to fasten the rails to the brackets. Ensure the rails are level and square across the entire array, as this will dictate the final alignment of the solar panels. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sGKY04fPzfE 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10706-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7MQSiBRXf1g/hqdefault.jpg Mounting Rail Installation — Residential Solar Panel System Workers install long metal fixing rails onto the prepared roof surface. These rails typically attach to the roof's rafters or trusses using specialized mounts that are secured under the roof tiles without compromising waterproofing. These rails form the framework upon which the solar panels will be mounted. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7MQSiBRXf1g 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10706-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/A1DsT2mVSbA/hqdefault.jpg Install Roof Mounting Brackets — Residential Solar Panel System After preparing the roof surface, transport the pre-assembled mounting brackets to the flat roof. Carefully position the brackets according to the pre-planned layout, ensuring proper spacing and alignment for the solar panels. Secure the brackets firmly to the roof surface using appropriate fasteners, taking care not to compromise the newly laid waterproofing. Double-check all connections and stability of the mounting system before proceeding to install the panels. https://www.youtube.com/embed/A1DsT2mVSbA 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10707-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qbt8UPyRPNU/hqdefault.jpg Install Solar Panels — Residential Solar Panel System With the rails firmly in position, the solar panels can now be installed. Carefully lift each solar panel onto the roof, typically using a hoist or carefully passing them up the scaffolding. Position the panels onto the secured rails and fasten them according to the manufacturer's instructions. This step requires precision to ensure proper alignment and secure attachment of each panel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qbt8UPyRPNU 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10707-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sGKY04fPzfE/hqdefault.jpg Mount Solar Panels and Final Connections — Residential Solar Panel System Carefully lift and place each solar panel onto the rails, aligning them with the pre-marked layout. These panels can be heavy (e.g., 50 pounds), so exercise caution. Slide mounting bolts or clamps into the rail channels and position them to secure the solar panel frames. Tighten these bolts using an impact driver to firmly hold the panels in place. As each panel is installed, ensure the PV connectors from the panel are plugged into the microinverter and secured properly. Use cable clips (specifically designed for solar panels) to further secure the wires to the panel frame, preventing them from hanging loose or touching the roof surface, which could cause damage over time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sGKY04fPzfE 95 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10707-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/iMV0Jq3uO3M/hqdefault.jpg Install and Connect Solar Panels — Residential Solar Panel System Carefully transport the solar panels from the delivery vehicle to the roof using team lifting and a ladder or pulley system. Once on the roof, each panel is individually lifted and positioned onto the pre-installed rails. The panels are then secured to the rails using specialized end clamps and mid clamps, ensuring they are tightly fastened. The DC cables from each solar panel are connected to their corresponding micro-inverter. The AC cables from the micro-inverters are then connected to the Q-cable (AC branch cable) using secure, polarity-specific connectors. All cables are neatly routed and secured to the rails using cable clips and electrical tape to prevent snagging or damage. This process is repeated for all panels on both the south and west elevations of the roof. https://www.youtube.com/embed/iMV0Jq3uO3M 310 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10708-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/khYZTmm7S5I/hqdefault.jpg Connect All Components with Proper Wiring — Residential Solar Panel System The final step focuses on the essential wiring and connectors required to link all components of the solar system. For outdoor wiring from solar panels, use outdoor-rated cables or individual THHN/THWN wires housed inside electrical conduit for protection. MC4 connectors are recommended for solar panel connections due to their secure, weatherproof, and easy-to-use design (they provide an audible click when connected correctly). For wiring battery banks, heavier gauge wire (e.g., 2 gauge) is necessary due to the higher amperage, and specialized 3/8-inch or 5/16-inch copper lugs and heavy-duty crimpers are needed for secure connections. The overall system connection for an off-grid setup involves solar panels connecting to a PV combiner, then to an inverter, and finally to batteries. For a grid-tied setup, the solar panels connect to a PV combiner, then to an inverter, which then feeds into an AC disconnect box and finally into the main circuit breaker panel with a bidirectional meter from the utility company. This enables direct power from solar or selling excess power back to the grid. https://www.youtube.com/embed/khYZTmm7S5I 112 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10708-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jSa1tvrrFZg/hqdefault.jpg Connect to Main Electrical Panel and Disconnect Switch — Residential Solar Panel System Connect the solar system's electrical output to the house's main electrical panel. This involves routing the combined AC power wires from the roof junction box through the wall (usually by drilling a hole in the panel to the outside) to an external solar disconnect switch and a combiner box (if applicable). This external disconnect switch, often a "knife blade switch", allows all power from the solar panels to be safely cut off from the house and the grid, which is a critical safety feature for utility workers. From the disconnect, thick gauge wires are routed back into the main electrical panel, connecting to dedicated breakers (e.g., 20-amp breakers for each string). Remember to connect the ground wire to the grounding bar in the panel. Ensure all connections adhere to local electrical codes and the custom plan set. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jSa1tvrrFZg 193 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10708-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ca1DVHBrqc0/hqdefault.jpg Connect and Manage Panel Wiring — Residential Solar Panel System Once all solar panels are securely mounted, proceed with wiring them. For a series connection, connect the positive MC4 connector of one panel to the negative MC4 connector of the next panel in the string. All MC4 connectors are designed for easy, secure clipping. Use wire management clips to neatly tuck and secure all cables underneath the panels, preventing them from hanging loose or being damaged. In this specific system, two separate series strings (each consisting of three panels) are created. The combined positive and negative conductors from these two series strings are then connected to branch connectors (Y-connectors) to form a parallel connection. These combined conductors will then run into the MPPT charge controllers located inside the shed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ca1DVHBrqc0 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10709-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dO3fkvQ-4Mg/hqdefault.jpg Ground the Solar System — Residential Solar Panel System To ensure the safety of the entire off-grid solar system, it must be properly grounded. A copper ground rod is driven into the earth near the greenhouse. A green ground wire is then connected from the power distribution panel to this ground rod. The video shows using a crimped lug on the ground wire, which is then connected to a grounding terminal on the power distribution panel (likely on the inverter or charge controller housing) and secured with a screw. The other end of the green ground wire is connected to a clamp that secures it tightly to the copper ground rod using a screwdriver. Grounding provides a safe path for stray electrical currents, protecting equipment and personnel from electrical shock. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dO3fkvQ-4Mg 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10709-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EuDrByddBeY/hqdefault.jpg Final System Bonding and Earth Ground Connection — Residential Solar Panel System After all panels are installed and bonded to the racking, the entire metallic structure (panel frames, Unistrut rails, inverter enclosures) must be interconnected with a continuous equipment grounding conductor. This conductor is then connected to a main grounding electrode (e.g., a copper ground rod or a UFER ground) buried in the earth. While the video doesn't show the explicit installation of the grounding electrode, this step is fundamental to a safe and code-compliant solar electrical system. The grounding system's purpose is to safely dissipate electrical faults and lightning strikes into the earth, protecting personnel and equipment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EuDrByddBeY 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10709-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s9SoXtZPxZE/hqdefault.jpg DC System Grounding — Residential Solar Panel System Proper grounding is crucial for safety and to protect equipment from surges. Connect a dedicated ground wire from the common negative busbar (where the battery negative, MPPT negative, and inverter negative connect) to a ground rod or the main grounding system of the premises. The diagram shows a green ground wire originating from the MPPT (representing the DC common bus) and connecting to an earth ground symbol. This ensures that any fault currents on the DC side of the system are safely diverted to the earth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s9SoXtZPxZE 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10710-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/C7cEoI0MMGU/hqdefault.jpg System Commissioning and Testing — Residential Solar Panel System After all physical assembly and electrical wiring are complete, the final essential step is to commission and thoroughly test the solar tracking system. This involves carefully powering up the entire system, verifying the functionality of the tracking motors and sensors, confirming that the panels move accurately to follow the sun's path, and checking the electrical output of the solar array using diagnostic tools like a multimeter or clamp meter. Ensure all safety features are operational and that the system is producing power as expected, confirming the successful installation and readiness for optimal operation. This step also includes any final programming or calibration of the tracking control unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/C7cEoI0MMGU 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10710-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ToxFObjnlF0/hqdefault.jpg Connect to Grid & Pass Inspection — Residential Solar Panel System After all inspections are passed and the bi-directional meter is installed, the final step is to activate the solar system. The creator demonstrates pulling the safety switch from the "off" to the "on" position, connecting the system to the grid. He shows the inverter display initializing and sensing the power optimizers, indicating the system is beginning to produce power. The production meter starts at zero and then increments, confirming energy generation. Over a year later, the system has successfully eliminated his monthly electricity bills and, thanks to renewable energy credits, he is actually making money each month. The video concludes with a positive reflection on the rewarding experience of installing the power plant himself and the ongoing success of the system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ToxFObjnlF0 86 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10710-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bTAUlJlECSI/hqdefault.jpg Install Inverter and Commission System — Residential Solar Panel System This final major step involves installing the inverter, which converts the DC electricity from the solar panels into AC electricity usable by the home. The video shows two Luminous inverters mounted on a wall with associated distribution boxes (0:23-0:26, 0:45-0:47). The inverter is connected to the DC wiring from the panels and to the home's main electrical panel (AC side). After installation, the entire solar power system is commissioned, which includes testing, verification of proper operation, and integration with the utility grid if it's a grid-tied system. This step typically requires a certified electrician. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bTAUlJlECSI 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10694-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B4N81fAd-kw/hqdefault.jpg Unplug Refrigerator — Refrigerator Repair Before beginning any repair, ensure you unplug the refrigerator's power cord from the electrical outlet to prevent electrical shock. This is a critical safety step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B4N81fAd-kw 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10694-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c7FRHKyTqYE/hqdefault.jpg Unplug the Refrigerator — Refrigerator Repair Before beginning any work on the refrigerator, ensure it is completely powered off by unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet. This is a crucial safety step to prevent electrical shock. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c7FRHKyTqYE 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10694-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bPJM0TCaQDg/hqdefault.jpg Unplug Refrigerator Power — Refrigerator Repair Before beginning the repair, ensure the refrigerator is completely unplugged or the power supply to it is disconnected. This is a critical safety step to prevent electrical shock. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bPJM0TCaQDg 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10695-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IeGGNSwLRqE/hqdefault.jpg Check for Power Supply — Refrigerator Repair Begin by checking if the refrigerator is receiving power. Open the refrigerator door and observe if the interior light turns on. If the light does not illuminate, inspect the power cord to ensure it is securely plugged into the electrical wall outlet and that the cord itself is not damaged. To confirm the electrical outlet is functional, plug in another small appliance, such as a lamp or a radio, to see if it powers on. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IeGGNSwLRqE 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10695-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jSW9zdZezmM/hqdefault.jpg Check Power Supply and Electrical Connections — Refrigerator Repair If the refrigerator is not refrigerating, first check the power supply. Verify that the power plug is securely connected to the electrical outlet. If it's disconnected, plug it back in. Also, check your home's circuit breaker panel or fuse box to ensure that the refrigerator's circuit breaker has not tripped or that a fuse hasn't blown. To quickly check for a power issue within the refrigerator itself, open the refrigerator door and observe if the interior lamp is lit. If the lamp is not lit, it indicates a lack of electrical supply to the unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jSW9zdZezmM 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10695-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wcOE7MmHR78/hqdefault.jpg Check Power Connection — Refrigerator Repair If the refrigerator is experiencing 'no refrigeration,' the first step is to check if the power plug is disconnected from the electrical outlet. If it is, securely re-plug it into the socket. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wcOE7MmHR78 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10696-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VHOXX_yq_F4/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Clean Condenser Coils — Refrigerator Repair Access the back of the refrigerator, ensuring it is unplugged for safety. Locate the condenser coils, which are typically found at the bottom rear of the unit. Inspect these coils for any accumulation of dust, pet hair, or other debris. The video shows heavily caked coils. Clean the condenser coils thoroughly using a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment or a coil brush to remove all buildup. This improves airflow and heat dissipation, which is crucial for proper cooling. Also, check if the condenser fan is running and if the compressor is warm and humming, indicating it's operating. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VHOXX_yq_F4 85 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10696-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QZrQ3Y5n-o4/hqdefault.jpg Clean Condenser Coils — Refrigerator Repair Locate the condenser coils, typically found at the rear of the refrigerator behind an access panel. Remove the access panel to expose the coils. Once exposed, use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment or a condenser cleaning brush to carefully remove any accumulated dust, pet hair, and debris from the coils and the surrounding area, including the compressor and fan. Clean until the coils are visibly clear of obstructions. Dirty coils hinder the refrigerator's ability to dissipate heat, causing it to run longer and potentially warm up the freezer and refrigerator compartments. Regular cleaning (at least once a year) can improve efficiency by up to 30%. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QZrQ3Y5n-o4 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10696-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xj2jEaL_D_w/hqdefault.jpg Clean Dirty Condenser Coils — Refrigerator Repair Condenser coils are essential for refrigeration, as they release heat from the refrigerator into the surrounding environment. Over time, these coils can accumulate dust and dirt, reducing their efficiency. Locate the condenser coils, typically found at the back or underneath the refrigerator. Inspect them for excessive dust build-up. Additionally, check the vent holes that allow air to flow over the coils. If they are clogged with dust or debris, clean them thoroughly. This can be done using a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment or a long-handled brush to remove dust and lint. Regular cleaning of these coils can significantly improve your refrigerator's cooling performance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xj2jEaL_D_w 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10697-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9jinCPuo4eQ/hqdefault.jpg Test Door Seals and Lights — Refrigerator Repair Test the operation of both the refrigerator and freezer doors. Open and close each door several times to check for smooth movement and proper latching. While the doors are open, observe if the interior lights illuminate and turn off when the door is closed (or when the light switch is pressed). Next, examine the door gaskets (seals) for any tears, cracks, or signs of wear, ensuring they create a tight seal when the doors are closed. You can perform a 'paper test' by closing a dollar bill or a piece of paper in the door; if it pulls out easily, the seal might be compromised. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9jinCPuo4eQ 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10697-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/At7hRY3bmj4/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Maintain Door Seals — Refrigerator Repair Regularly inspect the door seals of your fridge freezer for any signs of wear, tear, or damage. An ineffective door seal will allow cold air to escape, causing the appliance to work harder and consume more energy. To test the seal's effectiveness, place a 5-pound note (or similar thin paper) between the door and the fridge freezer frame, then close the door. If the note drops down or can be pulled out easily, the seal needs to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/At7hRY3bmj4 29 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10697-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fv1OVYRzxJM/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Door Seal Issue — Refrigerator Repair Begin by identifying the symptoms of a faulty refrigerator door seal. These can include frost build-up on the inside of the freezer compartment, which indicates warm air entering. You can also visually inspect the gasket for any visible gaps or hardened sections. For a more definitive test, place a flashlight inside the refrigerator or freezer and close the door. If light is visible from the outside, there is a gap in the seal. Pay particular attention to the top and bottom of the door, as heat tends to rise. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fv1OVYRzxJM 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10698-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_m7pW3PueJs/hqdefault.jpg Test Evaporator Fan Motor Operation — Refrigerator Repair To quickly test the evaporator fan motor, open the freezer door. Normally, the fan should turn off when the door is open. To simulate the door being closed, press the door switch (often found in the door frame). With the switch held down, listen or look into the compartment to ensure the fan motor is running. If the fan is not running, further testing with a voltmeter is needed to confirm it is receiving adequate power, which will help determine if the fan motor itself has failed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_m7pW3PueJs 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10698-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NU1DMYBkQVg/hqdefault.jpg Confirm Evaporator Fan Malfunction — Refrigerator Repair Open the freezer door and listen carefully. The user notes a crackling sound, which indicates that the evaporator coil is actively freezing up, confirming the compressor is working. However, the evaporator fan motor is still not audible, confirming it is not circulating cold air. This observation strongly suggests that the evaporator fan motor is faulty. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NU1DMYBkQVg 39 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10698-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/72_ePKrOn5c/hqdefault.jpg Access Evaporator Fan Motor — Refrigerator Repair If the refrigerator section is warm, a failing evaporator fan motor could be the cause. To check, open the freezer door and listen for the fan motor running. If it's silent, you need to access it. Begin by opening the freezer door and removing all contents and shelving. Next, remove the four shelving brackets by unscrewing them with a 1/4" nut driver. Then, use the 1/4" nut driver to remove the four screws that hold the rear panel in place. Carefully detach and remove the rear panel. Once the rear panel is out of the way, you will be able to locate the evaporator fan motor, which is typically situated above the evaporator coils in the center of the freezer compartment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/72_ePKrOn5c 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10699-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_m7pW3PueJs/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Condenser Fan Motor — Refrigerator Repair Inspect the condenser fan motor, which is situated on the back of the refrigerator, near the compressor. This motor's function is to blow air across the condenser coils, dissipating the heat generated during the cooling process. If the condenser fan motor fails, heat will not be effectively removed from the refrigerant, causing the refrigerator to either cool inefficiently or stop cooling altogether. To determine if the fan motor is working, remove the refrigerator's rear cover and visually inspect the motor. If it is not running when the compressor is on, it may have failed. Similar to the evaporator fan, further testing with a voltmeter is recommended to ensure it's receiving power before concluding the motor is faulty. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_m7pW3PueJs 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10699-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/O-4mhq65tyU/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Condenser Fan Motor — Refrigerator Repair Inspect the condenser fan motor, which is responsible for drawing air through the condenser coils and over the compressor. If this motor is not working properly, the refrigerator will not cool efficiently. First, check the fan blade for any obstructions like dust bunnies or debris that might be preventing it from spinning. Next, try turning the fan motor blade by hand. If it does not spin freely, the motor is likely defective and should be replaced. If there are no obstructions and the blade spins freely, use a multimeter to test the fan motor for electrical continuity. If the condenser fan motor does not have continuity, it needs to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/O-4mhq65tyU 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10699-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BYdCp3M7Pfs/hqdefault.jpg Check Condenser Fan — Refrigerator Repair With the back cover still off, plug the refrigerator back in. Locate the condenser fan, which is typically found between the compressor and the condenser coils. Observe if the fan is spinning. If it's not spinning, unplug the refrigerator again and carefully attempt to spin the fan blades by hand to check for any physical obstructions. Inspect the fan for signs of rust or damage. A non-functioning condenser fan can prevent the refrigerator from cooling effectively, similar to dirty coils. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BYdCp3M7Pfs 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10700-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XraCChCPmAs/hqdefault.jpg Replace Compressor Relay and Overload Protector — Refrigerator Repair If the refrigerator's internal light turns on but the compressor does not produce any sound (indicating it's not starting), the problem likely lies with the compressor's relay and overload protector. Locate these components at the back of the refrigerator, usually attached to the compressor. Take a clear photograph of how the wires are connected to the relay and overload protector before carefully disconnecting them. These parts can be purchased online (e.g., from Amazon). Note that relays come in various pin configurations (2-pin, 3-pin, 4-pin), so ensure you order the correct type for your refrigerator. Once the new parts are acquired, re-attach them to the compressor, making sure to follow the connection pattern captured in your photo. After replacement, plug the refrigerator back in and check if the compressor starts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XraCChCPmAs 44 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10700-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9kJ_jxM4udA/hqdefault.jpg Remove Overload Protection and Relay — Refrigerator Repair With the housing removed, you will see the overload protection and the relay connected directly to the compressor pins. In this specific mini-fridge, the overload protection (white component) is on top, and the relay (black component) is beneath it. Gently grab each component and wiggle it back and forth to detach it from the compressor pins. The components are push-fit, so they should come off with a firm but gentle pull. Be careful not to bend the compressor pins. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9kJ_jxM4udA 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10700-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4bW8IVCY1Jw/hqdefault.jpg Install New Relay and/or Overload Protector — Refrigerator Repair Before replacing, you can optionally test the old start relay with a multimeter for continuity to confirm it's faulty. Once confirmed, install the new start relay by carefully plugging it back onto the compressor prongs and reattaching all the wires according to the picture you took. The speaker notes that if replacing the start relay does not resolve the issue, the overload protector, a small black component usually located adjacent to the relay, might be the problem. It is an inexpensive part and can be replaced if the relay replacement is unsuccessful. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4bW8IVCY1Jw 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10701-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Hxy59QedQII/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Temperature Control Thermostat — Refrigerator Repair Evaluate the temperature control thermostat if the refrigerant system is not running. The thermostat is crucial for directing voltage to the compressor and fan motors. To check it, rotate the thermostat knob from the lowest to the highest setting and listen for an audible click. If it clicks, it's likely not defective. If it doesn't click, or if a multimeter test reveals no continuity at any setting, replace the temperature control thermostat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Hxy59QedQII 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10701-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aOHDM6NRuZY/hqdefault.jpg Check the Temperature Control Thermostat — Refrigerator Repair The temperature control thermostat is a key component responsible for regulating the operation of the compressor, evaporator fan motor, and condenser fan motor. A malfunctioning thermostat can lead to the refrigerator not maintaining the correct temperature, causing it to run warm. One method to check the thermostat is to rotate its dial from the lowest temperature setting to the highest. As you turn the dial, listen closely for an audible 'click,' which indicates the internal switch is engaging. If you do not hear a click, or if further testing with a multimeter reveals that the thermostat does not have continuity at all settings, it suggests the thermostat is faulty and requires replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aOHDM6NRuZY 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10701-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1x3XYL4atao/hqdefault.jpg Check Temperature Control Thermostat — Refrigerator Repair The temperature control thermostat is responsible for regulating the operation of the compressor, evaporator fan motor, and condenser fan motor, thereby maintaining the desired temperature. If your refrigerator is warm, the thermostat might be faulty. One way to check the thermostat is to rotate its dial from the lowest setting to the highest setting. Listen carefully to hear if you hear a distinct 'click' sound. If you do not hear a click, or if you want a more thorough diagnosis, use a multimeter to check the thermostat for continuity at all settings (lowest, medium, highest). If the thermostat is faulty at any setting, it will need to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1x3XYL4atao 43 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10702-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0njbDW2tWx0/hqdefault.jpg Check Internal Defrost System Components — Refrigerator Repair If the door seals are confirmed to be in good condition but excessive frost buildup or cooling issues persist, the problem may lie within the defrost system. This involves checking specific components: the defrost thermostat, the defrost heater, and the defrost control. The defrost thermostat monitors the evaporator coil temperature, the defrost heater melts the frost, and the defrost control manages the defrost cycles. Proper diagnosis often requires a multimeter to test continuity and resistance of these components, and you may need a screwdriver to access internal panels. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0njbDW2tWx0 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10702-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BYdCp3M7Pfs/hqdefault.jpg Check Defrost System (Evaporator Coils and Thermostat) — Refrigerator Repair To inspect the internal cooling components, open the freezer door. Before proceeding, ensure the refrigerator is unplugged from the wall to prevent injury. Remove any shelves inside the freezer compartment. You will need to remove between four and six screws that secure the thin metal piece covering the evaporator coils. If you encounter a significant amount of snow or ice built up on the back of this panel or on the coils themselves, it indicates a problem with the defrost system. Look for the defrost thermostat and the freezer sensor (also called a defrost sensor) at the top of the evaporator coils. A swollen defrost thermostat unit is a clear sign it's faulty and needs to be replaced. For a more precise test, a technician can check the thermostat's continuity when cooled below 30 degrees Fahrenheit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BYdCp3M7Pfs 129 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10702-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QZrQ3Y5n-o4/hqdefault.jpg Check Defrost Heater — Refrigerator Repair The defrost heater melts ice from the evaporator coils during the defrost cycle. Like the thermostat, it's typically located behind the back wall of the freezer section, along the sides and bottom of the evaporator. If the defrost heater fails, ice will accumulate on the evaporator, preventing cold air from circulating to the fresh food section, making the refrigerator warm while the freezer is less affected. To test the defrost heater, remove its wires and set a multimeter to continuity mode. Touch a test probe to each end of the heater. If there's no continuity, the heater is faulty and needs to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QZrQ3Y5n-o4 51 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10703-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OWgZg8BD21o/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Test Water Inlet Valve — Refrigerator Repair The water inlet valve controls the flow of water into the refrigerator for both the ice maker and dispenser. It is usually located at the back of the machine behind an access panel, though some models may have it in the fresh food section. Locate the ice maker solenoid, which is the component connected to the ice maker's water supply line. Remove the wiring harness connected to the solenoid. Set your digital multimeter to continuity mode. Touch one probe to each terminal of the solenoid. A working solenoid should show continuity. If there is no reading, the solenoid has failed. Failures can also be caused by a jammed plunger or a clog. Additionally, check the ice maker fill tube (a plastic tube on the back of the unit that guides water into the ice mold). If it's frozen, this usually indicates a small leak in the water valve's diaphragm, which can block water flow to the ice maker. If the solenoid fails or the diaphragm leaks, the entire water inlet valve will need to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OWgZg8BD21o 96 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10703-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Wsjssk4QCFM/hqdefault.jpg Identify Water Inlet Valve — Refrigerator Repair Identify the electronic water inlet valve, often a small green plastic component with electrical contacts and a metal bracket, usually located at the back of the refrigerator or near the bottom. This valve is crucial as it receives electronic signals from the refrigerator's control system to open and allow water flow to both the ice maker and the water dispenser. The valve has distinct ports: one connects to the main water supply line from your household plumbing (which is always under pressure), and the other routes water through a plastic tube directly into the refrigerator for dispensing and ice production. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Wsjssk4QCFM 79 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10703-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qmFBL5xAUeQ/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Water Inlet Valve — Refrigerator Repair The water inlet valve is a critical component that regulates water flow into the refrigerator for both the icemaker and the dispenser. It's often found at the back of the appliance, behind an access panel, but in some models, it might be located within the fresh food section. Common issues include a faulty solenoid, a jammed plunger, or a clog. First, verify that your house's water pressure is adequate for the refrigerator to function correctly, referring to your appliance's manual for specific pressure requirements. If the water dispenser solenoid is suspected to be faulty, locate the valve (typically identified by a larger 5/16 inch line for the dispenser) and test its continuity using a multimeter. If the solenoid lacks continuity, it's defective and the valve needs replacement. If the solenoid tests okay, temporarily restore power and water, disconnect the 5/16 inch water line from the valve, and check if water flows out when the dispenser is activated. If no water flows, the valve is likely clogged or damaged and requires replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qmFBL5xAUeQ 109 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10687-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Qwk1rER_EFM/hqdefault.jpg Plan TV Placement and Locate Studs — Television Mounting To ensure a clean installation with hidden wires, it's crucial to align the TV mounting bracket with an existing electrical outlet's stud bay. Use a stud finder (e.g., Zircon Stud Finder) to accurately locate the studs within the wall. Once the studs are found, identify the center of a stud within the desired mounting area and mark this point. The goal is to install the bracket into the studs for maximum security. The video mentions the bracket is spaced for 16-inch studs, which is a common residential standard. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Qwk1rER_EFM 102 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10687-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U6KBfh_Bimw/hqdefault.jpg Locate and Mark Wall Studs — Television Mounting After marking the approximate top center of where the wall mount will go, use a stud finder to precisely locate the vertical wooden studs behind the drywall. It is crucial to mount heavy items like TVs (or safes) directly into these studs for maximum security and load-bearing capacity. Scan the area around your marked point horizontally to find the edges of the stud, then mark the center. Some modern homes may have studs spaced 24 inches apart, while older homes commonly use 16-inch spacing. Confirm the spacing as this will affect how many studs your wall mount can attach to. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U6KBfh_Bimw 101 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10687-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hN7HX_X8rhE/hqdefault.jpg Locate Wall Studs — Television Mounting Begin by removing any existing TV or furniture from the wall. Then, use a stud finder, specifically a Zircon Edge Finding stud finder as shown in the video, to locate the wooden studs within the wall. Once a stud is detected, mark its edges with a pencil directly on the wall or on a piece of painter's tape placed horizontally on the wall. This ensures accurate placement of the TV mount's lag screws, providing a secure anchor point. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hN7HX_X8rhE 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10688-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LBeZYCH5iwQ/hqdefault.jpg Locate Studs and Mark Pilot Holes — Television Mounting After deciding on the TV's position, use a stud finder (e.g., RYOBI) to locate the wall studs behind the chosen area. Run the stud finder horizontally along the wall, marking the edges and center of each stud with a pencil. This is crucial for securely mounting the TV to the structural framing of your wall. Once the stud locations are accurately marked, hold the TV wall mount bracket against the wall at the desired height, aligning it with the marked stud centers. Use a level (e.g., Husky 24-inch) to ensure the bracket is perfectly horizontal, then mark the exact spots for drilling pilot holes through the mount's designated screw holes into the center of the studs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LBeZYCH5iwQ 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10688-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cuI0_0Bb7ic/hqdefault.jpg Mark Pilot Holes and Find Studs — Television Mounting Combine the horizontal center mark and the vertical bottom-of-TV mark. From the bottom-of-TV mark, measure upwards the dimension you recorded earlier (e.g., 17 and 1/8 inches) from Step 3. This new mark indicates where the top screw holes of your wall mount will align. Use a level to draw a straight horizontal line across this new mark, ensuring accuracy. Then, use a stud finder to locate the studs along this horizontal line. Mark the edges and center of each stud. Ideally, your wall mount will span two studs. In some cases, like the one shown, the desired center of the TV might be close to the center of a single stud. Adjust the horizontal placement of the mount slightly to ensure it can be securely fastened to at least two studs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cuI0_0Bb7ic 177 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10688-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Qwk1rER_EFM/hqdefault.jpg Plan TV Placement and Locate Studs — Television Mounting To ensure a clean installation with hidden wires, it's crucial to align the TV mounting bracket with an existing electrical outlet's stud bay. Use a stud finder (e.g., Zircon Stud Finder) to accurately locate the studs within the wall. Once the studs are found, identify the center of a stud within the desired mounting area and mark this point. The goal is to install the bracket into the studs for maximum security. The video mentions the bracket is spaced for 16-inch studs, which is a common residential standard. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Qwk1rER_EFM 102 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10689-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hN7HX_X8rhE/hqdefault.jpg Install TV Wall Mount (Part 1) — Television Mounting Align the TV wall mount with the marked stud locations. Using a DeWalt cordless drill, drill pilot holes through the mount's designated screw holes and into the center of the wall studs. Hold a dustpan below the drilling area to catch any drywall or wood debris. Once pilot holes are drilled, secure the wall mount to the studs using the provided lag screws and the cordless drill. Ensure the mount is firmly attached to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hN7HX_X8rhE 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10689-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cuI0_0Bb7ic/hqdefault.jpg Pre-Drill Pilot Holes — Television Mounting Using the previously marked pilot hole locations (on the studs), take your drill and the appropriate 3/16 inch or 7/32 inch drill bit. Carefully pre-drill a pilot hole at each marked location. It's crucial to use a drill bit that is slightly smaller than the lag screws you will be using. This allows the lag screws to tightly grip the wood of the studs, ensuring a secure mount. Before drilling, check the other side of the wall for any obstructions or electrical wires. If an electrical wire is present, it should ideally be protected by a metal plate behind the drywall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cuI0_0Bb7ic 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10689-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LBeZYCH5iwQ/hqdefault.jpg Install Wall Mount — Television Mounting With the pilot holes marked, use a drill (e.g., RYOBI) with an appropriate drill bit to create pilot holes into the center of the studs. The video shows a person wearing safety glasses while drilling, which is important for eye protection. Once the pilot holes are drilled to the correct depth, position the TV wall mount bracket against the wall, aligning its screw holes with the freshly drilled pilot holes. Then, use the drill to drive the mounting screws (typically lag bolts provided with the mount) securely into the pilot holes. Tighten them firmly but avoid over-tightening to prevent stripping the wood or damaging the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LBeZYCH5iwQ 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10690-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cuI0_0Bb7ic/hqdefault.jpg Attach Wall Mount to Studs — Television Mounting Align the wall mount with the pre-drilled pilot holes. Insert the lag screws that came with your TV wall mount into the holes, starting by hand to ensure they catch the threads. Then, use your drill with a socket adapter (or an impact driver if you have one) to drive the lag screws into the studs. If you don't have a power tool for this, a socket wrench can be used. Do not fully tighten the screws yet; leave them slightly loose. This allows for final leveling adjustments. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cuI0_0Bb7ic 109 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10690-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Qwk1rER_EFM/hqdefault.jpg Install the TV Wall Mount Bracket — Television Mounting Using a cordless drill, pre-drill the first pilot hole directly into the center of the marked stud. Once the hole is drilled, partially insert one of the lag bolts (typically provided with the TV mount) into the pre-drilled hole. Keep the bolt slightly loose to allow for adjustment. With the first bolt in place, hold the TV bracket up against the wall and use a level (the bracket shown comes with a small magnetic level) to ensure the bracket is perfectly horizontal. Once level, pre-drill the remaining holes into the studs, and then fully secure all lag bolts using a wrench or a powerful drill/driver to ensure a super secure mounting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Qwk1rER_EFM 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10690-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hN7HX_X8rhE/hqdefault.jpg Install TV Wall Mount (Part 1) — Television Mounting Align the TV wall mount with the marked stud locations. Using a DeWalt cordless drill, drill pilot holes through the mount's designated screw holes and into the center of the wall studs. Hold a dustpan below the drilling area to catch any drywall or wood debris. Once pilot holes are drilled, secure the wall mount to the studs using the provided lag screws and the cordless drill. Ensure the mount is firmly attached to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hN7HX_X8rhE 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10691-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MQ2O7c8BSDY/hqdefault.jpg Unpack Mount and Prepare TV — Television Mounting The presenter unboxes the wall mount, taking out the vertical arms and the wall plate. He notes that the mount includes universal screw sizes. He explains the importance of using longer screws and spacers for the vertical arms to create clearance for HDMI cables and ensure adequate air circulation to prevent the TV from overheating. He tests a screw in the TV's mounting hole for fit. He demonstrates how the locking tabs on the arms work (pull to unlock, push to lock). He then attaches a screw, a washer, and a spacer to the top hole of one arm, leaving about half an inch of screw protruding to avoid damaging the TV internals. He hand-screws the vertical arms onto the back of the TV using a Phillips head screwdriver, ensuring they are securely fastened. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MQ2O7c8BSDY 103 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10691-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6DpuvKG10KA/hqdefault.jpg Attach Monitor Brackets to TV — Television Mounting Begin by attaching the monitor brackets, which are part of the SANUS mounting kit, to the back of your flat-panel TV. Locate the four mounting holes on the back of the TV. Select the appropriate diameter of bolts from the included hardware that are compatible with your TV's mounting holes. If you are unsure which mounting holes or bolt size to use, consult your television's manual. Choose a bolt length that is neither too long nor too short for a secure fit. If there are any obstructions on the back of the TV, such as uneven surfaces, or if you need additional space for cables, use the provided spacers to create extra room between the TV and the mount. Securely tighten the bolts, ensuring the brackets are firmly attached. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6DpuvKG10KA 39 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10691-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U6KBfh_Bimw/hqdefault.jpg Attach TV Brackets to Television — Television Mounting Attach the vertical bracket arms (often referred to as TV brackets) to the back of the television. Most TV mounts come with a variety of screws, nuts, and washers to accommodate different TV models and VESA mounting patterns. Select the screws that best fit the threaded holes on the back of your TV. If the provided screws are too long, use the plastic rigid washers (spacers) included in the kit to create a gap and ensure the screws don't bottom out or damage internal components. Securely tighten all four screws, ensuring the brackets are firm and correctly aligned. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U6KBfh_Bimw 94 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10692-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6VqE8dwlJUo/hqdefault.jpg Hang TV onto Mount — Television Mounting With the wall bracket securely in place, it's time to hang the TV. This step often requires two people due to the size and weight of modern televisions. Carefully lift the TV, aligning the brackets on the back of the TV with the arms of the wall mount. Guide the TV onto the mount, ensuring that the brackets engage properly. Once the TV is hung, secure it to the mount using the locking mechanisms or screws provided with your specific TV mount. The video shows tightening a bolt on the horizontal bracket using a socket wrench. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6VqE8dwlJUo 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10692-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/y0MBMDXFQE0/hqdefault.jpg Mount the TV — Television Mounting With a helper, carefully lift the TV. Align the tapered end of the TV bracket (which was pre-assembled onto the TV) with the hook on the articulating arm. Gently lower the TV until the bracket hooks securely into the arm. Once the TV is hanging, insert and tighten any locking screws at the bottom of the TV bracket to prevent accidental removal and ensure it is firmly attached to the articulating arm. The TV is now securely mounted to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/y0MBMDXFQE0 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10692-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LBeZYCH5iwQ/hqdefault.jpg Mount TV to Wall — Television Mounting With the wall mount installed and the TV-side brackets attached, it's time to mount the TV. This step usually requires two people due to the size and weight of flat screen TVs, especially larger models. Carefully lift the TV, aligning the brackets on the back of the TV with the wall mount. Gently hook or slide the TV into place, following the specific instructions for your mount type. Once the TV is on the mount, make sure it is securely seated and locked into position. Many mounts have safety latches, tightening screws, or pull strings that need to be engaged to prevent the TV from accidentally coming off the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LBeZYCH5iwQ 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10693-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U6KBfh_Bimw/hqdefault.jpg Hang and Secure Television — Television Mounting Carefully lift the television and align the attached TV brackets with the wall mount. Gently hook the TV onto the wall mount, ensuring it is seated properly. Once the TV is hanging, locate the locking screws or mechanisms underneath the TV brackets. Tighten these screws to secure the TV to the wall mount, preventing accidental dislodgement. Perform a final check to ensure the TV is stable and all connections are snug. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U6KBfh_Bimw 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10693-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/y0MBMDXFQE0/hqdefault.jpg Mount the TV — Television Mounting With a helper, carefully lift the TV. Align the tapered end of the TV bracket (which was pre-assembled onto the TV) with the hook on the articulating arm. Gently lower the TV until the bracket hooks securely into the arm. Once the TV is hanging, insert and tighten any locking screws at the bottom of the TV bracket to prevent accidental removal and ensure it is firmly attached to the articulating arm. The TV is now securely mounted to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/y0MBMDXFQE0 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10693-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6VqE8dwlJUo/hqdefault.jpg Final Adjustments and Cable Management — Television Mounting Once the TV is hung and initially secured, make final adjustments. Use a level to ensure the TV is perfectly horizontal. You can then use the mount's fine adjustments to pan, swivel, or tilt the TV to achieve the optimal viewing angle in your room. If your mount includes cable management clips, route your cables through them for a clean and organized look, concealing them behind the TV and mount. After all adjustments are complete and you are satisfied with the positioning, fully tighten all securing nuts and bolts on the mount using a socket set to lock the TV into its final position. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6VqE8dwlJUo 43 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10686-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Cva3o8x52Og/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Test Fan — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Once all fan components are securely assembled and wired, return to your circuit breaker or fuse box and turn the electrical power back on. Test the fan's operation using the pull chains or remote control, if applicable. If your fan has a DC motor, it may go through a self-calibration process for about five minutes, making small back-and-forth movements before operating normally. Allow this process to complete before assessing its full functionality. Verify both the fan speeds and light operation (if installed). https://www.youtube.com/embed/Cva3o8x52Og 31 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10686-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1adpy6YicQ0/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Test Functionality — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation After all assembly and wiring are complete, return to the circuit breaker and switch the power back to the 'ON' position. Test the ceiling fan and light functionality using the wall switch, pull chains, or remote control. Verify that the fan operates at all speeds and that the light turns on and off properly. Listen for any unusual noises or wobbling from the fan. If issues arise, turn off the power immediately and re-examine the connections and assembly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1adpy6YicQ0 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10686-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_T70puyw3B4/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Test — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation With the new ceiling fan fully installed, including any light kits and fan blades, return to your electrical panel. Flip the circuit breaker that you previously turned off back to the 'on' position to restore power to the fan. Test the fan and its light (if applicable) using the wall switches and pull chains to ensure all functions are operating correctly. Now you can sit back, relax, and enjoy your new ceiling fan. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_T70puyw3B4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10679-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DlTI1eypy90/hqdefault.jpg Cut Power at the Breaker — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Before beginning any work, locate the circuit breaker panel. Identify the breaker that controls the light fixture you will be replacing and switch it to the 'OFF' position. This is a critical safety step to prevent electrical shock. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DlTI1eypy90 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10679-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LS19gHkmQ0E/hqdefault.jpg Ensure Power is Off at Breaker — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Before starting any electrical work, locate the main electrical panel (breaker box). Identify the circuit breaker that controls the power to the light fixture and wall switch you will be working on. In this case, it is labeled '22B'. Flip the breaker to the 'off' position to cut power to the circuit. Return to the room and test the light switch to ensure the power is indeed off. This is a critical safety step to prevent electrical shock. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LS19gHkmQ0E 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10679-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pE8f6Hj8s6o/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Power at the Breaker Box — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Locate the circuit breaker panel, typically in the garage or a utility closet. Identify the breaker labeled for the area where you are working (e.g., 'Kitchen Ceiling'). Flip the designated breaker to the 'off' position to cut power to the fixture. It is crucial to switch off the breaker, not just a light switch, as a light switch might be wired incorrectly and not fully de-energize the circuit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pE8f6Hj8s6o 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10680-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/poCHyaJ_0-Q/hqdefault.jpg Ensure Safety and Remove Old Fixture — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Before starting any electrical work, prioritize safety. Go to your home's electrical panel and locate the circuit breaker that controls the light fixture you intend to replace. Flip the breaker to the 'OFF' position to cut power to the fixture. Once power is confirmed off, retrieve a stepladder to safely reach the ceiling fixture. Remove any decorative glass covers or light bulbs from the existing fixture. Then, carefully loosen and remove the small brass nuts that secure the light fixture to the ceiling, allowing it to drop slightly. Disconnect the black (hot) wire, white (neutral) wire, and the ground wire from the ceiling's electrical box by unscrewing any wire nuts and loosening the ground screw. Set the old light fixture aside. https://www.youtube.com/embed/poCHyaJ_0-Q 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10680-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xk2GeVZK7wg/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Fixture & Expose Wiring — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Remove the existing light cover and any light bulbs from the old fixture. Most ceiling lights are held in place by a few screws. Loosen these screws, then carefully lower the fixture to expose the electrical wiring. Before proceeding, test the wires again with a live wire tester to confirm there is still no power present. To aid in connecting the new fixture, take a quick picture of the current wiring configuration. Finally, unscrew the wire nuts and separate the old fixture's wires from the ceiling wires. If there's a ground wire attached to the mounting bracket, unscrew that as well. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xk2GeVZK7wg 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10680-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ounIQhQ0CVo/hqdefault.jpg Remove Existing Light Fixture — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Stand on your step stool or ladder to reach the existing light fixture. Most flush-mount light fixtures can be removed by twisting the centerpiece with your hand. Once the cover is off, carefully remove any light bulbs. Unscrew the mounting plate that secures the fixture to the ceiling. Before disconnecting any wires, use a circuit tester to double-check that there is no electricity flowing through the bare wires. If safe, loosen the wire nuts connecting the ceiling wires to the light fixture's wires and carefully disconnect them. Remove the old light fixture completely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ounIQhQ0CVo 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10681-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/H-6Bx7mDbc4/hqdefault.jpg Install New Mounting Bracket — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Unbox your new Hunter ceiling fan and lay out all the components, familiarizing yourself with them. Locate the new fan mounting bracket. Attach this new bracket to the electrical box in the ceiling using the provided screws. Ensure it is securely fastened, often using the same screw holes as the old bracket. https://www.youtube.com/embed/H-6Bx7mDbc4 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10681-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LS19gHkmQ0E/hqdefault.jpg Install New Fan Mounting Bracket — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Replace the old mounting bracket with the new one provided with the ceiling fan. Use the existing screws from the ceiling electrical box to secure the new black mounting bracket flush against the ceiling. This new bracket has cushioning to help reduce fan vibration. Additionally, if the ceiling box is fan-rated and secured to a ceiling joist, install extra screws (often provided with the fan) directly into the ceiling joist through available holes in the mounting bracket. This provides maximum stability and safety, preventing the fan from falling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LS19gHkmQ0E 91 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10681-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mTor7ALu0Cg/hqdefault.jpg Install New Mounting Bracket — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation With the old fan removed, install the new mounting bracket. Take the new mounting bracket (often included with the new fan) and reuse the main mounting screws from the old fan's installation. Partially screw these old screws back into the ceiling electrical box, leaving enough space for the new bracket to slide into place from the side. Once the bracket is in position, tighten the screws securely until the mounting bracket is firm and does not wobble. This bracket will support the entire new fan assembly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mTor7ALu0Cg 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10682-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LS19gHkmQ0E/hqdefault.jpg Wire the Ceiling Fan to House Wiring — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Hang the assembled ceiling fan temporarily from the new mounting bracket using the provided hanger bracket/wire. This frees your hands to make the electrical connections. Connect the ground wires first (typically bare copper or green wires), twisting them together and securing them with a wire nut. Next, connect the neutral wires (white wires) from the fan to the house wiring, twisting them together and securing them with a wire nut. Finally, connect the hot wires (black wires) from the fan to the house wiring, twisting them and securing with a wire nut. For added safety and to prevent future loose connections due to house settling, wrap each wire nut connection tightly with electrical tape. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LS19gHkmQ0E 69 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10682-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U6X-EyNFitw/hqdefault.jpg Connect Electrical Wiring — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation With the mounting bracket installed and the power confirmed off, proceed to connect the fan's electrical wires to the ceiling's wiring. The presenter first connects the neutral wires: the white wire from the fan to the white (or neutral-colored) wire from the ceiling using a wire nut. Next, connect the live wires: the black wire from the fan to the black (or line voltage/load) wire from the ceiling, again using a wire nut. The fan also has a ground wire, which the presenter connects to a green screw on the mounting plate. He notes that he "probably should have done that before I grabbed the fan" but proceeds to do it while holding the fan. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U6X-EyNFitw 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10682-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mTor7ALu0Cg/hqdefault.jpg Connect Wiring and Mount Fan — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Now it's time to connect the wiring and mount the fan to the ceiling. First, slide the programmed receiver unit into the designated gap in the middle of the ceiling mounting bracket. Plug the receiver's corresponding wire connector into the matching connector coming from the downrod. Next, use wire connectors to connect the fan's wires to the house wiring in the ceiling. Typically, you will connect all like-colored wires: the two black wires together (hot), the two white wires together (neutral), and the two green or bare copper wires together (ground). If there's an extra red or other colored wire coming from the ceiling that isn't needed for your new fan (e.g., if your new fan's light is controlled by the remote and doesn't need a separate light switch wire), cap it off safely. Carefully push all the connected wires up into the electrical box. Then, lift the entire fan assembly and hook the hanger ball into the mounting bracket. Rotate the fan assembly until the notch on the mounting bracket lines up and clicks securely into the groove on the hanger ball. Finally, raise the main canopy piece up against the ceiling and screw it into place to cover all the wiring and the mounting bracket. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mTor7ALu0Cg 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10683-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/n7LzIuhnY1c/hqdefault.jpg Hang Fan Motor Assembly — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Carefully lift the fan's motor assembly. Insert its hanging ball into the socket of the ceiling hanging bracket by orienting it sideways, then rotate it to allow it to drop into place and hang securely. This frees your hands to perform the wiring connections. https://www.youtube.com/embed/n7LzIuhnY1c 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10683-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xnn-Zy1lnQY/hqdefault.jpg Mount the Fan Motor Assembly — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Mount the fan motor assembly onto the installed mounting bracket. The motor assembly has a bracket with a small slit designed to fit onto the hook of the ceiling mounting bracket. Carefully lift the fan motor assembly and slide the slit onto the hook. This will temporarily support the fan, allowing you to easily connect the electrical wiring. Once hung, swivel the fan motor assembly into its final position and tighten the four screws to secure it firmly to the ceiling fan bracket. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xnn-Zy1lnQY 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10683-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yxsV13OjYkc/hqdefault.jpg Mount Fan to Bracket — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Once all electrical connections are made and the remote receiver is tucked away, lift the fan motor assembly and align it with the mounting bracket. Push the fan up and into place, ensuring it sits securely in the bracket. Tighten any remaining screws (usually two or more) on the side of the fan canopy to firmly secure the fan to the mounting bracket. Refer to your fan's instruction manual for specific attachment methods. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yxsV13OjYkc 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10684-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LS19gHkmQ0E/hqdefault.jpg Attach Blades, LED Light, and Receiver to Fan Motor — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Once the blades are attached to their brackets, secure these assemblies to the main fan motor housing. Use the provided screws and a hand screwdriver, being mindful of painted threads in the motor housing that could strip easily. Carefully attach each blade assembly to the motor, ensuring they are firm and properly aligned. After all blade assemblies are attached, install the LED light fixture onto the bottom of the fan motor, ensuring its small connecting cable is properly aligned before tightening. Then, screw the LED light in place. Next, flip the fan assembly over. Attach the small canopy piece to the top of the fan motor. Finally, connect the remote control receiver's wires to the fan's internal wiring, ensuring the power supply wires are exposed for later connection to the ceiling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LS19gHkmQ0E 137 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10684-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DlTI1eypy90/hqdefault.jpg Install Fan Blades and Light Kit — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Following your fan's manufacturer instructions, attach each fan blade to the motor. This usually involves holding the blade in place while screwing it into the fan motor assembly. Once the blades are secure, attach the light cage or light kit housing to the fan motor. Install the light bulbs into their sockets. Finally, attach the decorative glass cover to the light cage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DlTI1eypy90 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10684-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dBNZ6XN4OWM/hqdefault.jpg Assemble Fan Blades and Light Kit — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Working on a flat surface, such as a bed, attach the three fan blades to the DC motor assembly. The blades are designed to align perfectly and rest snugly against the motor housing. Use the pre-installed screws on the motor to secure each blade in place. Next, take the LED light plate and feed the wire cable from the bottom of the fan motor through its center. Plug the cable into the light plate and secure the light plate to the motor assembly with screws. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dBNZ6XN4OWM 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10685-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HLrWLsCGwGk/hqdefault.jpg Install Light Globes and Bulbs — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Now, install the light globes and light bulbs. To install a globe, first loosen all the screws around the light socket where the globe will attach. Once loosened, slide the globe into place. Then, tighten each screw a little bit at a time, working your way around the globe, until it is snug. This ensures the globe is evenly secured and won't rattle when the fan is in motion. After the globes are installed, screw the light bulbs into their respective sockets. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HLrWLsCGwGk 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10685-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BASrkcmH8YE/hqdefault.jpg Attach light bulbs — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation Screw the light bulbs into their sockets in the newly installed light fixture assembly. The fan shown uses small, candelabra-style bulbs. Once all bulbs are in place, the light cover can be installed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BASrkcmH8YE 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10685-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BIRsml7nmoA/hqdefault.jpg Install Light Kit and Glass Shade — Ceiling Fan and Light Installation The final step is to install the light kit and glass shade. Locate the thumb screws on the light kit assembly beneath the fan motor. Loosen these screws enough to allow the glass shade to be inserted. Carefully place the glass shade over the light bulb and into position. Once seated, gently tighten the thumb screws to secure the shade without overtightening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BIRsml7nmoA 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10678-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — measure stairs for tread installation Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10678-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — measure stairs for tread installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10678-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — measure stairs for tread installation Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10677-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — measure stairs for tread installation Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10677-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — measure stairs for tread installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10677-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — measure stairs for tread installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10669-1 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/I9JjIkcrbOU/hqdefault.jpg Understand Charger Compatibility — Car Battery Charging The video introduces the Newport Vessels 12V Smart Battery Charger. Before use, it's crucial to understand its compatibility: this charger is specifically designed for 12V lead-acid batteries (including AGM, GEL, Flooded, and Maintenance-Free types) and is *not compatible with lithium batteries*. Always verify your battery type before proceeding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I9JjIkcrbOU 8 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10670-1 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/auhfI1zWBco/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Positive Battery Cable — Car Battery Charging Next, locate the positive battery terminal (often covered by a red cap and marked with a plus sign). Use a wrench to loosen the nut on the positive terminal clamp. Carefully slip the cable off the terminal once loose. Move this cable aside, ensuring it also does not contact any metal components or the disconnected negative cable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/auhfI1zWBco 5 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10670-2 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K-_kT8LTtDg/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Negative Battery Terminal — Car Battery Charging First, carefully remove the red positive terminal cover. Using a 10mm socket and ratchet, loosen the nut on the negative (-) battery terminal (usually on the right side). Once loosened, wiggle the terminal off the battery post and move it away from the battery to prevent accidental contact. It's crucial to disconnect the negative terminal first to avoid short circuits or sparks if your tool accidentally touches a metal part of the car body. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K-_kT8LTtDg 30 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10670-3 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WdX8dmLNwOs/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Battery Terminals — Car Battery Charging Begin by safely disconnecting the battery terminals. Use a 10mm socket or wrench to loosen the nut on the negative terminal first. Once loose, carefully remove the terminal from the battery post and move it away to prevent accidental contact with other metal components. Repeat the process for the positive terminal. Be aware that disconnecting the battery will reset some vehicle settings like radio stations and the clock. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WdX8dmLNwOs 30 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10671-1 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kEFXp-glypM/hqdefault.jpg Connect Battery Charger — Car Battery Charging With the battery properly prepared, connect the battery charger. First, attach the red positive (+) clamp from the charger to the positive (+) terminal of the battery. Next, attach the black negative (-) clamp from the charger to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Ensure both clamps are securely fastened. Once the clamps are connected, plug the battery charger into a wall outlet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kEFXp-glypM 40 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10671-2 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oKtn17sc9vo/hqdefault.jpg Attach Charger Leads to Battery Terminals — Car Battery Charging Attach the charger's leads to the battery terminals. Connect the red (positive) clamp to the red (positive) terminal of the battery. Then, connect the black (negative) clamp to the black (negative) terminal of the battery. If your smart charger comes with a permanent ring terminal hookup for winter storage, these would already be attached. Ensure any protective covers over the terminals are removed before attaching the clamps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oKtn17sc9vo 18 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10671-3 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/I9JjIkcrbOU/hqdefault.jpg Connect Charger to Battery with Correct Polarity — Car Battery Charging Before plugging the charger into a power outlet, securely connect the charger's alligator clips to your 12V lead-acid battery. Ensure the red (positive) alligator clip is connected to the positive (+) terminal of the battery and the black (negative) alligator clip is connected to the negative (-) terminal. The charger is equipped with reverse polarity protection, which will display an error ('EFF') if connected incorrectly, preventing damage to the charger or battery. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I9JjIkcrbOU 23 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10672-1 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kEFXp-glypM/hqdefault.jpg Configure Charger Settings — Car Battery Charging Locate the settings on your battery charger. Set the 'Battery Type' switch to 'Deep Cycle & AGM' to ensure the correct charging profile for your deep cycle battery. Then, select the 'Charge Rate' or 'Charge Amperage' setting. The video recommends a '10 A Automatic' setting for a fast charge. It's generally advised to keep the charger as far away from the battery as possible during charging, primarily as a safety precaution, to avoid any potential hazards like sparks or fumes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kEFXp-glypM 126 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10672-2 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WNQWaJsbqCg/hqdefault.jpg Understand Charger Controls — Car Battery Charging Familiarize yourself with the controls on the battery charger. On the left side of the unit, there is a dial that allows you to select both the voltage (6V or 12V) and the amperage setting for charging. Options typically include a slow charge (e.g., 2 amps), a medium charge (e.g., 10 amps), and a faster charge (e.g., 40 amps). The lower amperage settings are suitable for slow, long charging cycles, while higher amperages provide faster charging. The 6-volt setting is for smaller batteries, such as those found in tractors or trailers. On the right side, there's a start switch, which functions as a timer. You rotate this dial to set the desired charging duration, and it will automatically return to the 'off' position once the time has elapsed. There is also a hold position for continuous charging or boosting. The charger also features a standard 110-volt plug at the back for connecting to a wall outlet and positive (red) and negative (black) leads with clamps for connecting to the battery terminals. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WNQWaJsbqCg 103 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10672-3 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AAyNzphQRQk/hqdefault.jpg Connect Charger to Battery and Adjust Settings — Car Battery Charging After preparing the charger, connect its wires to the battery terminals. Always connect the positive (+) wire to the positive terminal and the negative (-) wire to the negative terminal. Then, plug the charger into an AC outlet. For the Victron Energy Blue Smart IP22 charger, you will need to select the appropriate battery type setting. Access the 'Mode' dial on the charger itself or use the VictronConnect smartphone app. Navigate from 'Normal' or other battery types to 'LI-ION' (or 'LiFePO4') mode. This ensures the charger uses the correct voltage and charging profile for lithium batteries. You can also adjust the charging current via the app (e.g., from 30A to 15A) to reduce heat, which can extend the charger's lifespan. The app provides real-time charging status, voltage, and current information. The charger will then begin its six-stage charging process, including test, bulk, absorption, float, and storage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AAyNzphQRQk 168 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10673-1 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WNQWaJsbqCg/hqdefault.jpg Plug In Charger and Start Charging — Car Battery Charging After the battery leads are securely connected to the battery terminals, plug the charger's 110-volt power cord into a standard wall outlet. Once plugged in, turn the charger's timer dial to the desired charging time (e.g., 45 minutes as shown). The ammeter on the charger will indicate that a charge is being sent to the battery. Monitor the ammeter, as the charging current may fluctuate and will typically decrease as the battery charges. Ensure the charging process begins as expected. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WNQWaJsbqCg 20 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10673-2 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kEFXp-glypM/hqdefault.jpg Connect Battery Charger — Car Battery Charging With the battery properly prepared, connect the battery charger. First, attach the red positive (+) clamp from the charger to the positive (+) terminal of the battery. Next, attach the black negative (-) clamp from the charger to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Ensure both clamps are securely fastened. Once the clamps are connected, plug the battery charger into a wall outlet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kEFXp-glypM 40 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10673-3 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oKtn17sc9vo/hqdefault.jpg Connect and Monitor Charger — Car Battery Charging Once the leads are securely attached, reconnect the charger. This can be done by plugging the charger back into a 120VAC wall outlet or by connecting the quick-connect mechanism on the charger cable, depending on your setup. The smart charger will then begin its charging process. Observe the indicator light on the charger to confirm it is actively charging. For the specific Centech charger shown, a solid red light indicates 'Charging,' while a green light indicates 'Maintaining'. Most lawn mower batteries are 12 volts, so ensure your charger matches this voltage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oKtn17sc9vo 68 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10674-1 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LB_9AZbpZn4/hqdefault.jpg Confirm Full Charge — Car Battery Charging Once the battery's display reaches 100% state of charge, confirm that the Electric Energy Meter shows approximately 0 A and 0 W, indicating that charging has ceased. The NOEIFEFEVO charger itself has a 'FULL/CHARGING' LED indicator; verify that this light has switched from red (charging) to green (full). The meter will also display the total Amp-hours charged (e.g., 53.945 Ah), providing a record of the energy replenished. The timer will display the total time taken to charge the battery from its initial state to 100% (e.g., 2 hours 40 minutes for 50% charge). https://www.youtube.com/embed/LB_9AZbpZn4 22 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10674-2 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/q4mMc8V7iV0/hqdefault.jpg Test System Performance (Charge) — Car Battery Charging To test the charging capability, connect an external battery charger to the battery pack. The charger shown has a handle, indicating it's a portable unit. Connect the charger's output connector to the designated charging port on the battery pack. Observe the BMS display for the 'Current' reading, which should now show a positive value (e.g., 19.95A for charging). The charger's LED indicator will typically show red for 'CHARGING' and switch to green for 'FULL CHARGING' when the battery is fully charged or nearing completion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4mMc8V7iV0 31 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10674-3 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PLH8xiwadbM/hqdefault.jpg Charge, Seal, and Final Test — Car Battery Charging Once the charger is connected and plugged in, observe the charger's display. It should indicate the battery's current voltage and typically switch to a 'Repair' or 'Charge' mode. Allow the charger to complete its cycle, which can take several hours depending on the battery's condition and charger's capacity. While charging, cut small pieces of styrofoam to fit between the battery plates and the top cover. Apply superglue to these styrofoam pieces and carefully insert them into the battery cells. This helps to secure the internal components and prevent electrolyte splashing. Once the charging is complete, disconnect the charger from the outlet first, then remove the clamps from the battery terminals. Finally, apply a corrosion-preventing coating (like petroleum jelly or dielectric grease) to the cleaned battery terminals. Place the original top cover back onto the battery and gently tap it with a wooden mallet to reseal. Perform a final voltage check with the multimeter (should be around 12.5V-12.8V). Connect a light bulb to the battery terminals with jumper cables; it should now light up brightly, confirming the battery's successful repair and charge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PLH8xiwadbM 145 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10675-1 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WNQWaJsbqCg/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Charger and Leads — Car Battery Charging Once the charging cycle is complete or you need to disconnect, always follow a specific order to ensure safety. First, turn the battery charger's power switch (timer dial) to the 'off' position. This stops the flow of electricity. Next, unplug the charger's 110-volt power cord from the wall outlet, completely isolating the charger from the power source. Finally, disconnect the battery leads from the battery terminals, reversing the connection order: remove the negative (black) lead first, then the positive (red) lead. This minimizes any potential for arcing or sparks, which is crucial as batteries can off-gas flammable hydrogen during charging. After disconnection, neatly wrap up the leads and store the charger in its designated place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WNQWaJsbqCg 61 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10675-2 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kEFXp-glypM/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Charger — Car Battery Charging Once the battery is fully charged, disconnect the charger in the reverse order of connection to ensure safety. First, unplug the battery charger from the wall outlet. This removes power from the clamps, preventing accidental shorts. Then, remove the black negative (-) clamp from the battery terminal, followed by the red positive (+) clamp from its terminal. This sequence minimizes the risk of sparks or electrical hazards. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kEFXp-glypM 37 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10676-1 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/w4oLd6gLrP8/hqdefault.jpg Reconnect Battery Terminals — Car Battery Charging First, take the positive (+) terminal wire and place it back onto the positive battery post. Ensure it slides down completely onto the post (seen at 4:10.000). Use your 10mm tool to tighten the terminal clamp nut firmly (seen at 4:17.000) so that the connection is secure and the wire cannot be easily pulled off. Replace the red plastic protective cap over the positive terminal (seen at 4:24.000). Next, take the negative (-) terminal wire and place it onto the negative battery post. You might see some small sparks when connecting the negative terminal; this is normal (seen at 4:35.000). Push the wire down onto the post and then tighten the terminal clamp nut with your 10mm tool until it is secure (seen at 4:50.000). https://www.youtube.com/embed/w4oLd6gLrP8 45 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10676-2 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KtrmHkJmZ88/hqdefault.jpg Reconnect Positive Terminal First — Car Battery Charging Slide the positive (+) battery cable clamp onto the positive battery post. Ensure it is fully seated and makes good contact. Using a 10mm wrench, tighten the nut on the clamp until it is very snug. A loose connection can cause electrical issues and prevent the car from starting reliably. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KtrmHkJmZ88 25 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10676-3 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0JE-VbmzQzo/hqdefault.jpg Attach Battery Cables and Test — Car Battery Charging Now, it's time to reattach the battery cables. Reverse the order of detachment: first, attach the positive (red) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the new battery and tighten the nut securely with a socket wrench. Then, attach the negative (black) cable to the negative (-) terminal and tighten its nut. Double-check that both battery and cables are firmly attached and secure, with no wiggling. Close the car hood and attempt to start the engine to test your connections and ensure everything is working correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0JE-VbmzQzo 15 2026-10-07T14:17:04.724Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10662-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IFjpGPZ-ZJw/hqdefault.jpg Empty the Closet — Closet Organization Begin by completely emptying the closet. Remove all existing clothing, shoes, bags, and any other items stored inside. This step creates a blank canvas for the upcoming renovation and allows for a thorough assessment of the space. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IFjpGPZ-ZJw 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10662-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zZqTH6lRb04/hqdefault.jpg Clear Out Closet — Closet Organization The video begins by showing a very cluttered closet filled with various items, including toys, bags, picture frames, and a blue storage bin. The first action is to systematically remove all contents from the closet, leaving it empty. This involves pulling out large items like picture frames and the blue storage bin, along with smaller items, to create a completely empty space to work with for the organizational overhaul. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zZqTH6lRb04 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10662-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bFLbF8o2NSE/hqdefault.jpg Empty the Closet — Closet Organization The first step in refreshing the closet is to completely empty all its contents. This involves carefully removing all stacked shoe boxes from shelves, taking down all clothes from hanging rods, and clearing the floor of any shoes, bags, or accessories. This ensures a clean slate for the subsequent cleaning and reorganization phases. The video shows two individuals collaborating to efficiently remove items from both sides of the closet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bFLbF8o2NSE 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10663-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bFLbF8o2NSE/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Closet — Closet Organization With the closet emptied, the next crucial step is thorough cleaning. Begin by vacuuming the floor and along the baseboards to remove dust, dirt, and debris, using a crevice tool attachment for tight corners and edges. Next, use a dry duster, like a Swiffer Duster, to wipe down all shelves, including the top shelf, removing any settled dust. Follow up with disinfecting wipes, such as Clorox Wipes, to sanitize and clean the surfaces of all shelves. Finally, use a wet mop system, like a Swiffer WetJet, to clean the entire floor surface, ensuring it's free of grime and dirt. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bFLbF8o2NSE 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10663-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rM12JlgABxE/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Empty Closet Space — Closet Organization Once the closet is empty, a vacuum cleaner (specifically a Miele canister vacuum with a floor attachment and a crevice tool) is used to thoroughly clean the floor and baseboards. This step ensures that the area where the new shelving will be placed is free of dust, dirt, and debris, providing a clean foundation for the installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rM12JlgABxE 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10663-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bqUwmEFevJg/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Empty Cabinet — Closet Organization Once the cabinet is completely empty, it's an ideal time to clean the interior. Use a damp cloth to wipe down all shelves and the inside surfaces of the cabinet. This removes any crumbs, dust, or spills that may have accumulated, providing a fresh and clean space for the newly organized items. For stubborn spots, a mild all-purpose cleaner can be used. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bqUwmEFevJg 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10664-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8ESj3yqzrAU/hqdefault.jpg Remove All Clothes — Closet Organization Once categories are identified or you're ready to start, remove all clothing items from your closet, drawers, and any other storage areas. Gather all these clothes into one central pile, typically on a bed or a clear floor space. This 'reset' allows you to see everything you own and start with a fresh perspective. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8ESj3yqzrAU 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10664-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Go7oxkB08zs/hqdefault.jpg Final Decluttering and Sorting of Unwanted Items — Closet Organization After organizing, gather all items that are no longer needed, including trash, items for donation, and potentially items for selling. Create separate piles for each category. The video shows a pile of clothes designated for donation, including shoes and a handbag, and a separate pile of trash from empty boxes and packaging. This final step clears out the unwanted items, completing the decluttering process and making space for the newly organized closet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Go7oxkB08zs 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10664-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vgbCThkQraU/hqdefault.jpg Declutter and Sort Items by Category — Closet Organization Systematically pull items from their original locations and sort them into the designated bins. Group similar items together; for example, all Christmas decorations go into one bin, all electronics into another, and all books into a third. The goal is to categorize everything into 'like items.' As you sort, make immediate decisions about whether an item should be kept, purged (thrown away), or donated. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vgbCThkQraU 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10665-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Zu8MXfXoWxM/hqdefault.jpg Assess Space and Plan Layout — Closet Organization With the closet completely empty, take precise measurements of its dimensions, including width, height, and depth. Based on the volume and types of items you decided to keep during decluttering, plan the optimal layout for your storage solutions. This may involve sketching different configurations to integrate new elements like built-in or adjustable shelving, additional hanging rods, and dedicated wall-mounted shoe organizers. The goal is to maximize vertical space and create designated homes for all items. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Zu8MXfXoWxM 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10665-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s9dEdHgCP-Y/hqdefault.jpg Integrate Shelving and Drawers for Full Optimization — Closet Organization After optimizing hanging space and addressing door types, focus on incorporating shelving and drawers. Shelving is ideal for folded clothes, shoes, bags, and hats. Ensure shelves are adjustable to accommodate varying item heights. Drawers are excellent for smaller items, undergarments, or delicate clothing, providing a clean and organized look. Consider pull-out baskets for items like socks or laundry. By combining double hanging, single long hanging sections, adjustable shelving, and drawers, you can significantly increase the total linear feet of usable storage, often tripling the original capacity of a standard closet. Maximize the full height of the closet by extending shelving all the way to the ceiling for seasonal or less-frequently used items. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s9dEdHgCP-Y 337 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10665-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s9dEdHgCP-Y/hqdefault.jpg Inventory Your Items and Define Needs — Closet Organization Before planning any physical changes, conduct a thorough inventory of all items you intend to store in the closet. Categorize your clothing by type (e.g., shirts, pants, dresses, coats, accessories) and consider their typical hanging lengths. For example, men's shirts or folded pants might require 42 inches of hanging length, while longer dresses or coats might need 60 inches or more. This inventory will dictate the types of hanging space (double vs. single), shelving, and drawer units you will need to incorporate. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s9dEdHgCP-Y 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10666-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s9dEdHgCP-Y/hqdefault.jpg Integrate Shelving and Drawers for Full Optimization — Closet Organization After optimizing hanging space and addressing door types, focus on incorporating shelving and drawers. Shelving is ideal for folded clothes, shoes, bags, and hats. Ensure shelves are adjustable to accommodate varying item heights. Drawers are excellent for smaller items, undergarments, or delicate clothing, providing a clean and organized look. Consider pull-out baskets for items like socks or laundry. By combining double hanging, single long hanging sections, adjustable shelving, and drawers, you can significantly increase the total linear feet of usable storage, often tripling the original capacity of a standard closet. Maximize the full height of the closet by extending shelving all the way to the ceiling for seasonal or less-frequently used items. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s9dEdHgCP-Y 337 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10666-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zZqTH6lRb04/hqdefault.jpg Install Shelving Units — Closet Organization After clearing the closet, the next step involves installing shelving units. Two cubby-style shelving units, made of a light wood-grain material, are carefully brought into the closet and placed side-by-side on the floor, against the back wall. These units appear to be pre-assembled, requiring only precise positioning within the closet space to form the foundation of the new storage system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zZqTH6lRb04 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10666-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Zu8MXfXoWxM/hqdefault.jpg Install Vertical Shelving Units — Closet Organization Install either pre-fabricated shelving units or custom-built shelves to maximize vertical storage space within the closet. The video prominently displays neatly stacked folded clothes on wooden shelves, suggesting a robust shelving system. Begin by locating wall studs using a stud finder for secure mounting. Use a level to ensure shelves are perfectly horizontal before securing them with appropriate mounting hardware, such as brackets and screws. Space shelves according to the height of your folded items, making sure to utilize the full height of the closet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Zu8MXfXoWxM 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10667-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U6FMSsUkT94/hqdefault.jpg Restock and Organize Clothes — Closet Organization With the stackable organizers securely in place, the final step involves returning the clothing items to the shelf, but this time with a systematic approach. Various folded clothes, such as jeans, sweaters, and shirts, are neatly arranged into the individual compartments created by the clear bins. Attention is paid to consistent folding methods to ensure a tidy appearance and efficient use of space within each organizer. This organized arrangement makes it easier to find and access specific clothing items. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U6FMSsUkT94 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10667-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bFLbF8o2NSE/hqdefault.jpg Organize Clothes and Accessories — Closet Organization The final step is to reorganize all remaining clothes and accessories back into the freshly cleaned and prepped closet. Begin by hanging clothes on the main hanging rods, ensuring they are neatly spaced and grouped logically, perhaps by item type (e.g., shirts, pants, jackets) or color. For folded items like sweaters, t-shirts, or casual wear, stack them neatly on the open shelves, possibly utilizing clear acrylic organizers for better separation and visibility. Utilize the remaining shelf space for hats, bags, and other accessories, arranging them aesthetically and functionally. The video shows a variety of items, including hats, small bags, perfume bottles, and decorative boxes, being placed on the shelves to complete the organized look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bFLbF8o2NSE 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10667-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Zu8MXfXoWxM/hqdefault.jpg Organize and Accessorize — Closet Organization Once all your new storage solutions are installed, it's time to bring your decluttered and sorted items back into the closet. Methodically place each item in its designated spot, making sure to fold clothes neatly (like the clean stacks shown in the video) and utilize drawer dividers, bins, or baskets to keep smaller items like socks, underwear, or accessories contained and tidy. This final step brings all the previous efforts together, resulting in a highly organized and functional small closet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Zu8MXfXoWxM 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10668-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aMtNR-2thcU/hqdefault.jpg Implement Labeling System — Closet Organization Use a label maker to create clear, concise labels for each bin and for the shelves where the bins are placed. Labeling helps reinforce the zones, reduces cognitive load, and ensures all household members can easily find and return items. Consider double-labeling (labeling the bin and the shelf) for maximum clarity. The video shows using a Brother P-touch D610BT label maker to print labels like "canned foods," "pasta and grains," "chips," "overstock snacks," and "dinner foods," and then applying these labels to shelves and bins. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aMtNR-2thcU 94 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10668-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VIhcSM1cdug/hqdefault.jpg Sort and Place into Labeled Bins — Closet Organization This step is where the bulk of the organization happens. From the "after" shot, it's evident that all items are meticulously sorted and placed into clear plastic storage bins of various sizes. The use of clear bins is crucial as it allows for easy visual identification of contents without needing to open each one. Similar items are grouped together to create logical categories (e.g., "Halloween" decorations, as seen labeled on several bins). Once items are neatly placed in their respective containers, each bin is labeled with a clear, concise, and consistent label (e.g., printed white labels) that specifies its contents. This systematic approach ensures everything has a designated home and is easily retrievable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VIhcSM1cdug 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10668-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JwBpitQbAU0/hqdefault.jpg Organize and Label Items on Shelves — Closet Organization Once the shelves are in place, begin transferring the categorized items from the floor bins onto the shelving units. Ensure that each clear plastic bin is clearly labeled with its contents using a label maker. Arrange the bins on the shelves with the labels facing outwards for ease of identification and access. The video highlights categories such as 'keepsakes' and 'photos', which can often be time-consuming to sort through due to their sentimental value. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JwBpitQbAU0 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10649-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2C0AmmrVquo/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect power — Garage Door Opener Repair Before beginning any work on the garage door opener, ensure electrical power is safely disconnected. This can be done by unplugging the garage door opener from its ceiling outlet or by turning off the corresponding circuit breaker in your home's electrical panel. Always wear work gloves to protect your hands during this repair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2C0AmmrVquo 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10649-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qDog-nbQ1hc/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — Garage Door Opener Repair The first critical step is to disconnect electrical power to the garage door opener. This can be done by either unplugging the garage door opener from the wall outlet or, if it's hardwired, by turning off the corresponding circuit breaker in your home's electrical panel. Ensure that the power is completely off before proceeding to prevent accidental startup or electrical shock. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qDog-nbQ1hc 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10649-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5CwYbm8PrTY/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — Garage Door Opener Repair To ensure safety before beginning any work on the garage door opener, disconnect its electrical power. You can do this by either unplugging the garage door opener directly from the ceiling outlet or by turning off the corresponding house circuit breaker at your home's electrical panel. If using the circuit breaker, ensure you know which breaker controls the garage opener and test that power is off after flipping it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5CwYbm8PrTY 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10650-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TplVc-d3T-Q/hqdefault.jpg Initial Remote and Wall Switch Check — Garage Door Opener Repair Start by testing your garage door remote control. If it doesn't activate the door, try using the wall-mounted switch inside your garage. If the wall switch works but the remote doesn't, the issue is likely with the remote's battery or programming. If neither works, the problem lies with the garage door opener mechanism or the door itself. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TplVc-d3T-Q 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10650-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YpOrUFEHyI8/hqdefault.jpg Assess Garage Door Malfunction — Garage Door Opener Repair Begin by observing the garage door's behavior. If it opens only an inch or two and then stops or reverses, test both the remote control and the wall-mounted opener button. Note if the behavior is consistent across both activation methods. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YpOrUFEHyI8 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10650-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IEweV844CbA/hqdefault.jpg Check Power and Controls — Garage Door Opener Repair Begin by ensuring the garage door opener unit is securely plugged into its electrical receptacle, typically located near the motor unit on the ceiling. Loose connections can often be the culprit. Next, inspect the wall-mounted control panel. Many modern openers, such as the Craftsman model shown, feature a 'lock' button. Confirm this button is not activated or flashing, as an engaged lock feature will prevent both the wall panel and remote controls from operating the door. Finally, check your home's main electrical panel to make sure the circuit breaker supplying power to the garage is in the 'on' position; if it's tripped, reset it by switching it off and then back on. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IEweV844CbA 65 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10651-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tz5N1Pmgg3o/hqdefault.jpg Replace Remote Battery — Garage Door Opener Repair If, after all previous checks, your remote control still isn't working or its LED didn't blink during the initial check (Step 1), it's time to replace the battery. You can use a common visor clip, or a small flathead screwdriver, to carefully pry open the plastic casing of the remote control. Start prying from one side and gently work your way around the edges until the two halves of the casing separate. Inside, you will find a coin-style battery. This remote typically uses a CR2032 battery, which is a popular size found in many electronic devices. Remove the old battery and insert a new CR2032 battery, making sure the positive (+) side is facing up (visible). Gently squeeze the new battery into its compartment and then snap the remote control case back together. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tz5N1Pmgg3o 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10651-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9XetnVcqpCw/hqdefault.jpg Replace Remote Battery — Garage Door Opener Repair To address poor remote range, start with the simplest fix: replacing the battery in your garage door opener remote. First, remove the metal clip attached to the remote. Use the clip, or a similar thin, flat object like a small screwdriver, to carefully pry open the remote's casing. Once open, locate the coin cell battery (CR2032 is a common type shown in the video) and replace it with a new one. Snap the remote casing back together and reattach the clip. Test the remote to see if the range has improved. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9XetnVcqpCw 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10651-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CoO2IMFd3Gk/hqdefault.jpg Troubleshoot: Replace Weak Batteries — Garage Door Opener Repair If you're still experiencing programming difficulties, weak batteries in your remote could be the cause. Open your remote control and inspect the battery. Replace the existing battery with a new, fresh battery of the correct type (typically a coin cell battery). After replacing the batteries, try reprogramming your remotes again using the appropriate method for your specific remote and opener type. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CoO2IMFd3Gk 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10652-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JS-aGNHa-rY/hqdefault.jpg Program Remote Control — Garage Door Opener Repair Once the garage door opener is in learn mode, pick up the remote control you wish to program. Point it towards the opener unit and press the desired button on the remote that you want to use for opening/closing the garage door. The remote's LED indicator light will typically illuminate or flash as it transmits its unique code. The garage door opener's indicator light (from the previous step) should flash or change state, confirming that it has successfully learned the remote's code. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JS-aGNHa-rY 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10652-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TmJrfxBlQqU/hqdefault.jpg Program the Remote — Garage Door Opener Repair Press and release the 'LEARN' button on the garage door opener. Immediately after, press the button on your new remote once. Wait for a few seconds (approximately 2-3 seconds as indicated by the video's pacing), and then press the button on your remote again. The light on the garage door opener should blink or turn off to confirm successful programming. The remote will now be linked to your garage door opener. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TmJrfxBlQqU 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10652-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qzYtfm2IgUY/hqdefault.jpg Program Remote for First Door — Garage Door Opener Repair Access the wall-mounted control panel inside your garage, which typically has a 'learn' button. Press the 'learn' button once; it will emit a beep and its light will start blinking. Immediately press the 'learn' button a second time. The light will now flash differently, indicating that the system is ready to learn a new remote control. While the light is flashing, press the large, main button on your LiftMaster garage door remote. The garage door opener's light (on the main unit above the door) will flash once, confirming that the remote button has been successfully programmed to operate this specific door. Test the remote to ensure it functions correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qzYtfm2IgUY 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10653-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5yjNRXGa_BI/hqdefault.jpg Clear Obstructions from Door Path and Tracks — Garage Door Opener Repair The first potential reason for a garage door's malfunction is an obstruction. Carefully inspect the garage door tracks and the entire door opening. The presenter demonstrates how an item, such as a pole, leaning into the track or positioned in the door's path, can cause a slight collision. Even a minor touch will trigger the door's safety sensors, causing it to stop and retract. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5yjNRXGa_BI 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10653-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TplVc-d3T-Q/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Garage Door for Physical Damage or Misalignment — Garage Door Opener Repair Visually inspect the entire garage door for any physical damage such as dents, bends, or cracks in the panels. Also, check the tracks for any obstructions, bending, or misalignment that could prevent the door from moving smoothly. Even minor damage can cause significant operational issues. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TplVc-d3T-Q 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10653-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gKPhLZ_oC78/hqdefault.jpg Check for Garage Door Binding — Garage Door Opener Repair If all safety sensor checks prove inconclusive, the problem may be a physical issue with the garage door itself, specifically if it is binding or getting stuck during movement. To check for this, first, disconnect the garage door from the opener by pulling the red emergency release cord (usually a red handle attached to a rope hanging from the trolley). Once disengaged, try to manually open and close the garage door by hand. The door should move smoothly and easily along its tracks without excessive resistance, grinding, or sticking at any point. If the door binds, it indicates problems with the tracks, rollers, springs, or cables, which require further inspection or professional service. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gKPhLZ_oC78 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10654-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7pyrwoHuxOA/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Tracks, Cables, and Rollers — Garage Door Opener Repair Next, perform a visual inspection of the garage door tracks. Ensure that they are secure and properly aligned. Check the cables that run along the tracks to make sure they are not frayed or damaged. Additionally, observe the rollers as they move along the track to confirm they run smoothly and without obstruction. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7pyrwoHuxOA 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10654-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ek2rga41V5U/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Cables and Drums — Garage Door Opener Repair Check the condition of the lifting cables and their connection to the drums at the ends of the torsion bar. Ensure the cables are properly seated on the drums, free of fraying, and not tangled. The video emphasizes that if these cables are not properly positioned, it would be very difficult to open the door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ek2rga41V5U 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10654-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6-Tt4V0HW5w/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Springs and Hardware — Garage Door Opener Repair With the garage door closed, thoroughly inspect the springs for any signs of damage, such as breaks, rust, or excessive wear. If a spring is found to be broken, do not attempt to operate the door, as this can lead to severe injury or death. Also, visually examine all hinges, brackets, and fasteners for looseness, rust, bending, or damage. If an automatic garage door opener is installed, confirm that an opener reinforcement bracket is present and securely attached to the top section of the door. The header bracket, which anchors the opener rail, must also be firmly secured to the wall or header using appropriate fasteners like lag bolts or concrete anchors. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6-Tt4V0HW5w 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10655-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/j7OnPl-tBuI/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Test Safety Sensors — Garage Door Opener Repair Locate the garage door safety sensors mounted near the bottom of the garage door tracks, typically one on each side. These sensors project an invisible beam across the garage door opening. Check if the indicator light on each sensor is illuminated. If a light is off, it could indicate a power issue or a severe misalignment. Test the sensors by interrupting the beam (e.g., by placing a hand between them); the light on one of the sensors (often the receiver) should turn off and then back on when the obstruction is removed. The video highlights that a *flickering* light on the primary sensor (emitter) is a subtle but critical indicator of misalignment that can be easily overlooked. https://www.youtube.com/embed/j7OnPl-tBuI 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10655-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QmB-Lg-T9fk/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Safety Sensor Lights — Garage Door Opener Repair Proceed to the bottom of the garage door tracks to locate the safety sensors. There should be one sensor on each side of the door opening. One sensor typically emits a solid orange light, while the other emits a solid green light when they are properly aligned and communicating. The video shows that one sensor (the orange one) has a solid light, but the other sensor (the green one) is off, indicating it's misaligned or its beam is obstructed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QmB-Lg-T9fk 43 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10655-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7xjWWZyPfo8/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Safety Sensors for Indicator Lights — Garage Door Opener Repair Locate the safety sensors, which are typically small, black boxes mounted on the garage door tracks near the floor. These sensors work in pairs, with one transmitting a beam and the other receiving it. Observe the indicator lights on both sensors. One sensor (transmitter) should display a solid red light, and the other (receiver) should display a solid green light. If any light is flashing or off, it indicates a problem, most commonly a misalignment or obstruction. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7xjWWZyPfo8 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10656-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YpOrUFEHyI8/hqdefault.jpg Check Opener Mechanism and Error Codes — Garage Door Opener Repair Activate the garage door opener using the wall button or remote. Observe the chain or belt mechanism on the opener's rail. Note if the chain moves its full cycle despite the door not opening or closing correctly. Additionally, check the main opener unit for any blinking lights or error codes. The video identifies an 'ON/RED/FLASHING' error, which, according to the owner's manual, indicates 'Door component failure detected.' This suggests checking the door spring, track, rollers, hinges, and fixtures. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YpOrUFEHyI8 77 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10656-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vyzxlEsEuH8/hqdefault.jpg Adjust Opener Chain/Belt Sag — Garage Door Opener Repair If your garage door opener's chain or belt has excessive sag, it can be adjusted. First, open the door until the carriage is about midway along the rail. Then, disengage the carriage by pulling the red release handle and manually close the door. Use two wrenches to loosen the nuts on the turnbuckle, which is part of the chain/belt assembly. Rotate the turnbuckle counterclockwise until the slack is reduced. The chain or belt should be positioned at least a quarter inch from the bottom of the rail when properly tensioned. Once the correct tension is achieved, tighten the nuts on the turnbuckle securely. Finally, manually open the door to allow the carriage to re-engage with the turnbuckle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vyzxlEsEuH8 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10657-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IEweV844CbA/hqdefault.jpg Test Manual Door Operation and Inspect Springs — Garage Door Opener Repair If power and controls are verified, the next step is to determine if the garage door mechanism itself is binding. Locate the emergency release rope (typically a red cord hanging from the trolley mechanism on the opener track) and pull it to disengage the opener from the garage door. Once disengaged, try to manually open and close the garage door. If the door moves easily and smoothly up and down, then the problem lies with the opener motor or its settings. However, if the door feels heavy, gets stuck, or binds, this indicates a mechanical issue with the door system, possibly a broken torsion spring (the large spring running horizontally above the garage door). The video strongly advises against attempting to fix torsion springs yourself due to extreme danger and recommends contacting a professional for this specific issue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IEweV844CbA 58 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10657-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e4rgtvGFGwY/hqdefault.jpg Remove Trolley from Track — Garage Door Opener Repair To allow for thorough cleaning of the trolley, it must be removed. First, release the trolley from the track by pulling its cotter pin and removing the associated pin to detach it from the door connection. Next, detach the entire rail from the wall by removing the retaining nut that secures the rail to the wall bracket. Once the nut is off, slide the trolley forward off the end of the rail. You may need to move the entire rail into an upper position to gain enough clearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e4rgtvGFGwY 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10657-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LODw6n_p2Y4/hqdefault.jpg Manually Test and Re-engage Motor — Garage Door Opener Repair To test the door's mechanical movement independently of the motor, locate the red emergency release cord on the motor unit and pull it to disengage the motor. Manually raise and lower the garage door several times to ensure it moves freely and smoothly within its tracks. This confirms that the mechanical issue is resolved. Once satisfied, re-engage the motor by pushing the lever back into its position or following the specific instructions for your motor model, and then restore power by turning the outlet/switch back on. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LODw6n_p2Y4 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10658-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7T4c2LGBtAo/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Opener Malfunction — Garage Door Opener Repair The video begins by showcasing a Lift-Master 1/2 H.P. Security+ Professional Line garage door opener, specifically identifying it as a Chamberlain model 2000SDR. The primary symptom of malfunction is demonstrated: when the remote control is activated, the opener emits a clicking sound, and its internal light may flash, but the garage door itself does not move or open. This behavior is presented as a clear indication of an issue with the opener's internal logic or control circuit board. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7T4c2LGBtAo 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10658-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ljt0xNY-2yE/hqdefault.jpg Initial Diagnosis and Power Disconnection — Garage Door Opener Repair With the cover removed, initiate a test of the garage door opener. Press the garage door opener button to observe its behavior. If the unit produces a buzzing sound without any movement, this is a strong indication of a capacitor issue. Visually inspect the internal gears to confirm they appear to be in good condition, ruling out mechanical failure. Before proceeding with any electrical work, locate the power cord and unplug the garage door opener from the electrical outlet. This is a crucial safety measure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ljt0xNY-2yE 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10659-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IiSSWX-GlTg/hqdefault.jpg Check Manual Door Operation and Balance — Garage Door Opener Repair Before making any adjustments to the garage door opener, first check the manual operation of the garage door itself. Pull the emergency release cord, which typically has a red handle, to disconnect the garage door from the opener's track. Once disconnected, manually move the garage door up and down. Observe if it moves smoothly without excessive resistance or sticking. Also, test the door's balance by stopping it midway through its travel; a properly balanced door should remain in place without falling or rising on its own. If the door moves smoothly and stays put when manually operated, the issue likely lies with the opener, not the door's mechanical components or springs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IiSSWX-GlTg 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10659-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5yjNRXGa_BI/hqdefault.jpg Check Door Balance and Torsion Spring — Garage Door Opener Repair As a bonus tip, the host discusses checking the garage door's balance. To do this, manually disengage the garage door from the opener by pulling the red emergency release cord. Then, try to lift the door halfway up. If the door is either extremely heavy to lift or, conversely, shoots up too quickly on its own, it indicates an improper balance in the torsion spring system. An unbalanced door forces the opener to work harder and can cause it to stop closing as a safety measure. If the door is too heavy, the spring needs to be tightened; if it flies up, it's too tight. Adjusting torsion springs can be very dangerous due to the high tension and should generally be left to a qualified professional. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5yjNRXGa_BI 54 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10659-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vyzxlEsEuH8/hqdefault.jpg Test Garage Door Balance — Garage Door Opener Repair To test the door balance, first, close the garage door completely. Next, locate and pull the red release handle to disconnect the carriage from the chain or belt drive system. This allows the door to be moved manually. Now, try to manually lift the door about halfway. If the door stays in place without falling or rising, it is properly balanced. To re-engage the carriage, move it back towards the opener and the door will reconnect to the drive system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vyzxlEsEuH8 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10660-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Al54GfjzOgM/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Problem and Review Manual — Garage Door Opener Repair The video begins by showing a garage door opener unit with a solid red light illuminated, indicating a fault. A user attempts to operate the garage door using a 'Chamberlain' brand remote control, but the door does not respond to any commands. To diagnose the issue, the user consults the 'Overhead Door' owner's manual, specifically the 'Troubleshooting' section. According to the manual, a solid red LED light with no response from the unit indicates that the travel limits are not set properly and require reprogramming. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Al54GfjzOgM 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10660-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Pj4SSC9-BdE/hqdefault.jpg Final Thoughts and Manual/Support Advice — Garage Door Opener Repair The presenter concludes by emphasizing the importance of checking both the garage door opener's travel limit programming and the alignment of the safety sensors. He shares that the product manual often lacks direct technical support contact information, advising users to search online (e.g., Google) for the manufacturer's technical support phone number. He highlights that speaking with a technical support representative is often more effective than relying solely on the manual, as they can quickly identify and guide through common issues. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Pj4SSC9-BdE 58 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10661-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7pyrwoHuxOA/hqdefault.jpg Contact a Professional — Garage Door Opener Repair If your inspections reveal any issues, especially concerning the springs or other critical components, it is recommended to seek professional help. For more information on garage door safety and maintenance, or to find a qualified professional, visit garagedoorcare.com. You can input your zip code on their website to contact a local representative in your area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7pyrwoHuxOA 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10661-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/62eE_AYaUC4/hqdefault.jpg Evaluate Results and Seek Service — Garage Door Opener Repair After observing the garage door's behavior, if it does not balance in all three positions—meaning it either drops down or rises up when released—then it indicates that the garage door springs are not properly tensioned. This could be due to worn-out springs, incorrect installation, or simple aging. An unbalanced door forces the garage door opener to work harder, leading to premature wear and potential failure of the opener. Furthermore, an unbalanced door can pose a significant safety hazard. The video explicitly states that if the door fails this test, there is a 'good chance that your door is in need of a service.' It is strongly recommended to contact a professional garage door technician for proper inspection, adjustment, or replacement of the springs to ensure the safe and efficient operation of your garage door system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/62eE_AYaUC4 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10661-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gKPhLZ_oC78/hqdefault.jpg Check for Garage Door Binding — Garage Door Opener Repair If all safety sensor checks prove inconclusive, the problem may be a physical issue with the garage door itself, specifically if it is binding or getting stuck during movement. To check for this, first, disconnect the garage door from the opener by pulling the red emergency release cord (usually a red handle attached to a rope hanging from the trolley). Once disengaged, try to manually open and close the garage door by hand. The door should move smoothly and easily along its tracks without excessive resistance, grinding, or sticking at any point. If the door binds, it indicates problems with the tracks, rollers, springs, or cables, which require further inspection or professional service. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gKPhLZ_oC78 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10647-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10647-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads with Template Tool — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads Utilize a specialized stair measuring tool, often referred to as a stair jig or tread template tool, to accurately capture the exact length and precise angles of each individual stair tread. Carefully adjust the tool to fit snugly against the walls and any existing nosing, ensuring that it provides a perfect, custom template for the laminate cut that will follow. This step is critical for ensuring a seamless and gap-free fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10647-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10648-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for First Winder Step — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads Begin by taking a roll of kraft paper and unrolling it onto the second winder step (the first winder step to be templated). Line up one straight edge of the paper along the back edge of the tread, against the riser of the next step. Use an electric stapler to secure the paper in the middle of the riser, making sure the paper is flat and conforms to the step's shape. Fold the paper neatly around the nosing (the front edge of the step) and along the side edge of the winder. Secure it again with staples in the middle, ensuring staples are placed where they will be covered by the finished carpet runner and do not damage the visible part of the stairs if they were real finished stairs. Use a utility knife to carefully cut along the edges of the step, forming the exact shape of the winder tread and riser. This creates the first paper template. The presenter mentions that on actual stairs, the nosing would be thicker than the demo stairs, and emphasizes care when using the knife to avoid damaging the stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 108 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10648-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m0TM4PCC8Tw/hqdefault.jpg Creating Custom Templates for Each Step — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads First, use painter's tape to mark the desired outline of the carpet runner on the stair treads, particularly around the quarter round and edges. Then, unroll the brown paper over the first tread and secure it temporarily with painter's tape. Use a pencil or marker to meticulously trace the exact shape of the stair tread onto the paper. Once traced, cut out the paper template with scissors or a utility knife. Repeat this process for all six pie-shaped steps, carefully numbering each template to maintain order. Secure the templates in place with a hammer stapler to prevent movement while tracing and cutting. Remember to account for the orientation of each step when numbering and preparing the templates, as they will be flipped for cutting the carpet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m0TM4PCC8Tw 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10648-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for Second Winder Step — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads Repeat the templating process for the next winder step using a fresh piece of kraft paper. This involves aligning the paper, securing it with staples, folding it around the nosing and side edges, and cutting it to the exact shape of the step. As with the previous template, mark the runner's width, center line, and straight edges. Crucially, ensure that the measurements (e.g., 28 inches wide) for the runner remain consistent across all winder steps to maintain a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10646-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for First Winder Step — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads Begin by taking a roll of kraft paper and unrolling it onto the second winder step (the first winder step to be templated). Line up one straight edge of the paper along the back edge of the tread, against the riser of the next step. Use an electric stapler to secure the paper in the middle of the riser, making sure the paper is flat and conforms to the step's shape. Fold the paper neatly around the nosing (the front edge of the step) and along the side edge of the winder. Secure it again with staples in the middle, ensuring staples are placed where they will be covered by the finished carpet runner and do not damage the visible part of the stairs if they were real finished stairs. Use a utility knife to carefully cut along the edges of the step, forming the exact shape of the winder tread and riser. This creates the first paper template. The presenter mentions that on actual stairs, the nosing would be thicker than the demo stairs, and emphasizes care when using the knife to avoid damaging the stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 108 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10646-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for Second Winder Step — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads Repeat the templating process for the next winder step using a fresh piece of kraft paper. This involves aligning the paper, securing it with staples, folding it around the nosing and side edges, and cutting it to the exact shape of the step. As with the previous template, mark the runner's width, center line, and straight edges. Crucially, ensure that the measurements (e.g., 28 inches wide) for the runner remain consistent across all winder steps to maintain a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10646-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m0TM4PCC8Tw/hqdefault.jpg Creating Custom Templates for Each Step — wooden spiral staircase needs coir or sisal stair treads First, use painter's tape to mark the desired outline of the carpet runner on the stair treads, particularly around the quarter round and edges. Then, unroll the brown paper over the first tread and secure it temporarily with painter's tape. Use a pencil or marker to meticulously trace the exact shape of the stair tread onto the paper. Once traced, cut out the paper template with scissors or a utility knife. Repeat this process for all six pie-shaped steps, carefully numbering each template to maintain order. Secure the templates in place with a hammer stapler to prevent movement while tracing and cutting. Remember to account for the orientation of each step when numbering and preparing the templates, as they will be flipped for cutting the carpet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m0TM4PCC8Tw 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10645-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measuring your stairs for treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10645-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measuring your stairs for treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10645-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Check Your Drawing — measuring your stairs for treads Once the sub-treads are exposed, consult the provided Stair Supplies engineered tread drawings. Verify that all the new treads are accounted for and that their dimensions, such as tread width, tread depth, and nosing depth, match the specifications on the drawing. Use a tape measure to confirm these dimensions. This crucial step helps prevent errors during the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10644-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measuring your stairs for treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10644-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measuring your stairs for treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10644-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IOgUldDtg1c/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet — measuring your stairs for treads Measure the width of the stair tread from stringer to stringer (e.g., 36 1/8 inches) and the depth from the nose to the back riser (e.g., 13 inches). To allow for trimming and a snug fit, cut the carpet pieces slightly larger than these measurements (e.g., 37 inches wide by 14 inches deep). Use a utility knife and a straight edge to ensure clean, straight cuts. You will need one carpet piece per tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IOgUldDtg1c 107 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10643-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measuring your stairs for treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10643-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — measuring your stairs for treads With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10643-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IOgUldDtg1c/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet — measuring your stairs for treads Measure the width of the stair tread from stringer to stringer (e.g., 36 1/8 inches) and the depth from the nose to the back riser (e.g., 13 inches). To allow for trimming and a snug fit, cut the carpet pieces slightly larger than these measurements (e.g., 37 inches wide by 14 inches deep). Use a utility knife and a straight edge to ensure clean, straight cuts. You will need one carpet piece per tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IOgUldDtg1c 107 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10642-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — measuring your stairs for treads Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10642-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — measuring your stairs for treads First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10642-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JS1W3Ns2Zgw/hqdefault.jpg Initial Measurements and Platform Design — measuring your stairs for treads Begin by accurately measuring the total rise (vertical height) and run (horizontal depth) for the entire staircase. Design an initial landing platform strategically to prevent the stairs from encroaching into adjacent spaces, such as a hallway. It is crucial to ensure adequate head space above this landing. If the initial platform height results in insufficient head clearance, adjust its level accordingly. Additionally, consider designing the landing platform to be about 12 inches longer than strictly necessary for a 3-foot wide stair tread, as this extra length can simplify turns and reduce the need for complex custom cuts later. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JS1W3Ns2Zgw 75 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10639-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive on w Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10639-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive on w Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10639-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesiv Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10637-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesiv Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10637-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Install Remaining Stair Treads — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive Repeat the cleaning, marking (if necessary), and installation process for each remaining stair. Use the template or marks created earlier to maintain consistency in placement. Peel the backing, align, and firmly press each tread into place until all stairs have been covered. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10637-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0l3UWfmoDiY/hqdefault.jpg Install Remaining Stair Treads — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive Continue the installation process by placing the remaining carpet stair treads on each subsequent step of the staircase. For each tread, repeat the steps of careful positioning and firm pressing to ensure secure adhesion and consistent alignment. Maintain uniform spacing between the back of each tread and the stair riser, as well as consistent side margins, to create a neat and professional appearance. Since the treads are designed to be removable, minor adjustments can be made during installation if needed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0l3UWfmoDiY 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10638-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive on w Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10638-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stair Treads — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive on wood sta Starting from the top of the staircase, the homeowner carefully installs each stair tread. She begins by peeling off the protective plastic film from the adhesive backing. The tread is then aligned precisely with the previously marked tape lines, ensuring the back edge is flush with the riser. Once aligned, she firmly presses the tread onto the step, making sure it adheres well, especially over the bullnose (the rounded edge of the step). This process is repeated for each individual stair tread and for the larger custom pieces on the landings. The homeowner notes that the adhesive is designed not to damage the existing hardwood stairs, making it a suitable option for temporary or non-permanent installations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10638-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesiv Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10636-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stair Surface — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive on w Although not explicitly demonstrated in the video, it is crucial to ensure the staircase is clean before installing the treads. Thoroughly clean each wooden stair surface to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris. This preparation ensures optimal adhesion of the non-slip backing, preventing the treads from shifting and maintaining a neat appearance. Use a vacuum cleaner for loose particles, followed by a damp cloth and a mild cleaner if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10636-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive on wood stair Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10636-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rON0c9UvU2E/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Clean Stair Treads — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stair treads. You can use a microfiber cloth or any suitable cloth, optionally combined with a handheld vacuum, to remove all dust and loose dirt. The goal is to ensure the entire stair surface is clean and completely dry. This is crucial for the adhesive on the back of the carpet treads to stick properly. Avoid using any cleaning products that might leave a greasy residue, such as Pledge or Pine-Sol, as this can compromise the adhesive bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rON0c9UvU2E 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10641-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WfrIcn1Alic/hqdefault.jpg Secure Flooring with a Roller — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive Once the sheet flooring is laid over the adhesive, use a heavy floor roller to firmly press the entire surface of the flooring. Start from the center of the room and roll outwards towards the edges. This action expels any trapped air bubbles beneath the flooring and ensures maximum contact and adhesion between the flooring and the adhesive layer. Continue rolling until the entire surface has been thoroughly pressed, paying special attention to seams and edges. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WfrIcn1Alic 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10641-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/iq3Fj4Osfxg/hqdefault.jpg Secure Tiles with Roller — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive on wo After all the 12x12 peel and stick vinyl tiles have been installed, use a roller to firmly roll over the entire tiled surface. Apply consistent pressure and roll in all directions (north-south, east-west, and diagonally). This action helps to ensure maximum contact between the tile's TACSTRONG adhesive and the subfloor/wall, pressing out any trapped air bubbles and strengthening the bond for a durable installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/iq3Fj4Osfxg 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10641-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XN_-_oYavOw/hqdefault.jpg Roll and Secure Floor Covering — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesive As soon as the adhesive begins to secure the floor covering (meaning it has started to set enough to prevent significant movement), use a heavy flooring roller. Roll the entire surface of the newly laid floor covering from end to end and then from side to side. This action ensures good overall contact between the floor covering and the adhesive, pressing out any remaining air and firmly seating the material for a strong, lasting bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XN_-_oYavOw 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10640-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark First Tread Placement — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with Take the first stair tread and center it on the first stair. Once properly positioned, use a piece of cardboard or painter's tape to mark the exact placement of the tread on the stair. This will serve as a consistent guide for positioning all subsequent treads, ensuring a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10640-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread Placement — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with adhesi To ensure accurate and consistent placement of each stair tread, the homeowner uses blue painter's tape to mark the desired position on the hardwood steps. A measuring tape is used to confirm precise spacing and alignment, ensuring a symmetrical reveal of the wood on both sides of each tread. This meticulous marking helps maintain a uniform and professional look across the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10640-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WjkM8ou_xoI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Stair Tread Placement — fix popping noises from carpet stair treads installed with To ensure consistent and straight placement of the carpet treads, measure the desired distance from the edge of the stairs. Then, use blue painter's tape to create parallel guide lines up the entire staircase. This helps in visually aligning each tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WjkM8ou_xoI 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10635-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure for stair treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10635-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure for stair treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10635-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — measure for stair treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10632-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — measure for stair treads Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10632-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FiwJtKWIGJk/hqdefault.jpg Preparation of Stairs and Gathering Tools — measure for stair treads Before starting the installation, gather all necessary tools and materials as shown. Prepare the existing stairs by removing any old staples, nails, fasteners, or adhesives using a scraping tool. Thoroughly sweep and vacuum all step treads and risers to ensure they are clean, smooth, and structurally sound. If your stairs have an existing overhang, modify them by either cutting off the overhang or filling in the area beneath it to ensure the riser is flush with the step edge. Use a drill to secure any loose elements, ensuring all modifications comply with local building codes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FiwJtKWIGJk 55 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10632-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Subfloor and Measure Riser — measure for stair treads Before beginning the installation, ensure the subfloor of the stairs is thoroughly clean. Then, use a stair tread templating tool to accurately measure the dimensions of the stair riser. This tool is crucial because stairs are rarely perfectly square, allowing for precise transfer of measurements to the flooring material. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10633-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure for stair treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10633-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure for stair treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10633-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — measure for stair treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10634-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure for stair treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10634-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Check Your Drawing — measure for stair treads Once the sub-treads are exposed, consult the provided Stair Supplies engineered tread drawings. Verify that all the new treads are accounted for and that their dimensions, such as tread width, tread depth, and nosing depth, match the specifications on the drawing. Use a tape measure to confirm these dimensions. This crucial step helps prevent errors during the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10634-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measure for stair treads Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10631-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Treads — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing and turn at Starting from the bottom step of the staircase, carefully align the first prepared stair tread onto the wooden step. Ensure the tread is centered, positioned straight, and covers the desired area of the step. Once satisfied with the placement, firmly press the tread down across its entire surface, paying close attention to the edges and corners, to securely bond the adhesive to the wood. The installer in the video kneels and crawls up the stairs, applying significant body weight to ensure good contact. Repeat this alignment and pressing process for all remaining stairs, working your way up the staircase one tread at a time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10631-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing and turn a Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10631-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing and Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10628-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing and turn at ste Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10628-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing and Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10628-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing an With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10627-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4FF_td_O8ps/hqdefault.jpg Identify and Measure Out-of-Square Deviations — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with When an existing stair landing or tread is not perfectly square, a pre-cut replacement based on 90-degree assumptions will result in a noticeable gap along one or more edges. To identify this, position the pre-cut piece (or a rough template) in place. Observe where the gaps occur. To accurately measure the deviation, place a framing square firmly against one straight edge of the existing stair component (e.g., the front edge). Measure the largest gap between the other arm of the framing square and the side edge of the stair component. For example, if the gap is 1 5/16 inches at a certain point along the edge, this measurement quantifies the out-of-square condition. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4FF_td_O8ps 72 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10627-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4FF_td_O8ps/hqdefault.jpg Method for Perfectly Square Corners — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing If the existing stair landing or tread corner is a perfect 90-degree angle, simply measure the two sides from the corner. For example, if both sides measure 44 inches, mark these points on the new piece of plywood, starting from a square corner. Then, draw a straight line connecting these two marked points. This creates the exact 90-degree triangular pattern needed for the new component. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4FF_td_O8ps 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10627-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nCu4uIwBOOE/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Stairs — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing and turn at step To ensure the carpet runner is long and wide enough, accurate measurements are essential. First, select one stair tread (the horizontal top surface of a step) and measure its depth. Next, measure the height of the riser (the vertical part of the step). Multiply the height by the number of risers and the depth by the number of treads on your staircase. Add these two sums together, then add an additional 6 to 8 inches to account for waste. This total will be the required length of the runner. If using more than one runner, add an additional 12 inches to the total length to account for seams where the two carpet pieces will join. If your staircase includes a landing and you plan to install the runner there, ensure you include the landing area in your measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nCu4uIwBOOE 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10629-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CtnOYw-UEDw/hqdefault.jpg Select, Order, and Unpack Custom Stair Treads — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with Recognizing the limitation of traditional stair runners for a floating staircase, the homeowner identifies "Oak Valley Designs" as a specialist in custom stair treads. They review various fabric options, including different patterns and textures, as shown through samples. Once selected, the custom treads are received and unboxed, revealing the chosen design (a dark pattern with white and brown accents) and individual protective plastic wrapping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CtnOYw-UEDw 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10629-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing and turn at step Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10630-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing and turn at step Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10630-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Install Winder Steps and Extensions — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a landing Once you are satisfied with the dry fit of all the pieces, it's time for permanent installation. Apply a generous amount of polymer adhesive using a caulk gun to the subfloor of the landing area where the steps will sit, creating a strong bond. Additionally, apply wood glue to the tongue and groove edges of the winder step and extensions to ensure a strong, interlocked bond between the individual pieces. Carefully position and press the winder step into place, ensuring it's flush, followed by the winder step extensions. Secure the installed pieces by firing brads using a brad nailer around the outer edge, specifically in areas where they will be hidden by the next riser or the reinstalled skirting boards, ensuring a clean, nail-free visible surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10630-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VAfl-FmlGhE/hqdefault.jpg Staircase Layout and Landing Installation — I want to replace the carpet of 15 stair steps with a la After preparing all the timber, allow it to rest for two days. This resting period helps the wood stabilize before permanent installation. Then, install the top landing. Begin by marking the position of the staircase at the installation site using a laser level and measuring tape for accuracy. Ensure the exposed sill, called 'kamachi', which was previously installed with the second floor, is properly aligned. Add an additional kamachi made from pine, matching the step size, to the front of the landing. The landing floor will use the same flooring as the second floor. Secure all components using screws and a drill. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VAfl-FmlGhE 125 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10624-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 landing Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10624-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 landing Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10624-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 land Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10625-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 ste Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10625-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 landing After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10625-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2rkFnsTztog/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Risers — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 landing Use a stair tread jig to measure the exact dimensions of each riser. Place the jig on the stair, adjust its arms to fit snugly against the side stringers and the top of the current tread, and then lock it in place. Take the jig to your riser material (e.g., plywood), place the jig on it, and mark the cut lines with a pencil. Repeat this process for each riser, as each stair will likely have slightly different dimensions. Cut the marked riser pieces using a miter saw, carefully aligning the blade with your pencil lines. Label the back of each cut riser with its corresponding stair number and its top edge to maintain organization, as each piece is unique. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2rkFnsTztog 131 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10623-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 landing Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10623-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 landing Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10623-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hBQ9-Oz5oFc/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Measure Dimensions — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 Before starting the carpet installation, ensure the stairs are clean and free of debris. Measure the width of each stair tread and riser using a measuring tape. These measurements will be crucial for cutting the tack strips, underlay, and carpet accurately. The video shows the before state of the stairs, with old carpet removed, revealing bare wood. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hBQ9-Oz5oFc 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10626-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 landing Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10626-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 land Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10626-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — measure my stairs for stair treads, including 12 steps and 1 landing Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10622-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — how to measure stairs Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10622-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — how to measure stairs To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10622-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — how to measure stairs Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10619-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Learn Terminology & Gather Tools/Materials — how to measure stairs Before starting the physical build, familiarize yourself with staircase terminology: 'stringers' are the timber pieces that run along either side of the steps, 'treads' are the individual steps that sit between the stringers, 'rise' refers to the vertical height between one tread and the next, and 'nosing' is the front edge of a tread. Gather all necessary tools and materials, including timber, a threaded rod, 100mm bugle screws, timber preservative, nuts and washers, a roofing square, a circular saw, and a router. Critically, before any construction begins, ensure you check local council regulations regarding stair size and height requirements, as a handrail might be mandatory above a certain height. Also, plan to build your stairs as close as possible to their final installation location, as they will be heavy once complete. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 70 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10619-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — how to measure stairs First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10619-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — how to measure stairs Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10621-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — how to measure stairs Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10621-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — how to measure stairs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10621-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — how to measure stairs After the risers are installed, measure the depth and length of each individual stair tread. According to these measurements, cut your new hardwood treads. It's crucial to be accurate, as even small errors can lead to visible gaps. You may need to make slight adjustments to ensure a gap-free fit. A track saw, set at a 5-degree angle as demonstrated, can be particularly useful for making precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 81 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10620-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — how to measure stairs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10620-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eshpVa6P3mY/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Verify Rise and Run — how to measure stairs According to the Uniform Building Code, the 'rise' (vertical height from the top of one step to the top of the next) should be 8 inches for residential homes. The 'run' (horizontal surface area or tread depth) should be 9 inches. The host uses a tape measure to illustrate these critical dimensions on an unfinished staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eshpVa6P3mY 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10620-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/R4kXacNvKGQ/hqdefault.jpg Validate Riser and Tread Codes — how to measure stairs This step emphasizes determining local building code requirements for maximum riser height and minimum tread depth. For example, a common residential code is a 10-inch minimum tread depth and a 7 11/16-inch maximum riser height, but these can vary (e.g., 9-inch tread or 8-inch riser). It is critical to validate these specific measurements for your project location before proceeding with design calculations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R4kXacNvKGQ 34 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10618-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Secure the First Tread — installing 14-16 stair treads Once the first tread is accurately positioned, secure it in place. If the treads are self-adhesive, carefully peel off the backing and firmly press the tread onto the stair, ensuring good contact across its entire surface. If not self-adhesive, apply double-sided carpet tape to the back of the tread before pressing it down. Ensure the tread is smooth and free of wrinkles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10618-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SsGTuZzNrvU/hqdefault.jpg Place and Secure First Tread — installing 14-16 stair treads Once the stairs are clean and dry, begin installing the carpet treads. The video shows a person carefully positioning the first tread onto a wooden step. Align the tread by ensuring it is centered or placed according to any pre-marked guidelines. Once positioned correctly, press down firmly across the entire surface of the tread, paying particular attention to the edges and corners, to activate the adhesive backing (if applicable) or secure the non-slip material. Use your hands to smooth out any air bubbles and ensure full contact with the stair surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SsGTuZzNrvU 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10618-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Tread onto the Stair — installing 14-16 stair treads Carefully position the prepared self-adhesive stair tread onto a clean wooden stair. Ensure the tread is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the stair. Once correctly placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands. Apply even pressure across the tread to ensure proper adhesion and remove any air bubbles. Repeat this process for each stair, working your way up or down the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10617-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FGLDVWSWDrA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stair Tread for Installation — installing 14-16 stair treads Begin by taking one carpet stair tread and positioning it so that the back, adhesive-covered side is facing upwards. Locate the edge of the clear protective plastic film that covers the adhesive. Carefully peel this film away from the adhesive backing. The adhesive is visibly applied in a wavy or zig-zag pattern across the back of the tread. Ensure the entire plastic film is removed to fully expose the adhesive surface, preparing the tread for immediate installation onto a stair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FGLDVWSWDrA 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10617-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — installing 14-16 stair treads Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10617-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oS29zHGw5YQ/hqdefault.jpg Peel Backing from Tread — installing 14-16 stair treads The video shows a close-up of a carpet stair tread, demonstrating how to peel off the clear plastic backing to expose the self-adhesive layer. This reveals the 'sticky side' that will adhere to the stair surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oS29zHGw5YQ 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10613-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10613-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10613-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/20jjtuvaY6M/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Measure — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stairs. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, pet hair, or debris. Then, use a damp cloth with an all-purpose cleaner to wipe down each stair tread and riser, ensuring they are free of dirt and grime. Allow the stairs to dry completely. Next, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's common for stairs to have slight variations, so measure each one individually. Decide on the placement of the carpet treads, typically leaving a consistent reveal on the sides and front of each stair. This will help determine the ideal size of your treads if you are cutting them, or guide placement if using pre-made ones. The video starts by showing the finished carpeted stairs, implying these preparatory steps have already been completed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/20jjtuvaY6M 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10616-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10616-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10616-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Understand Measurement Types — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads The presenter begins by explaining that to order the perfect size carpet stair tread, two primary measurements are required: the width and the depth of the stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10614-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10614-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10614-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10615-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10615-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10615-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — How to measure your 13 steps for ordering carpet stair treads Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10612-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure my stairs Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10612-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure my stairs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10612-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — measure my stairs Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10610-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure my stairs Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10610-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure my stairs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10610-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — measure my stairs Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10611-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — measure my stairs Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10611-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — measure my stairs After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10611-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure my stairs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10609-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — measure my stairs Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10609-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — measure my stairs After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10609-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Subfloor and Measure Riser — measure my stairs Before beginning the installation, ensure the subfloor of the stairs is thoroughly clean. Then, use a stair tread templating tool to accurately measure the dimensions of the stair riser. This tool is crucial because stairs are rarely perfectly square, allowing for precise transfer of measurements to the flooring material. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10405-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — I want to install stair threads and landing pad.for 14 stairs. Can you h Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10405-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — I want to install stair threads and landing pad.for 14 stairs. Can you h Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10405-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/20jjtuvaY6M/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Measure — I want to install stair threads and landing pad.for 14 stairs. Can you Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stairs. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, pet hair, or debris. Then, use a damp cloth with an all-purpose cleaner to wipe down each stair tread and riser, ensuring they are free of dirt and grime. Allow the stairs to dry completely. Next, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's common for stairs to have slight variations, so measure each one individually. Decide on the placement of the carpet treads, typically leaving a consistent reveal on the sides and front of each stair. This will help determine the ideal size of your treads if you are cutting them, or guide placement if using pre-made ones. The video starts by showing the finished carpeted stairs, implying these preparatory steps have already been completed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/20jjtuvaY6M 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10404-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YVF2TiFLgMw/hqdefault.jpg Measure Bullnose Edge Width — I want to install stair threads and landing pad.for 14 stairs. Can you The most critical first step is to accurately measure the width of the bullnose edge of the stair landing. This measurement should correspond precisely to the width of the carpet stair tread installed on the step immediately below the landing. For example, if the stair tread is 35 inches wide, the landing carpet's edge should also be 35 inches wide to maintain visual continuity. Measure from the far left side to the far right side of the bullnose edge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YVF2TiFLgMw 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10404-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YVF2TiFLgMw/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Customize Tape Outline — I want to install stair threads and landing pad.for 14 stairs. With the entire carpet area clearly defined by painter's tape, use a tape measure to take precise measurements of all sides and segments of the blue tape outline. This will provide the exact dimensions needed for ordering or cutting the carpet for the landing. The amount of visible wood flooring between the carpet edge and the walls is a matter of personal preference; some prefer the carpet to be very close to the wall, while others prefer more exposed wood. Adjust the tape placement to reflect this desired aesthetic before taking final measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YVF2TiFLgMw 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10404-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — I want to install stair threads and landing pad.for 14 stairs. Can To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10406-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CtnOYw-UEDw/hqdefault.jpg Select, Order, and Unpack Custom Stair Treads — I want to install stair threads and landing pad.for Recognizing the limitation of traditional stair runners for a floating staircase, the homeowner identifies "Oak Valley Designs" as a specialist in custom stair treads. They review various fabric options, including different patterns and textures, as shown through samples. Once selected, the custom treads are received and unboxed, revealing the chosen design (a dark pattern with white and brown accents) and individual protective plastic wrapping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CtnOYw-UEDw 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10403-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measuring stairs for carpet treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10403-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measuring stairs for carpet treads Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10403-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measuring stairs for carpet treads Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10402-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measuring stairs for carpet treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10402-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measuring stairs for carpet treads Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10402-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measuring stairs for carpet treads Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10401-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WjkM8ou_xoI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Stair Tread Placement — measuring stairs for carpet treads To ensure consistent and straight placement of the carpet treads, measure the desired distance from the edge of the stairs. Then, use blue painter's tape to create parallel guide lines up the entire staircase. This helps in visually aligning each tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WjkM8ou_xoI 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10401-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread Placement — measuring stairs for carpet treads To ensure accurate and consistent placement of each stair tread, the homeowner uses blue painter's tape to mark the desired position on the hardwood steps. A measuring tape is used to confirm precise spacing and alignment, ensuring a symmetrical reveal of the wood on both sides of each tread. This meticulous marking helps maintain a uniform and professional look across the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10401-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measuring stairs for carpet treads Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10400-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measuring stairs for carpet treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10400-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measuring stairs for carpet treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10400-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measuring stairs for carpet treads Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10396-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stairs, then a Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10396-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/20jjtuvaY6M/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Measure — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stairs, then a Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stairs. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, pet hair, or debris. Then, use a damp cloth with an all-purpose cleaner to wipe down each stair tread and riser, ensuring they are free of dirt and grime. Allow the stairs to dry completely. Next, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's common for stairs to have slight variations, so measure each one individually. Decide on the placement of the carpet treads, typically leaving a consistent reveal on the sides and front of each stair. This will help determine the ideal size of your treads if you are cutting them, or guide placement if using pre-made ones. The video starts by showing the finished carpeted stairs, implying these preparatory steps have already been completed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/20jjtuvaY6M 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10396-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sfgZWTtWnVc/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stairs — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stairs, then a landing Begin by removing any existing stair coverings, such as old runners or individual treads, to reveal the bare wooden stairs. Once clear, thoroughly vacuum each stair to remove dust, dirt, and any debris that might prevent the new treads from adhering properly. Ensure the surface is clean and dry. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sfgZWTtWnVc 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10399-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stairs, then a Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10399-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stairs, th To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10399-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stai Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10398-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stairs, then a Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10398-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stairs, then a Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10398-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stai Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10397-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stairs, th To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10397-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stai Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10397-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/R9BqXkhQa84/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Align First Stair Tread — measuring a set of stairs with a landing, specifically 3 stair Begin by taking a pre-cut carpet stair tread and placing it on the first visible step. Use a tape measure to check its width and ensure it is centered and aligned properly on the stair. The video shows measuring from the edge of the stair to the edge of the tread to confirm consistent placement. Make any necessary adjustments to ensure perfect alignment before permanently attaching. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R9BqXkhQa84 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10392-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measuring stairs Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10392-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SsGTuZzNrvU/hqdefault.jpg Unbox and Prepare Stairs — measuring stairs The video begins by showcasing the product box from 'OAK VALLEY DESIGNS' clearly labeled 'CARPET STAIR TREADS'. The first step involves carefully opening the package and inspecting the treads for any damage or defects. Following this, the wooden staircase needs to be thoroughly prepared. This involves cleaning each step to remove any dirt, dust, or debris that could hinder adhesion. A vacuum cleaner can be used for loose particles, and a mild cleaning solution with a cloth for any grime. Ensure the stairs are completely dry before proceeding. Although not explicitly shown, measuring the center of each step and marking a guideline can help ensure consistent placement of the treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SsGTuZzNrvU 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10392-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/20jjtuvaY6M/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Measure — measuring stairs Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stairs. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, pet hair, or debris. Then, use a damp cloth with an all-purpose cleaner to wipe down each stair tread and riser, ensuring they are free of dirt and grime. Allow the stairs to dry completely. Next, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's common for stairs to have slight variations, so measure each one individually. Decide on the placement of the carpet treads, typically leaving a consistent reveal on the sides and front of each stair. This will help determine the ideal size of your treads if you are cutting them, or guide placement if using pre-made ones. The video starts by showing the finished carpeted stairs, implying these preparatory steps have already been completed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/20jjtuvaY6M 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10395-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measuring stairs Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10395-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measuring stairs Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10395-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measuring stairs Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10393-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measuring stairs Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10393-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YVF2TiFLgMw/hqdefault.jpg Measure Bullnose Edge Width — measuring stairs The most critical first step is to accurately measure the width of the bullnose edge of the stair landing. This measurement should correspond precisely to the width of the carpet stair tread installed on the step immediately below the landing. For example, if the stair tread is 35 inches wide, the landing carpet's edge should also be 35 inches wide to maintain visual continuity. Measure from the far left side to the far right side of the bullnose edge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YVF2TiFLgMw 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10393-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measuring stairs Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10394-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measuring stairs To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10394-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark First Tread Placement — measuring stairs Take the first stair tread and center it on the first stair. Once properly positioned, use a piece of cardboard or painter's tape to mark the exact placement of the tread on the stair. This will serve as a consistent guide for positioning all subsequent treads, ensuring a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10394-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/R9BqXkhQa84/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Align First Stair Tread — measuring stairs Begin by taking a pre-cut carpet stair tread and placing it on the first visible step. Use a tape measure to check its width and ensure it is centered and aligned properly on the stair. The video shows measuring from the edge of the stair to the edge of the tread to confirm consistent placement. Make any necessary adjustments to ensure perfect alignment before permanently attaching. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R9BqXkhQa84 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10388-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10388-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10388-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/20jjtuvaY6M/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Measure — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stairs. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, pet hair, or debris. Then, use a damp cloth with an all-purpose cleaner to wipe down each stair tread and riser, ensuring they are free of dirt and grime. Allow the stairs to dry completely. Next, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's common for stairs to have slight variations, so measure each one individually. Decide on the placement of the carpet treads, typically leaving a consistent reveal on the sides and front of each stair. This will help determine the ideal size of your treads if you are cutting them, or guide placement if using pre-made ones. The video starts by showing the finished carpeted stairs, implying these preparatory steps have already been completed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/20jjtuvaY6M 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10391-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10391-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — how to measure stairs for carpet treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10391-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10390-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10390-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — how to measure stairs for carpet treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10390-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10389-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10389-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark First Tread Placement — how to measure stairs for carpet treads Take the first stair tread and center it on the first stair. Once properly positioned, use a piece of cardboard or painter's tape to mark the exact placement of the tread on the stair. This will serve as a consistent guide for positioning all subsequent treads, ensuring a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10389-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread Placement — how to measure stairs for carpet treads To ensure accurate and consistent placement of each stair tread, the homeowner uses blue painter's tape to mark the desired position on the hardwood steps. A measuring tape is used to confirm precise spacing and alignment, ensuring a symmetrical reveal of the wood on both sides of each tread. This meticulous marking helps maintain a uniform and professional look across the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10384-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10384-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/20jjtuvaY6M/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Measure — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stairs. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, pet hair, or debris. Then, use a damp cloth with an all-purpose cleaner to wipe down each stair tread and riser, ensuring they are free of dirt and grime. Allow the stairs to dry completely. Next, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's common for stairs to have slight variations, so measure each one individually. Decide on the placement of the carpet treads, typically leaving a consistent reveal on the sides and front of each stair. This will help determine the ideal size of your treads if you are cutting them, or guide placement if using pre-made ones. The video starts by showing the finished carpeted stairs, implying these preparatory steps have already been completed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/20jjtuvaY6M 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10384-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10387-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10387-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10387-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark First Tread Placement — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Take the first stair tread and center it on the first stair. Once properly positioned, use a piece of cardboard or painter's tape to mark the exact placement of the tread on the stair. This will serve as a consistent guide for positioning all subsequent treads, ensuring a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10386-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10386-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YVF2TiFLgMw/hqdefault.jpg Measure Bullnose Edge Width — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step The most critical first step is to accurately measure the width of the bullnose edge of the stair landing. This measurement should correspond precisely to the width of the carpet stair tread installed on the step immediately below the landing. For example, if the stair tread is 35 inches wide, the landing carpet's edge should also be 35 inches wide to maintain visual continuity. Measure from the far left side to the far right side of the bullnose edge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YVF2TiFLgMw 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10386-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Understand Measurement Types — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step The presenter begins by explaining that to order the perfect size carpet stair tread, two primary measurements are required: the width and the depth of the stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10385-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10385-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Cut Treads to Size — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Once measurements are taken and marked on the stair treads, use a miter saw to precisely cut them to the required width and depth. Ensure that the cuts are straight and clean for a professional finish. If the treads have a carpeted or fabric surface, you may need a sharp utility knife to score or cut through that material first, or ensure your saw blade is specifically designed for such materials to cut cleanly without fraying. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10385-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Complete Installation and Final Inspection — measure stairs with a landing after the 4th step Repeat the placement and pressing process for all remaining carpet stair treads, moving systematically up or down the staircase. Ensure each tread is aligned consistently with the previous one, maintaining even spacing and straightness. After all treads are installed, perform a final inspection. Visually check for any misalignments or loose edges. Walk up and down the stairs to confirm that each tread feels firmly secured and does not shift underfoot, ensuring both safety and a polished aesthetic for your newly enhanced staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10381-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure stairs Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10381-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measure stairs Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10381-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measure stairs Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10380-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure stairs Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10380-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10380-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — measure stairs Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10383-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10383-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measure stairs To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10383-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure stairs Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10382-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Understand Measurement Types — measure stairs The presenter begins by explaining that to order the perfect size carpet stair tread, two primary measurements are required: the width and the depth of the stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10382-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10382-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measure stairs To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10378-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oS29zHGw5YQ/hqdefault.jpg Peel Backing from Tread — installing stair treads on indoor wooden stairs The video shows a close-up of a carpet stair tread, demonstrating how to peel off the clear plastic backing to expose the self-adhesive layer. This reveals the 'sticky side' that will adhere to the stair surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oS29zHGw5YQ 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10378-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — installing stair treads on indoor wooden stairs Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10378-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stair Treads — installing stair treads on indoor wooden stairs Take each individual carpet stair tread and prepare it for installation. The treads shown in the video feature a pre-applied adhesive backing covered by a protective plastic film. Carefully peel off this plastic film to expose the adhesive layer. The video shows the adhesive applied in a distinctive wavy pattern, designed to provide strong grip. Only remove the film when you are ready to apply the tread to prevent the adhesive from collecting dust or drying out. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10379-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Secure the First Tread — installing stair treads on indoor wooden stairs Once the first tread is accurately positioned, secure it in place. If the treads are self-adhesive, carefully peel off the backing and firmly press the tread onto the stair, ensuring good contact across its entire surface. If not self-adhesive, apply double-sided carpet tape to the back of the tread before pressing it down. Ensure the tread is smooth and free of wrinkles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10379-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SsGTuZzNrvU/hqdefault.jpg Place and Secure First Tread — installing stair treads on indoor wooden stairs Once the stairs are clean and dry, begin installing the carpet treads. The video shows a person carefully positioning the first tread onto a wooden step. Align the tread by ensuring it is centered or placed according to any pre-marked guidelines. Once positioned correctly, press down firmly across the entire surface of the tread, paying particular attention to the edges and corners, to activate the adhesive backing (if applicable) or secure the non-slip material. Use your hands to smooth out any air bubbles and ensure full contact with the stair surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SsGTuZzNrvU 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10379-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Tread onto the Stair — installing stair treads on indoor wooden stairs Carefully position the prepared self-adhesive stair tread onto a clean wooden stair. Ensure the tread is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the stair. Once correctly placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands. Apply even pressure across the tread to ensure proper adhesion and remove any air bubbles. Repeat this process for each stair, working your way up or down the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10374-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stair Surface — install treads on floating stairs Although not explicitly demonstrated in the video, it is crucial to ensure the staircase is clean before installing the treads. Thoroughly clean each wooden stair surface to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris. This preparation ensures optimal adhesion of the non-slip backing, preventing the treads from shifting and maintaining a neat appearance. Use a vacuum cleaner for loose particles, followed by a damp cloth and a mild cleaner if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10374-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — install treads on floating stairs Before installing the stair treads, ensure the stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris from the surface of each stair. A clean surface is crucial for the adhesive on the treads to bond properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10374-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rON0c9UvU2E/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Clean Stair Treads — install treads on floating stairs Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stair treads. You can use a microfiber cloth or any suitable cloth, optionally combined with a handheld vacuum, to remove all dust and loose dirt. The goal is to ensure the entire stair surface is clean and completely dry. This is crucial for the adhesive on the back of the carpet treads to stick properly. Avoid using any cleaning products that might leave a greasy residue, such as Pledge or Pine-Sol, as this can compromise the adhesive bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rON0c9UvU2E 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10376-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Pn6f97DLJ8c/hqdefault.jpg Apply Adhesive Tape — install treads on floating stairs Begin by applying double-sided carpet tape to each stair tread. As shown in the video, two parallel strips of tape are typically applied: one strip along the back edge of the tread, where it meets the riser, and another strip a few inches in from the front edge of the tread, positioned behind the nosing. This placement ensures secure adhesion across the main contact points of the runner. Leave the protective backing on the tape at this stage, as it allows for precise positioning of the runner without premature adhesion. Use scissors to cut the tape to the appropriate length for each tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Pn6f97DLJ8c 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10376-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Secure the First Tread — install treads on floating stairs Once the first tread is accurately positioned, secure it in place. If the treads are self-adhesive, carefully peel off the backing and firmly press the tread onto the stair, ensuring good contact across its entire surface. If not self-adhesive, apply double-sided carpet tape to the back of the tread before pressing it down. Ensure the tread is smooth and free of wrinkles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10376-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8E4JV5eR8Tk/hqdefault.jpg Apply Self-Adhesive Treads — install treads on floating stairs The installer begins the process of applying the carpet stair treads. For each tread, the protective film is peeled off the adhesive backing. The tread is then carefully placed onto a wooden stair, ensuring it is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the step. Once positioned, firm pressure is applied across the entire surface of the tread to secure it in place. This process is repeated for each step of the staircase, moving sequentially from one step to the next. The video shows installation starting from the top and also from the bottom, illustrating the repetitive nature of the task. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8E4JV5eR8Tk 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10377-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Secure the First Tread — install treads on floating stairs Once the first tread is accurately positioned, secure it in place. If the treads are self-adhesive, carefully peel off the backing and firmly press the tread onto the stair, ensuring good contact across its entire surface. If not self-adhesive, apply double-sided carpet tape to the back of the tread before pressing it down. Ensure the tread is smooth and free of wrinkles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10377-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SsGTuZzNrvU/hqdefault.jpg Place and Secure First Tread — install treads on floating stairs Once the stairs are clean and dry, begin installing the carpet treads. The video shows a person carefully positioning the first tread onto a wooden step. Align the tread by ensuring it is centered or placed according to any pre-marked guidelines. Once positioned correctly, press down firmly across the entire surface of the tread, paying particular attention to the edges and corners, to activate the adhesive backing (if applicable) or secure the non-slip material. Use your hands to smooth out any air bubbles and ensure full contact with the stair surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SsGTuZzNrvU 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10377-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oS29zHGw5YQ/hqdefault.jpg Position and Adhere Treads — install treads on floating stairs Once the adhesive is exposed, the carpet stair tread is carefully positioned onto a stair. A tape measure is then used to quickly double-check the placement, likely for centering or consistent spacing from the edge. After confirming the position, the tread is pressed down firmly with hands to ensure secure adhesion and smoothed out to remove any air bubbles or wrinkles. This process is repeated for all stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oS29zHGw5YQ 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10375-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Final Touches and Inspection — install treads on floating stairs Once all carpet treads are installed, perform a final inspection. Check each tread to ensure it is securely attached, aligned correctly, and free from wrinkles or bubbles. Trim any excess carpet fibers along the edges for a clean, finished look. Vacuum the entire staircase again to remove any loose fibers or dust accumulated during installation. Allow any adhesive to fully cure according to the manufacturer's instructions before heavy use of the stairs. This step completes the project, resulting in a safe and aesthetically pleasing staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10375-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8E4JV5eR8Tk/hqdefault.jpg Apply Self-Adhesive Treads — install treads on floating stairs The installer begins the process of applying the carpet stair treads. For each tread, the protective film is peeled off the adhesive backing. The tread is then carefully placed onto a wooden stair, ensuring it is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the step. Once positioned, firm pressure is applied across the entire surface of the tread to secure it in place. This process is repeated for each step of the staircase, moving sequentially from one step to the next. The video shows installation starting from the top and also from the bottom, illustrating the repetitive nature of the task. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8E4JV5eR8Tk 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10375-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oS29zHGw5YQ/hqdefault.jpg Position and Adhere Treads — install treads on floating stairs Once the adhesive is exposed, the carpet stair tread is carefully positioned onto a stair. A tape measure is then used to quickly double-check the placement, likely for centering or consistent spacing from the edge. After confirming the position, the tread is pressed down firmly with hands to ensure secure adhesion and smoothed out to remove any air bubbles or wrinkles. This process is repeated for all stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oS29zHGw5YQ 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10370-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — remeasure a staircase for painting Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10370-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark First Tread Placement — remeasure a staircase for painting Take the first stair tread and center it on the first stair. Once properly positioned, use a piece of cardboard or painter's tape to mark the exact placement of the tread on the stair. This will serve as a consistent guide for positioning all subsequent treads, ensuring a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10370-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — remeasure a staircase for painting Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10372-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — remeasure a staircase for painting Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10372-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — remeasure a staircase for painting Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10372-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — remeasure a staircase for painting To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10371-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — remeasure a staircase for painting Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10371-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Position the First Tread — remeasure a staircase for painting Take the first stair tread and place it on the lowest step. Use a tape measure to ensure the tread is centered on the stair and that there is a consistent gap from the side walls on both sides. Also, measure the distance from the front edge (nosing) of the stair to the back of the tread to maintain uniform placement. Mark the desired position lightly if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10371-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/R9BqXkhQa84/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Align First Stair Tread — remeasure a staircase for painting Begin by taking a pre-cut carpet stair tread and placing it on the first visible step. Use a tape measure to check its width and ensure it is centered and aligned properly on the stair. The video shows measuring from the edge of the stair to the edge of the tread to confirm consistent placement. Make any necessary adjustments to ensure perfect alignment before permanently attaching. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R9BqXkhQa84 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10373-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sfgZWTtWnVc/hqdefault.jpg Project Completion and Review — remeasure a staircase for painting Once all stair treads are installed, take a step back and admire your work. The staircase should now have a consistent, aesthetically pleasing, and safer appearance. The video shows a person walking down the newly treaded stairs, demonstrating the finished look and feel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sfgZWTtWnVc 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10373-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Complete Installation and Final Inspection — remeasure a staircase for painting Repeat the placement and pressing process for all remaining carpet stair treads, moving systematically up or down the staircase. Ensure each tread is aligned consistently with the previous one, maintaining even spacing and straightness. After all treads are installed, perform a final inspection. Visually check for any misalignments or loose edges. Walk up and down the stairs to confirm that each tread feels firmly secured and does not shift underfoot, ensuring both safety and a polished aesthetic for your newly enhanced staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10373-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Final Review and Enjoyment — remeasure a staircase for painting Once all stair treads are installed, step back and visually inspect the entire staircase. Check for uniform spacing, straight alignment, and secure adhesion of all treads. Walk up and down the stairs to ensure they feel stable and comfortable. The video showcases the completed staircase with all treads installed, demonstrating the aesthetic and functional improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10369-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Secure the First Tread — install stair treads Once the first tread is accurately positioned, secure it in place. If the treads are self-adhesive, carefully peel off the backing and firmly press the tread onto the stair, ensuring good contact across its entire surface. If not self-adhesive, apply double-sided carpet tape to the back of the tread before pressing it down. Ensure the tread is smooth and free of wrinkles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10369-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SsGTuZzNrvU/hqdefault.jpg Place and Secure First Tread — install stair treads Once the stairs are clean and dry, begin installing the carpet treads. The video shows a person carefully positioning the first tread onto a wooden step. Align the tread by ensuring it is centered or placed according to any pre-marked guidelines. Once positioned correctly, press down firmly across the entire surface of the tread, paying particular attention to the edges and corners, to activate the adhesive backing (if applicable) or secure the non-slip material. Use your hands to smooth out any air bubbles and ensure full contact with the stair surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SsGTuZzNrvU 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10369-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Tread onto the Stair — install stair treads Carefully position the prepared self-adhesive stair tread onto a clean wooden stair. Ensure the tread is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the stair. Once correctly placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands. Apply even pressure across the tread to ensure proper adhesion and remove any air bubbles. Repeat this process for each stair, working your way up or down the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10368-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oS29zHGw5YQ/hqdefault.jpg Peel Backing from Tread — install stair treads The video shows a close-up of a carpet stair tread, demonstrating how to peel off the clear plastic backing to expose the self-adhesive layer. This reveals the 'sticky side' that will adhere to the stair surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oS29zHGw5YQ 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10368-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stair Treads — install stair treads Starting from the top of the staircase, the homeowner carefully installs each stair tread. She begins by peeling off the protective plastic film from the adhesive backing. The tread is then aligned precisely with the previously marked tape lines, ensuring the back edge is flush with the riser. Once aligned, she firmly presses the tread onto the step, making sure it adheres well, especially over the bullnose (the rounded edge of the step). This process is repeated for each individual stair tread and for the larger custom pieces on the landings. The homeowner notes that the adhesive is designed not to damage the existing hardwood stairs, making it a suitable option for temporary or non-permanent installations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10368-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — install stair treads Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10367-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — hang a pendant light With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10367-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — hang a pendant light Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10367-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — hang a pendant light Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10366-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — hang a pendant light Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10366-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — hang a pendant light Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10366-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — hang a pendant light Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10280-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/20jjtuvaY6M/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Measure — measure stairs for treads Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stairs. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, pet hair, or debris. Then, use a damp cloth with an all-purpose cleaner to wipe down each stair tread and riser, ensuring they are free of dirt and grime. Allow the stairs to dry completely. Next, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's common for stairs to have slight variations, so measure each one individually. Decide on the placement of the carpet treads, typically leaving a consistent reveal on the sides and front of each stair. This will help determine the ideal size of your treads if you are cutting them, or guide placement if using pre-made ones. The video starts by showing the finished carpeted stairs, implying these preparatory steps have already been completed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/20jjtuvaY6M 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10283-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure stairs for treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10283-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Understand Measurement Types — measure stairs for treads The presenter begins by explaining that to order the perfect size carpet stair tread, two primary measurements are required: the width and the depth of the stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10283-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measure stairs for treads Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10281-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Understand Measurement Types — measure stairs for treads The presenter begins by explaining that to order the perfect size carpet stair tread, two primary measurements are required: the width and the depth of the stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10281-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — measure stairs for treads Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10281-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs for treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10282-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs for treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10282-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Understand Measurement Types — measure stairs for treads The presenter begins by explaining that to order the perfect size carpet stair tread, two primary measurements are required: the width and the depth of the stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10282-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/R9BqXkhQa84/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Align First Stair Tread — measure stairs for treads Begin by taking a pre-cut carpet stair tread and placing it on the first visible step. Use a tape measure to check its width and ensure it is centered and aligned properly on the stair. The video shows measuring from the edge of the stair to the edge of the tread to confirm consistent placement. Make any necessary adjustments to ensure perfect alignment before permanently attaching. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R9BqXkhQa84 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10275-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Project Completion — install stair treads Once all installation steps are complete, including securing risers, treads, and optional return trim, and after allowing the adhesive to fully dry (typically 24 to 48 hours), your beautiful new stairs are ready to use. Enjoy your newly updated staircase for years to come! https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10275-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9OF3FBDsqcs/hqdefault.jpg Showcase and Test Installation — install stair treads Once all stair treads are installed, step back to admire the finished staircase. The video shows the entire staircase with the new, uniformly placed treads, highlighting the improved appearance and added safety. Finally, walk down the stairs to test their stability and comfort, confirming the successful installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9OF3FBDsqcs 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10275-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ztC3KfZEjO0/hqdefault.jpg Repeat and Final Check — install stair treads The entire process, from measuring with the Stair Wizard jig to cutting, applying adhesive, and fastening, is repeated for each remaining stair tread. The video shows the progression of installed treads, some covered with cardboard and blue tape for protection. Once all treads are installed, the stairs are tested by walking on them to ensure they are solid, quiet, and properly secured. This confirms the successful completion of the stair tread installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ztC3KfZEjO0 92 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10277-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — install stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10277-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — install stair treads Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10277-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZrWNkbh5j4M/hqdefault.jpg Finalize Tread Placement — install stair treads Continue the process of preparing and securing the remaining carpet treads. It can be helpful to pre-mark the correct positioning on each step before applying the treads, ensuring a "plug and play" installation for increased efficiency. While using nails for extra security is an option, the double-sided tape method is highlighted as a simple, effective, and less invasive alternative for securing the treads to your stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZrWNkbh5j4M 57 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10278-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — install stair treads With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10278-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — install stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10278-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9OF3FBDsqcs/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stair Treads to Steps — install stair treads With the treads unpacked, carefully position one stair tread onto the surface of a stair. Ensure it is centered and aligned properly. Once placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive backing and secure it to the stair. Repeat this process for each step, ensuring consistent placement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9OF3FBDsqcs 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10274-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — install stair treads Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10274-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wSsFb5YVHag/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stair Surface — install stair treads Before applying the anti-slip strip, it is crucial to ensure the stair surface is clean, dry, and free of any dust, dirt, or grease. Use a cleaning cloth and a mild cleaner to thoroughly wipe down the area where the strip will be applied. Allow the surface to dry completely to ensure optimal adhesion of the self-adhesive strip. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wSsFb5YVHag 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10274-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Dry the Stairs — install stair treads After cleaning, it is essential that your stairs are completely dry before proceeding with the installation of the anti-slip treads. This will prevent moisture from compromising the adhesive's bond. Allow ample time for air drying, or use a dry cloth to speed up the process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10279-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Mark Stair Centerline — install stair treads To ensure accurate and straight placement of the anti-slip treads, use masking tape to create a guideline. Place a strip of masking tape along the front edge of the stair tread. Next, measure the total width of the stair using a measuring tape. Divide this measurement in half to find the center point. Use a pencil to mark this center point directly onto the masking tape. Repeat for each stair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10279-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CtnOYw-UEDw/hqdefault.jpg Install Custom Stair Treads — install stair treads With the existing carpet removed and the new custom treads unboxed, the installation process begins. The homeowner places each tread onto a stair, using a measuring tape to ensure consistent and accurate positioning across the width and depth of the step. The clear plastic film covering the adhesive backing on each tread is peeled away, and the tread is then carefully pressed down firmly onto the wooden step. This process is repeated for each stair, working from the bottom of the staircase upwards to avoid disturbing previously installed treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CtnOYw-UEDw 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10279-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hwZQcHGafM0/hqdefault.jpg Mark Tread Dimensions for Curved Sections — install stair treads After placing the pre-cut nosing in position, the installer makes new marks along the edges where the tread will meet the wall and the nosing. He uses a measuring tape to measure the dimensions, such as 5 inches on one side and 10 and 5/8 inches on the other, for the long board. To ensure a straight cut line between these two points, he applies diagonal tape and then marks the line with a pencil using a beam level as a guide. This method helps account for any irregularities in the wall or the staircase itself. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hwZQcHGafM0 269 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10276-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — install stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10276-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — install stair treads Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10276-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — install stair treads Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10250-1 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Carpet Stair Treads Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10250-2 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Carpet Stair Treads After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10250-3 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Carpet Stair Treads Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10252-1 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Carpet Stair Treads Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10252-2 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Carpet Stair Treads Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10252-3 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Carpet Stair Treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10251-1 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Carpet Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10251-2 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — Carpet Stair Treads With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10251-3 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Carpet Stair Treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10253-1 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CtnOYw-UEDw/hqdefault.jpg Select, Order, and Unpack Custom Stair Treads — Carpet Stair Treads Recognizing the limitation of traditional stair runners for a floating staircase, the homeowner identifies "Oak Valley Designs" as a specialist in custom stair treads. They review various fabric options, including different patterns and textures, as shown through samples. Once selected, the custom treads are received and unboxed, revealing the chosen design (a dark pattern with white and brown accents) and individual protective plastic wrapping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CtnOYw-UEDw 12 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10253-2 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Introduction and Product Overview — Carpet Stair Treads The presenter introduces Oak Valley Designs' Bullnose Carpet Stair Treads, explaining their key features. These treads are manufactured in North Georgia and feature a triple-reinforced, rounded front edge designed to give the staircase the look and safety of a traditional runner. They come with a built-in pad and a pressure-sensitive adhesive with a peel-and-release liner on the back, making installation super easy and non-damaging to wooden steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 52 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10253-3 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TaW4vHLABrc/hqdefault.jpg Introduction and Material Overview — Carpet Stair Treads The presenter introduces the project, which is the installation of carpet stair treads. He notes that the staircase is already prepared with padding and tack strips (smooth edge) along the back and sides of the treads. The carpet being used is 'Anderson Tufftex Marrakech,' made of 100% nylon, featuring a felt backing and a distinctive pattern. Each carpet piece is cut to 15 inches long by 36 and 1/8 inches wide, ensuring a slight overhang on each side to be tucked. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TaW4vHLABrc 100 2026-10-09T16:21:24.216Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10248-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — Carpet Stair Treads Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10248-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IOgUldDtg1c/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet — Carpet Stair Treads Measure the width of the stair tread from stringer to stringer (e.g., 36 1/8 inches) and the depth from the nose to the back riser (e.g., 13 inches). To allow for trimming and a snug fit, cut the carpet pieces slightly larger than these measurements (e.g., 37 inches wide by 14 inches deep). Use a utility knife and a straight edge to ensure clean, straight cuts. You will need one carpet piece per tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IOgUldDtg1c 107 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10248-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nCu4uIwBOOE/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Stairs — Carpet Stair Treads To ensure the carpet runner is long and wide enough, accurate measurements are essential. First, select one stair tread (the horizontal top surface of a step) and measure its depth. Next, measure the height of the riser (the vertical part of the step). Multiply the height by the number of risers and the depth by the number of treads on your staircase. Add these two sums together, then add an additional 6 to 8 inches to account for waste. This total will be the required length of the runner. If using more than one runner, add an additional 12 inches to the total length to account for seams where the two carpet pieces will join. If your staircase includes a landing and you plan to install the runner there, ensure you include the landing area in your measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nCu4uIwBOOE 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10246-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — Carpet Stair Treads The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10246-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/reF4dSqKIho/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Vertical Rise — Carpet Stair Treads Accurately measure the vertical distance from the top surface of the lower floor to the top surface of the upper floor where the stairs will connect. This measurement is crucial for all subsequent calculations. For this example, a total rise of 35 inches will be used. https://www.youtube.com/embed/reF4dSqKIho 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10246-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Carpet Stair Treads Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10247-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Carpet Stair Treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10247-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Carpet Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10247-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Carpet Stair Treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10249-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/o5yWhdPoZgA/hqdefault.jpg Marking Out the Reveals — Carpet Stair Treads The first step is to mark out the reveals around the door frame. Reveals are small gaps that help accommodate any slight warpage in the trim materials and provide a consistent visual line. For one or two doors, a standard tape measure and a sharp pencil are sufficient. Measure 3/16 inch or 1/4 inch from the edge of the door jamb and mark this line. For multiple doors, it's more efficient and accurate to use a custom-made reveal block, which is a small block of wood cut to the desired reveal width. Simply place the block against the door jamb and trace along its edge with a pencil to create the reveal line. https://www.youtube.com/embed/o5yWhdPoZgA 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10249-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/g6tLq8czSgE/hqdefault.jpg Mark the Reveal Line — Carpet Stair Treads Define the reveal line on the door jamb, which is the consistent gap between the door and the trim. The creator recommends a 1/4-inch reveal. Use a Kreg Multi-Mark tool by flushing its blue piece against the door jamb, extending the ruler, and using a pencil to draw a consistent 1/4-inch line along the entire jamb. https://www.youtube.com/embed/g6tLq8czSgE 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10249-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ry-Mw-YgqxY/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Pre-Assemble Casing Trim — Carpet Stair Treads To create a seamless, professional look for the trim pieces that will cap the jambs, use a Kreg multi-mark tool to mark a 13/16 inch reveal from the edge of the jamb. This mark will guide the placement of the decorative trim. For the decorative trim that will go on the header, ensure it is cut to the exact length needed (e.g., 55 1/4 inches). This measurement is taken from the inside edge of the vertical casing on one side to the inside edge of the vertical casing on the other side. This will give it the look of a solid piece of wood. The casing legs are then pocket-holed to the header for a strong, hidden connection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ry-Mw-YgqxY 277 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10245-1 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Check Your Drawing — Stair Tread Measurement Once the sub-treads are exposed, consult the provided Stair Supplies engineered tread drawings. Verify that all the new treads are accounted for and that their dimensions, such as tread width, tread depth, and nosing depth, match the specifications on the drawing. Use a tape measure to confirm these dimensions. This crucial step helps prevent errors during the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 14 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10245-2 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CtnOYw-UEDw/hqdefault.jpg Select, Order, and Unpack Custom Stair Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Recognizing the limitation of traditional stair runners for a floating staircase, the homeowner identifies "Oak Valley Designs" as a specialist in custom stair treads. They review various fabric options, including different patterns and textures, as shown through samples. Once selected, the custom treads are received and unboxed, revealing the chosen design (a dark pattern with white and brown accents) and individual protective plastic wrapping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CtnOYw-UEDw 12 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10245-3 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Cut Notches for Open-Sided Treads — Stair Tread Measurement For stair treads that are open on one side (next to a wall stringer), use a multi-tool to cut a notch or a 'return' piece where the tread meets the stringer. This allows for a clean, professional finish without needing excessive filler. Shape the remaining piece as needed to ensure a perfect fit with the previously installed riser and stringer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 22 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10244-1 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10244-2 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10244-3 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Stair Tread Measurement Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10243-1 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10243-2 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10243-3 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10242-1 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Stair Tread Measurement Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10242-2 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — Stair Tread Measurement First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10242-3 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U_qBttWNBfI/hqdefault.jpg Count Risers and Measure Tread Thickness — Stair Tread Measurement The presenter counts the number of existing risers (steps) from the top landing down to the bottom floor, noting each one. Then, he measures the thickness of one of the granite treads that will be installed on the stairs. He confirms that the staircase has 16 risers and that each granite tread has a thickness of 10.5 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U_qBttWNBfI 67 2026-10-05T00:50:51.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10238-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Carpet Stair Covers Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10238-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oAUp2WuHH6M/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Number of Risers and Treads — Carpet Stair Covers Measure the total vertical distance (total rise) from the top of the lower floor (where the stairs begin) to the top of the upper floor (where the stairs end). For instance, if the measurement is 8 feet 9 inches (105 inches). Then, divide the total rise (in inches) by a desired individual riser height (e.g., 7 or 7.5 inches, common building code standards) to determine the number of risers. For example, 105 inches / 7.5 inches = 14 risers. Remember that the number of treads will be one less than the number of risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oAUp2WuHH6M 232 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10238-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qGE43pFPnkA/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Stair Dimensions — Carpet Stair Covers Measure the total rise (vertical height) from the finished concrete landing to the top surface of the raised platform where the stairs will connect. To calculate the individual step rise and run, you can either manually calculate by dividing the total rise by a target step rise (e.g., 7.5 inches) and adjusting to get an even number of steps, or use an online stair calculator (like mycarpentry.com). Input your total rise, desired step height, and tread depth, and the calculator will provide the number of steps, precise rise/run for each step, and stringer dimensions. Ensure your calculated step rise is between 6 and 8 inches for comfortable and safe stairs. This detailed calculation is crucial for accurate stringer layout. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qGE43pFPnkA 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10240-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Carpet Stair Covers Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10240-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Carpet Stair Covers Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10240-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Carpet Stair Covers Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10239-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Carpet Stair Covers Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10239-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — Carpet Stair Covers With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10239-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Carpet Stair Covers Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10236-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — Install Carpet Stair Covers Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10236-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install Carpet Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10236-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Examine the Stair Tread — Install Carpet Stair Covers Begin by taking one self-adhesive carpet stair tread. Examine both sides to understand the product: one side is the carpeted surface, and the other side has protective paper strips covering the adhesive backing. Ensure the stair tread is clean and free of debris before proceeding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10237-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Install Carpet Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10237-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install Carpet Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10237-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Install Carpet Stair Covers With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10232-1 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Carpet Stair Covers Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10232-2 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Carpet Stair Covers Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10232-3 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Carpet Stair Covers Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10233-1 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10233-2 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nCu4uIwBOOE/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Stairs — Carpet Stair Covers To ensure the carpet runner is long and wide enough, accurate measurements are essential. First, select one stair tread (the horizontal top surface of a step) and measure its depth. Next, measure the height of the riser (the vertical part of the step). Multiply the height by the number of risers and the depth by the number of treads on your staircase. Add these two sums together, then add an additional 6 to 8 inches to account for waste. This total will be the required length of the runner. If using more than one runner, add an additional 12 inches to the total length to account for seams where the two carpet pieces will join. If your staircase includes a landing and you plan to install the runner there, ensure you include the landing area in your measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nCu4uIwBOOE 47 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10233-3 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Lsl1tVWACmE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Stair Piece — Carpet Stair Covers After creating the first straight edge, measure the desired width for the stair carpet. In this video, the presenter states the stairs are 34 inches wide. Place the tape measure from the newly cut edge and mark the 34-inch point. Then, carefully cut along the corresponding 'running row' at the 34-inch mark, similar to the first cut, to create the first piece of stair carpet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Lsl1tVWACmE 35 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10234-1 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — Carpet Stair Covers Measure each stair tread individually from front to back and side to side, as stairs are rarely perfectly uniform. Cut the new hardwood treads to the precise dimensions of each step. Double-check all measurements before making cuts to ensure accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 8 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10234-2 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Carpet Stair Covers Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10234-3 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Carpet Stair Covers Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10235-1 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/t2gBL7-bXp8/hqdefault.jpg Construct Wood Tray for Carpet Inlay on Treads — Carpet Stair Covers For open riser stairs with carpet inlays, a unique 'wood tray' design is implemented for each tread. Unlike typical open riser stairs where carpet might wrap entirely around the tread, this method involves constructing a recessed area within the wooden tread to precisely fit the carpet and its underpad. This design ensures that the carpet sits flush with the top wood edge of the tread, allowing the exposed wood underneath to remain visible, preserving the aesthetic of open risers while adding the comfort and sound dampening of carpet. The visual effect is a continuous flow of wood with integrated carpet sections. https://www.youtube.com/embed/t2gBL7-bXp8 25 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10235-2 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/udr7WnGM9m8/hqdefault.jpg Determine Nosing Dimensions and Plan Cuts — Carpet Stair Covers Begin by determining the desired dimensions for your stair nosing. The video creator prefers to make the entire nosing from a single piece of flooring to maintain consistent grain and texture. Decide on the overhang dimension and the thickness of the nosing; in this example, the overhang is 1 inch. Calculate the total width of the flooring needed by adding the flooring's existing width (3 1/8 inches), the overhang (1 inch), and the thickness of the material that will form the lower return (e.g., another 3/8 inch for a total of 4 1/2 inches). Ensure that the tongue and groove feature of your existing flooring is preserved so that the flooring tongue can be later inserted into the nosing's groove. If you plan to use the same flooring for the stair riser, remember to subtract its thickness from the lower return dimension of the nosing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/udr7WnGM9m8 47 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10235-3 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hOcPPO4LRfI/hqdefault.jpg Create Custom Tread Templates — Carpet Stair Covers New stair treads typically come as 1x12 red oak boards, ¾ inch thick and 11 ½ inches wide. Since these might be too wide, they need to be cut down from the back to maintain the pre-formed nosing on the front. Because the space between the skirt boards may not be perfectly square or parallel, a custom template is required for each tread. Begin by taking an old, cut-down tread that fits loosely in the opening and placing a piece of paper (or cardboard) on top. Mark a reference line on the riser. Then, use a small combination square or a piece of straight metal/wood as a guide to trace the contours of the skirt board onto the paper, keeping the guide tight against the skirt board. Slide the guide along the length of the paper, making continuous pencil lines at each end and several points in between, ensuring the lines are not bridged by any dips in the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hOcPPO4LRfI 194 2026-09-18T14:28:09.891Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10228-1 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U_qBttWNBfI/hqdefault.jpg Count Risers and Measure Tread Thickness — Stair Treads The presenter counts the number of existing risers (steps) from the top landing down to the bottom floor, noting each one. Then, he measures the thickness of one of the granite treads that will be installed on the stairs. He confirms that the staircase has 16 risers and that each granite tread has a thickness of 10.5 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U_qBttWNBfI 67 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10228-2 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oAUp2WuHH6M/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Number of Risers and Treads — Stair Treads Measure the total vertical distance (total rise) from the top of the lower floor (where the stairs begin) to the top of the upper floor (where the stairs end). For instance, if the measurement is 8 feet 9 inches (105 inches). Then, divide the total rise (in inches) by a desired individual riser height (e.g., 7 or 7.5 inches, common building code standards) to determine the number of risers. For example, 105 inches / 7.5 inches = 14 risers. Remember that the number of treads will be one less than the number of risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oAUp2WuHH6M 232 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10228-3 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — Stair Treads First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10229-1 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10229-2 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10229-3 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Stair Treads After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10230-1 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Stair Treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10230-2 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10230-3 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Treads Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10231-1 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Install Optional Return Trim and Hide Nail Holes — Stair Treads If one or both sides of your stairs are exposed (not against a wall), you'll need to apply return trim for a proper finish. The return trim typically comes pre-mitered on one end. However, if your walls are not perfectly square, you may need to measure and cut the proper angle using an angle gauge and a miter saw. Once the trim is properly fitted and dry-fitted in place, attach it with a small amount of polyurethane construction adhesive and secure it with three finish nails. Finally, use matching wood putty to hide any visible nail holes for a seamless appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 26 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10231-2 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fUwSJ2G-XT0/hqdefault.jpg Understanding Tread Types and Nosing Concepts — Stair Treads The video begins by contrasting the installation of the first stair tread, which is cut flush with the skirt and later covered by a newel post, with subsequent treads. The focus shifts to explaining the concept of return nosing, where a separate piece of wood is added to the tread's edge to provide a finished look when it extends beyond the skirt board. The presenter illustrates how this nosing piece fits onto the tread, emphasizing that the overhang of the return nosing will match the overhang at the front of the tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fUwSJ2G-XT0 41 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10231-3 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ImruVU_Aj2g/hqdefault.jpg Addressing Exposed Staircase Ends — Stair Treads If your staircase has one or both ends exposed (not enclosed by a wall), you'll need to consider how to finish the 'return' of the stair. This often involves mitering the stair nose and adding a separate piece to create a finished side. For stairs with dramatic radius curves or floating steps (which lack risers and have all four sides visible), standard pre-made options may not be suitable. In such cases, custom-made solid wood pieces, shaped to fit the unique contours of your staircase, may be necessary. This significantly increases the complexity and cost of the project. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ImruVU_Aj2g 115 2026-10-03T17:13:28.236Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10224-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — Carpet Stair Covers First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10224-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — Carpet Stair Covers The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10224-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Carpet Stair Covers Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10225-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SZSnefGtQic/hqdefault.jpg Trim Excess Carpet and Prepare Final Riser — Carpet Stair Covers After stapling the second tread, the video demonstrates securing the nosing and then trimming the excess carpet for the third (and final, in this case) stair riser and the top landing. Begin by using a utility knife to cut away the excess carpet and underpad that extends past the top edge of the final riser. Then, use a tape measure and pencil to mark the desired cut line on the carpet underpad for the top riser. You'll mark both sides and use a straight edge to connect them. Carefully cut along these marked lines with a pair of sharp scissors or shears. The binding (the finished edge of the carpet) is never as tall as the pile itself, creating a 'kick' that helps it fit snugly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SZSnefGtQic 225 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10225-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SZSnefGtQic/hqdefault.jpg Install Final Riser and Top Landing — Carpet Stair Covers With the carpet trimmed for the final riser, position it correctly. The 'kick' from the shorter binding should help it fit snugly against the top landing. If the fit is too tight, pull the carpet out and shave an eighth of an inch off the trimmed edge with scissors. Once fit, secure the top edge of the riser with staples, splitting the pile. Then, use a carpet tucker to push any excess or loose fibers tightly into the gap between the riser and the wall, ensuring a clean, finished look. If any edges appear like they might fray, apply a small amount of hot melt glue to seal them. Finally, secure the runner to the top landing with additional staples, again ensuring the pile is split to conceal the staples. For angled cuts at the side, staple those edges firmly and tuck them in with the stair tool as well. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SZSnefGtQic 77 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10225-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/14uLw4eSzt0/hqdefault.jpg Install Final Riser Piece — Carpet Stair Covers Test fit the newly cut riser piece to ensure it's the correct size and shape. Adjust accordingly with shears if necessary. Once satisfied with the fit, install the riser piece. First, apply a small amount of hot glue from a glue gun to the top edge of the riser piece on the backing side. Position the top edge of the riser piece flush with the top of the stair riser (underneath the stair nose of the step above). Secure this top edge with an electric staple gun, placing staples every inch or so. Next, use a carpet tucker tool to push the side edges of the riser piece firmly into the corners, concealing any exposed wood. Secure these side edges with the electric staple gun, placing three staples on each side, discreetly between the binding and the carpet pile. Finally, use the carpet tucker and hammer to press the bottom edge of the riser piece into the corner of the step below. Use the electric staple gun to place staples every inch or so along this bottom edge. Repeat for all remaining risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/14uLw4eSzt0 118 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10226-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Carpet Stair Covers Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10226-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10226-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Carpet Stair Covers Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10227-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Carpet Stair Covers Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10227-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads with Template Tool — Carpet Stair Covers Utilize a specialized stair measuring tool, often referred to as a stair jig or tread template tool, to accurately capture the exact length and precise angles of each individual stair tread. Carefully adjust the tool to fit snugly against the walls and any existing nosing, ensuring that it provides a perfect, custom template for the laminate cut that will follow. This step is critical for ensuring a seamless and gap-free fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10227-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Carpet Stair Covers Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10220-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — Landing Measurement The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10220-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — Landing Measurement First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10220-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Landing Measurement Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10221-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Landing Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10221-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Landing Measurement Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10221-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — Landing Measurement Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10222-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Landing Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10222-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Landing Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10222-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Landing Measurement After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10223-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/t2gBL7-bXp8/hqdefault.jpg Construct Wood Tray for Carpet Inlay on Treads — Landing Measurement For open riser stairs with carpet inlays, a unique 'wood tray' design is implemented for each tread. Unlike typical open riser stairs where carpet might wrap entirely around the tread, this method involves constructing a recessed area within the wooden tread to precisely fit the carpet and its underpad. This design ensures that the carpet sits flush with the top wood edge of the tread, allowing the exposed wood underneath to remain visible, preserving the aesthetic of open risers while adding the comfort and sound dampening of carpet. The visual effect is a continuous flow of wood with integrated carpet sections. https://www.youtube.com/embed/t2gBL7-bXp8 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10223-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/t2gBL7-bXp8/hqdefault.jpg Integrate Oak Trim at Top Stair Riser — Landing Measurement At the top of the open riser staircase, an oak trim piece is added flush to the stringer. This creates a neat pocket for the carpet to tuck underneath, avoiding the need for a carpeted nosing, which can look bulky and wear out quickly. Additionally, a matching piece of oak wood trim is installed on the riser itself at the top, replacing what would typically be drywall. This choice significantly improves the durability of the riser, especially in a high-traffic area, and maintains a consistent aesthetic with the rest of the wooden stair components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/t2gBL7-bXp8 39 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10223-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/t2gBL7-bXp8/hqdefault.jpg Design Hardwood Border for Carpeted Landing — Landing Measurement To maintain the cohesive aesthetic established on the stairs, the landing is also treated with a carpet inlay, but instead of running the carpet directly to the walls, a hardwood border is installed all the way around the perimeter of the landing. This border matches the wood used in the stair treads and stringers, extending the sophisticated 'carpet inlay' look to the entire landing area. This design avoids the typical practice of having carpet go right up under the baseboard, which would break the visual continuity and the intentional design of the open riser staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/t2gBL7-bXp8 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10216-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U_qBttWNBfI/hqdefault.jpg Count Risers and Measure Tread Thickness — stair treads The presenter counts the number of existing risers (steps) from the top landing down to the bottom floor, noting each one. Then, he measures the thickness of one of the granite treads that will be installed on the stairs. He confirms that the staircase has 16 risers and that each granite tread has a thickness of 10.5 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U_qBttWNBfI 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10216-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oAUp2WuHH6M/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Number of Risers and Treads — stair treads Measure the total vertical distance (total rise) from the top of the lower floor (where the stairs begin) to the top of the upper floor (where the stairs end). For instance, if the measurement is 8 feet 9 inches (105 inches). Then, divide the total rise (in inches) by a desired individual riser height (e.g., 7 or 7.5 inches, common building code standards) to determine the number of risers. For example, 105 inches / 7.5 inches = 14 risers. Remember that the number of treads will be one less than the number of risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oAUp2WuHH6M 232 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10216-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — stair treads Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10217-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — stair treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10217-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — stair treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10217-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — stair treads After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10218-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nCu4uIwBOOE/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Stairs — stair treads To ensure the carpet runner is long and wide enough, accurate measurements are essential. First, select one stair tread (the horizontal top surface of a step) and measure its depth. Next, measure the height of the riser (the vertical part of the step). Multiply the height by the number of risers and the depth by the number of treads on your staircase. Add these two sums together, then add an additional 6 to 8 inches to account for waste. This total will be the required length of the runner. If using more than one runner, add an additional 12 inches to the total length to account for seams where the two carpet pieces will join. If your staircase includes a landing and you plan to install the runner there, ensure you include the landing area in your measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nCu4uIwBOOE 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10218-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — stair treads Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10218-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c7jak2TlfDA/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Bullnose Stair — stair treads Begin by measuring the total length and width of the bullnose stair. First, measure from the inside corner of the wall around the bullnose curve to the outer corner, bending the tape measure around the nose. This measurement is 28 inches. Next, measure the length of the entire stair, wrapping the tape measure along the base where the carpet will be installed. This measurement is 57 inches. Finally, measure the width of the stair tread, which is 29 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c7jak2TlfDA 34 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10210-1 2026-09-19T14:47:59.851Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U_qBttWNBfI/hqdefault.jpg Count Risers and Measure Tread Thickness — Stair Tread Measurement The presenter counts the number of existing risers (steps) from the top landing down to the bottom floor, noting each one. Then, he measures the thickness of one of the granite treads that will be installed on the stairs. He confirms that the staircase has 16 risers and that each granite tread has a thickness of 10.5 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U_qBttWNBfI 67 2026-09-19T14:47:59.851Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10210-2 2026-09-19T14:47:59.851Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Stair Tread Measurement Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-19T14:47:59.851Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10210-3 2026-09-19T14:47:59.851Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oAUp2WuHH6M/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Number of Risers and Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Measure the total vertical distance (total rise) from the top of the lower floor (where the stairs begin) to the top of the upper floor (where the stairs end). For instance, if the measurement is 8 feet 9 inches (105 inches). Then, divide the total rise (in inches) by a desired individual riser height (e.g., 7 or 7.5 inches, common building code standards) to determine the number of risers. For example, 105 inches / 7.5 inches = 14 risers. Remember that the number of treads will be one less than the number of risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oAUp2WuHH6M 232 2026-09-19T14:47:59.851Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10206-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — Stair Treads First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10206-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — Stair Treads The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10206-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Stair Treads Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10207-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Treads Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10207-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10207-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Stair Treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10208-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Treads Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10208-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10208-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Stair Treads Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10205-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10205-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9OF3FBDsqcs/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stair Treads to Steps — Stair Covers With the treads unpacked, carefully position one stair tread onto the surface of a stair. Ensure it is centered and aligned properly. Once placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive backing and secure it to the stair. Repeat this process for each step, ensuring consistent placement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9OF3FBDsqcs 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10205-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10204-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — Stair Covers Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10204-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10204-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10202-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — Carpet Stair Covers Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10202-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10202-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10203-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Carpet Stair Covers With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10203-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10203-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10198-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10198-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Stair Tread Measurement Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10198-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — Stair Tread Measurement The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10199-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10199-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Determine Tread Width with Nosing and Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement To establish the correct overall width for the laminate pieces, begin by dry-fitting a piece of the laminate stair nosing against the existing stair edge. Then, position a full laminate board directly behind it, making sure it sits flush against the back edge of the nosing. This combination determines the total required depth of the new tread, helping to accurately account for the nosing's unique profile. Use a pencil to mark where the full laminate board ends, indicating the necessary width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10199-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads with Template Tool — Stair Tread Measurement Utilize a specialized stair measuring tool, often referred to as a stair jig or tread template tool, to accurately capture the exact length and precise angles of each individual stair tread. Carefully adjust the tool to fit snugly against the walls and any existing nosing, ensuring that it provides a perfect, custom template for the laminate cut that will follow. This step is critical for ensuring a seamless and gap-free fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10200-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10200-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10200-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10196-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — Carpet Stair Covers Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10196-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10196-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10197-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Carpet Stair Covers With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10197-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10197-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10186-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10186-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — Stair Treads Measure each stair tread individually from front to back and side to side, as stairs are rarely perfectly uniform. Cut the new hardwood treads to the precise dimensions of each step. Double-check all measurements before making cuts to ensure accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 8 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10186-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Mark and Cut Your Treads — Stair Treads With the nosing removed, prepare the replacement treads for installation. Begin by measuring each tread individually using a tape measure, as stairway widths can vary from one step to the next. Mark the length that needs to be cut off using a sharpie or pencil. If the tread is a double return tread, you will not need to make any further cuts as it has been manufactured to your provided dimensions. As a pro tip, use a piece of scrap wood to push the tread out at the return area. This allows you to properly scribe the skirt before cutting, which will help give you an exact fit and cut for your tread. Use a miter saw to make the necessary cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 35 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10188-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/udr7WnGM9m8/hqdefault.jpg Cure and Remove Tape — Stair Treads Allow the glued nosing to cure completely. The curing time will vary depending on the type of wood glue used; for standard wood glue, a curing period of approximately 24 hours is recommended. Once the glue has fully cured and dried, carefully remove all the masking tape from the nosing. You should now have a near-perfect, seamlessly joined stair nosing with matching wood grain. https://www.youtube.com/embed/udr7WnGM9m8 33 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10188-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XF5qIw-yOMY/hqdefault.jpg Allow Glue to Cure and Plan Reinforcement — Stair Treads Allow the wood glue to fully cure while the step remains securely clamped. The presenter suggests a curing time of 'a few days' for optimal strength. Once the glue is completely dry and strong, carefully remove all clamps, brackets, and screws. Inspect the step to ensure it is now level and firmly re-bonded. The presenter notes that for high-traffic areas, further reinforcement (such as drilling and inserting rods through the step) may be considered to prevent future issues, although this additional step is not detailed in this video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XF5qIw-yOMY 150 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10188-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Project Completion — Stair Treads Once all installation steps are complete, including securing risers, treads, and optional return trim, and after allowing the adhesive to fully dry (typically 24 to 48 hours), your beautiful new stairs are ready to use. Enjoy your newly updated staircase for years to come! https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 13 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10189-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fTh9RuhZAtY/hqdefault.jpg Fill and Sand Wood Surfaces — Stair Treads After all treads and risers are installed, use wood filler to fill in any gaps, nail holes, or imperfections. The video creator used a small metal putty knife for precise application in corners and used her finger for nail holes. Allow the wood filler to dry completely according to manufacturer instructions. Once dry, sand all surfaces of the stair treads smooth. Pay particular attention to the areas with wood filler and any rough edges. The creator used a Ryobi multi-oscillating tool with a sanding attachment for tight corners and a standard sander for the main surfaces. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fTh9RuhZAtY 75 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10189-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Fill Gaps and Nail Holes — Stair Treads After securing the new stair treads, use wood filler to address any imperfections. Apply wood filler to fill any gaps visible on the sides of the treads where they meet the stringers or walls. For these areas, a small metal putty knife is ideal for precise application and smoothing. For the nail holes created by the nail gun, you can simply use your finger to apply and smooth the wood filler, as it allows for better control in small depressions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 22 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10189-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bcNiJWXS-nI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Wood Filler and Sand — Stair Treads After structural repairs, wood filler is applied to all holes, cracks, and imperfections on the treads, risers, and railings. A putty knife or similar tool is used to spread the wood filler smoothly and evenly. Once the filler is dry, a sanding block is used for the banisters and risers, and an orbital palm sander is used for the flat stair treads to achieve a smooth finish, removing any excess filler and preparing the wood for painting and staining. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bcNiJWXS-nI 48 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10192-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fgKYII9TM7E/hqdefault.jpg Apply Wood Glue — Stair Treads Apply a generous, continuous bead of wood glue along the top edges of the exposed stair stringers and the riser where the new stair tread will sit. Ensure even coverage to maximize adhesion and help prevent future squeaks. The video clearly shows a bottle of Titebond brand wood glue being used for this purpose. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fgKYII9TM7E 12 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10192-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Apply Construction Adhesive to Stair Treads — Stair Treads Once you have confirmed that all laminate pieces fit perfectly during the dry-fit, remove them from the stair tread. Then, using a caulk gun, apply a generous amount of construction adhesive to the entire surface of the existing stair tread. Distribute the adhesive in a wavy or serpentine pattern to ensure good coverage. Pay particular attention to the edges and the area where the nosing will sit, as these areas require a strong bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 10 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10192-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Install New Hardwood Treads — Stair Treads Apply a generous amount of construction wood adhesive onto each old stair tread, creating a strong bond. Carefully place the newly cut hardwood tread over the old one, aligning it precisely. Step and stand on the newly installed tread to apply pressure and ensure good adhesion with the construction adhesive. Repeat this process for all stair treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 12 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10193-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — Stair Treads After the risers are installed, measure the depth and length of each individual stair tread. According to these measurements, cut your new hardwood treads. It's crucial to be accurate, as even small errors can lead to visible gaps. You may need to make slight adjustments to ensure a gap-free fit. A track saw, set at a 5-degree angle as demonstrated, can be particularly useful for making precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 81 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10193-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wOGeyg9Vqm8/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Lumber — Stair Treads After removing the old treads, measure their exact length to ensure the new ones are cut to fit perfectly. The narrator measures his old steps to be 57 inches long. Transfer this measurement to the new pressure-treated lumber. Use a square and a pencil to draw a straight, accurate cut line across the board. Then, use a circular saw to cut the new boards to the marked length. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wOGeyg9Vqm8 63 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10193-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FiZr2ZStfiY/hqdefault.jpg Trim Edges with Miter/Chop Saw — Stair Treads Once the vinyl planks and tread noses are cut to their approximate lengths, a miter saw or chop saw is ideal for trimming off the ends. This allows for precise, clean cross-cuts, ensuring that the components fit snugly against walls or other stair elements. This step is crucial for achieving a professional and finished look for each stair component. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FiZr2ZStfiY 3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10194-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Test Fit and Adjust Treads — Stair Treads Once a new stair tread has been cut, take it inside and test its fit on the corresponding stair. Place it gently into position to check for proper length and alignment. The presenter found that some of her cuts, made conservatively, were still slightly too long. If a tread doesn't fit perfectly, take it back to your cutting area and trim off just a tiny bit more to achieve a snug fit, then re-test. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 21 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10194-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Dry Fit Tread and Nosing — Stair Treads Once the stair tread and nosing pieces are cut, bring them back to the stairs for a dry fit. Place them into their final positions without adhesive to ensure all cuts are perfect and the pieces fit snugly against the riser and along the stair's edges. Make any necessary micro-adjustments at this stage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 6 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10194-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Install New Treads and Secure with Shims/Glue/Nails — Stair Treads Before permanent installation, dry-fit each new tread and riser combination. Check everywhere for a good, tight fit and minimal gaps. While tiny gaps can be filled later, strive for as few as possible to avoid relying on excessive filler. To ensure a gap-free fit at the bottom of the tread against the previous riser, place cardboard shims at the top of the newly installed riser. Apply a generous amount of strong construction adhesive (like PL Premium) to the underside of the new tread, then press it firmly down onto the existing tread and against the riser. Use a nail gun to secure the tread in place by firing nails into the tread and riser. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 78 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10195-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Secure New Treads with Screws — Stair Treads Once the adhesive is applied, place the new tread onto the stringers, pushing it down firmly into the bead of adhesive. Ensure there is a small 1/8-inch gap between the new tread and any adjacent boards for proper expansion and drainage. For fasteners, always use screws rather than nails, as they provide a much tighter and more durable hold. Specifically, use 2.5-inch exterior-grade screws. Using a Hitachi drill, pre-drill pilot holes with an 1/8-inch bit, carefully lining them up with the center of the stringer to prevent splitting the wood. Then, use a DeWalt impact driver to drive the screws in, countersinking the head slightly so it's flush or just below the surface of the tread. For the front edge of the board, where the stringer's wood grain might be weak or 'sketchy,' it is often better to put a screw down into the riser below instead of directly into the stringer end. Line it up by eye, pre-drill with the 1/8-inch bit, and then drive the screw in with the impact driver, countersinking it as before. Repeat this fastening process for each stringer contact point and for the front edge of each new tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 51 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10195-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Secure New Stair Treads — Stair Treads To permanently secure the new stair treads, first apply an adhesive like liquid nails to the stair stringers (the support beams) where the tread will rest. Use a caulk gun to apply an even bead of the adhesive. Then, carefully place the new tread onto the stringers, ensuring it is flush and properly aligned. Finally, use a nail gun to fasten the tread securely by driving nails into the sides of the stair structure, typically into the stringers and risers, creating a strong bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 109 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10195-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Install Your Treads — Stair Treads In some cases, you may need to install risers before installing your new treads. If this is the case, use construction adhesive and finish nails to secure them. After this, install the treads by applying construction adhesive on the top and front of the nosing of the sub-treads of the stairs. Then, use 1 1/2-inch finish nails with a finish nailer to attach the replacement treads securely. Repeat this step for each of your treads, working your way up the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 26 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10187-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bTgWpOVv9-M/hqdefault.jpg Clean Up Excess Glue — Stair Treads Immediately after inserting the dowels and while the glue is still wet, use a dry rag to wipe away any excess wood glue that squeezes out from around the dowel and joint line. Cleaning up the squeeze-out quickly will prevent it from drying on the wood surface, which can be difficult to remove later and can affect the final finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bTgWpOVv9-M 10 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10187-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ye6IF7RQDIQ/hqdefault.jpg Clean Up Excess Glue — Stair Treads After the frame is clamped, use a wet paper towel and a flat screwdriver to clean up any excess wood glue, especially from the inside corners of the frame. The top and outside edges can be cleaned later with sanding, but the inside corners are harder to reach once the glue dries. Rotate the wet paper towel frequently to expose a clean surface, ensuring all glue is thoroughly wiped away. This proactive cleanup will save significant time and effort during the finishing stages. Once the frame is cleaned, place the tools back in their designated storage areas. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ye6IF7RQDIQ 44 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10187-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ArPIfak86m0/hqdefault.jpg Clean Up Excess Glue — Stair Treads After all the wooden pieces are securely joined and screwed, there may be some excess wood glue that has squeezed out from the joint lines. Carefully wipe away this excess glue using a finger. Removing wet glue ensures a cleaner aesthetic finish, particularly important if the wood will be stained or varnished later, as dried glue can prevent finishes from adhering properly to the wood surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ArPIfak86m0 3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10191-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eDqpjjl0laE/hqdefault.jpg Apply Protective Finish — Stair Treads After the stain has dried, apply a couple of coats of an outdoor-rated finish. The host recommends using Spar Urethane, explaining it's also used on boats for its durability. Apply the finish with a brush using long, smooth motions. Avoid short, choppy strokes as this can lead to visible brush marks. Allow plenty of time for the finish to cure according to product instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eDqpjjl0laE 22 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10191-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OtHhuSgkV98/hqdefault.jpg Apply Protective Finish — Stair Treads To protect the wood and further enhance its appearance, apply a clear protective finish. The creator uses Minwax Fast-Drying Polyurethane in Clear Satin, an oil-based finish. Apply the polyurethane evenly with a brush over all surfaces of the stained wood. This will seal the wood, provide durability, and add a subtle sheen that brings out the depth of the distressing and the richness of the stain. Allow adequate drying time between coats and before handling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OtHhuSgkV98 38 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10191-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fgtkpa7z_Oc/hqdefault.jpg Apply Protective Finish — Stair Treads After any epoxy work and final sanding, thoroughly wipe down the entire wooden plank with a clean cloth, possibly dampened with mineral spirits or denatured alcohol, to remove all sanding dust and debris. Once clean and dry, apply a high-quality outdoor-grade protective finish, such as tung oil, spar varnish, or a marine-grade sealer. The video shows a wipe-on application. Apply the finish evenly, following the manufacturer's instructions for coats and drying times, to protect the wood from weathering, moisture, and UV damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fgtkpa7z_Oc 5 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10190-1 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BpHGw0Qkeb8/hqdefault.jpg Sand the Filled Joint Smooth — Stair Treads After the glue-sawdust mixture has fully dried (which typically takes a few minutes, depending on the glue and environmental conditions), use fine-grit sandpaper to sand the filled area. Start with a medium-fine grit (e.g., 180-220 grit) to smooth any raised areas, then finish with a finer grit (e.g., 220-320 grit) to achieve a perfectly smooth, flush surface that blends seamlessly with the surrounding wood. Wipe away any remaining dust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BpHGw0Qkeb8 12 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10190-2 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/udkkWdYPNrw/hqdefault.jpg Sand All Filled Areas (Pre-Finish) — Stair Treads Once all applied wood fillers are completely cured (dry), use an orbital sander with 180-grit sandpaper to sand down all the filled areas. Sand until the filler is flush with the surrounding wood surface and feels smooth to the touch. This step prepares the wood for finishing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/udkkWdYPNrw 19 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10190-3 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hjp4zmjB1Tw/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Smooth Repaired Surfaces — Stair Treads Once the wood filler or epoxy has fully cured, the repaired areas must be sanded to achieve a smooth, seamless surface. Use an orbital sander, starting with a medium-grit sandpaper (e.g., 80-120 grit) to remove excess filler and level the surface. Progress to a finer grit (e.g., 180-220 grit) to achieve a perfectly smooth finish that is flush with the original wood and ready for painting. This step is crucial for eliminating any visible ridges or imperfections from the repair, ensuring a professional final appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hjp4zmjB1Tw 4 2026-09-16T19:06:21.035Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10180-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LBeZYCH5iwQ/hqdefault.jpg Mount TV to Wall — Wall-Mounted Television Installation With the wall mount installed and the TV-side brackets attached, it's time to mount the TV. This step usually requires two people due to the size and weight of flat screen TVs, especially larger models. Carefully lift the TV, aligning the brackets on the back of the TV with the wall mount. Gently hook or slide the TV into place, following the specific instructions for your mount type. Once the TV is on the mount, make sure it is securely seated and locked into position. Many mounts have safety latches, tightening screws, or pull strings that need to be engaged to prevent the TV from accidentally coming off the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LBeZYCH5iwQ 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10180-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6VqE8dwlJUo/hqdefault.jpg Hang TV onto Mount — Wall-Mounted Television Installation With the wall bracket securely in place, it's time to hang the TV. This step often requires two people due to the size and weight of modern televisions. Carefully lift the TV, aligning the brackets on the back of the TV with the arms of the wall mount. Guide the TV onto the mount, ensuring that the brackets engage properly. Once the TV is hung, secure it to the mount using the locking mechanisms or screws provided with your specific TV mount. The video shows tightening a bolt on the horizontal bracket using a socket wrench. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6VqE8dwlJUo 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10180-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/y0MBMDXFQE0/hqdefault.jpg Mount the TV — Wall-Mounted Television Installation With a helper, carefully lift the TV. Align the tapered end of the TV bracket (which was pre-assembled onto the TV) with the hook on the articulating arm. Gently lower the TV until the bracket hooks securely into the arm. Once the TV is hanging, insert and tighten any locking screws at the bottom of the TV bracket to prevent accidental removal and ensure it is firmly attached to the articulating arm. The TV is now securely mounted to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/y0MBMDXFQE0 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10181-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6VqE8dwlJUo/hqdefault.jpg Final Adjustments and Cable Management — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Once the TV is hung and initially secured, make final adjustments. Use a level to ensure the TV is perfectly horizontal. You can then use the mount's fine adjustments to pan, swivel, or tilt the TV to achieve the optimal viewing angle in your room. If your mount includes cable management clips, route your cables through them for a clean and organized look, concealing them behind the TV and mount. After all adjustments are complete and you are satisfied with the positioning, fully tighten all securing nuts and bolts on the mount using a socket set to lock the TV into its final position. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6VqE8dwlJUo 43 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10181-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cEiCEPcqMzY/hqdefault.jpg Hang TV, Secure, Adjust Tilt, and Manage Cords — Wall-Mounted Television Installation With a helper (recommended, as the TV is heavy), carefully lift the TV. Align the hooks on the top of the TV mounting rails with the top rail of the wall mount assembly. Gently lower the TV until the hooks securely engage the top rail. Then, identify the small screws at the bottom of the TV mounting rails (which may not be visible on camera but are present). Use a screwdriver (e.g., Philips head from the kit) to tighten these screws onto the wall mount's rail, securing the TV to prevent accidental dislodgement. Adjust the TV's tilt to your desired viewing angle by loosening a knob on the mount's arm, setting the angle, and then tightening the knob to lock it in place. Before finalizing the TV's position, it is recommended to manage all necessary cords and cables (e.g., HDMI, coax, power) by plugging them into the TV while it's still accessible. Finally, gently swivel the TV into its final desired position in the corner. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cEiCEPcqMzY 128 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10181-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Qwk1rER_EFM/hqdefault.jpg Cable Management and Final Adjustments — Wall-Mounted Television Installation After the TV is securely mounted and powered, route any remaining cables (like HDMI or data cables, if applicable, although the presenter suggests using a smart TV to minimize these) neatly along the articulating bracket. Use cable ties or Velcro straps to bundle and secure the cables to the bracket arms, ensuring they do not get pinched or interfere with the TV's movement. Finally, perform a test to adjust the TV's position and angle as needed. The presenter notes the unique articulating bracket allows the TV to be easily adjusted to face different directions in the room. Enjoy your newly mounted TV with a clean, cable-free appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Qwk1rER_EFM 43 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10183-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cuI0_0Bb7ic/hqdefault.jpg Pre-Drill Pilot Holes — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Using the previously marked pilot hole locations (on the studs), take your drill and the appropriate 3/16 inch or 7/32 inch drill bit. Carefully pre-drill a pilot hole at each marked location. It's crucial to use a drill bit that is slightly smaller than the lag screws you will be using. This allows the lag screws to tightly grip the wood of the studs, ensuring a secure mount. Before drilling, check the other side of the wall for any obstructions or electrical wires. If an electrical wire is present, it should ideally be protected by a metal plate behind the drywall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cuI0_0Bb7ic 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10183-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LBeZYCH5iwQ/hqdefault.jpg Install Wall Mount — Wall-Mounted Television Installation With the pilot holes marked, use a drill (e.g., RYOBI) with an appropriate drill bit to create pilot holes into the center of the studs. The video shows a person wearing safety glasses while drilling, which is important for eye protection. Once the pilot holes are drilled to the correct depth, position the TV wall mount bracket against the wall, aligning its screw holes with the freshly drilled pilot holes. Then, use the drill to drive the mounting screws (typically lag bolts provided with the mount) securely into the pilot holes. Tighten them firmly but avoid over-tightening to prevent stripping the wood or damaging the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LBeZYCH5iwQ 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10183-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hN7HX_X8rhE/hqdefault.jpg Install TV Wall Mount (Part 1) — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Align the TV wall mount with the marked stud locations. Using a DeWalt cordless drill, drill pilot holes through the mount's designated screw holes and into the center of the wall studs. Hold a dustpan below the drilling area to catch any drywall or wood debris. Once pilot holes are drilled, secure the wall mount to the studs using the provided lag screws and the cordless drill. Ensure the mount is firmly attached to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hN7HX_X8rhE 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10184-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LBeZYCH5iwQ/hqdefault.jpg Locate Studs and Mark Pilot Holes — Wall-Mounted Television Installation After deciding on the TV's position, use a stud finder (e.g., RYOBI) to locate the wall studs behind the chosen area. Run the stud finder horizontally along the wall, marking the edges and center of each stud with a pencil. This is crucial for securely mounting the TV to the structural framing of your wall. Once the stud locations are accurately marked, hold the TV wall mount bracket against the wall at the desired height, aligning it with the marked stud centers. Use a level (e.g., Husky 24-inch) to ensure the bracket is perfectly horizontal, then mark the exact spots for drilling pilot holes through the mount's designated screw holes into the center of the studs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LBeZYCH5iwQ 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10184-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hN7HX_X8rhE/hqdefault.jpg Locate Wall Studs — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Begin by removing any existing TV or furniture from the wall. Then, use a stud finder, specifically a Zircon Edge Finding stud finder as shown in the video, to locate the wooden studs within the wall. Once a stud is detected, mark its edges with a pencil directly on the wall or on a piece of painter's tape placed horizontally on the wall. This ensures accurate placement of the TV mount's lag screws, providing a secure anchor point. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hN7HX_X8rhE 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10184-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U6KBfh_Bimw/hqdefault.jpg Locate and Mark Wall Studs — Wall-Mounted Television Installation After marking the approximate top center of where the wall mount will go, use a stud finder to precisely locate the vertical wooden studs behind the drywall. It is crucial to mount heavy items like TVs (or safes) directly into these studs for maximum security and load-bearing capacity. Scan the area around your marked point horizontally to find the edges of the stud, then mark the center. Some modern homes may have studs spaced 24 inches apart, while older homes commonly use 16-inch spacing. Confirm the spacing as this will affect how many studs your wall mount can attach to. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U6KBfh_Bimw 101 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10178-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LBeZYCH5iwQ/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Select TV Mount — Wall-Mounted Television Installation The video begins by listing the essential tools needed for mounting a flat screen TV: a drill, a stud finder, a screwdriver, a pencil, and a level. It then shows two common types of TV mounts – a standard mount and an adjustable swivel mount – indicating that the choice depends on desired functionality and viewing angles. Ensure your selected mount is compatible with your TV's size and weight. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LBeZYCH5iwQ 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10178-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/y0MBMDXFQE0/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the TV & the Mount — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Begin by unboxing both your television and the TV wall mount kit. If your television has a stand, legs, or feet, carefully remove them as they will not be needed for wall mounting. Familiarize yourself with the components of your specific TV mount; the presenter uses a Sanus full-motion TV wall mount that fits TVs from 37"-90" and supports up to 135 pounds, extending 26 inches from the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/y0MBMDXFQE0 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10178-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaYg_px029o/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Wall Mount Placement — Wall-Mounted Television Installation With the brackets now on the TV, temporarily position the main wall mount onto these brackets. This simulates the TV being mounted. Then, measure the vertical distance from the top edge of the TV to the top edge of the rear plate of the wall mount (the part that bolts to the wall). Additionally, consider the thickness of any skirting board at the base of the wall to ensure the TV will sit flush. This measurement is crucial for marking the precise installation height of the wall mount on the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaYg_px029o 73 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10182-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MQ2O7c8BSDY/hqdefault.jpg Mark Wall Plate Positions — Wall-Mounted Television Installation The presenter re-measures the height of the dresser (34 inches). He then adds 4 inches to this measurement (for typical TV stand clearance), resulting in 38 inches for the bottom of the TV. From the previous step, he knows the hooks on the TV arms are 19 inches from the bottom of the TV. So, he marks 38 + 19 = 57 inches from the floor for the top of the wall plate. He holds the wall plate against the wall at the marked height and uses a level (both the built-in one on the mount and a separate hand level) to ensure it's perfectly horizontal. He then marks the drilling points for both the stud side and the drywall side of the mount with a pencil, circling the holes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MQ2O7c8BSDY 79 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10182-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaYg_px029o/hqdefault.jpg Mark Wall Mount Top Edge — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Using the previously determined measurement (from the top of the TV to the top of the wall mount's rear plate) and the desired TV height, mark the precise location for the top edge of the wall mount's rear plate on the wall. Draw a horizontal line at this height. Then, using the earlier stud/dwang markings, draw a vertical line through the center of the stud that intersects the horizontal line. This intersection marks the central top point for the wall mount. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaYg_px029o 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10182-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XX26zp2N-vI/hqdefault.jpg Mark Wall Mount Position — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Position the wall mount bracket against the wall, aligning it with the marked stud locations. Use a level to ensure the bracket is perfectly horizontal. Once aligned and level, mark the precise points on the wall where the screws will go, making sure they correspond to the holes in the bracket and the previously located studs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XX26zp2N-vI 58 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10185-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cuI0_0Bb7ic/hqdefault.jpg Final Level Check and Tighten Wall Mount — Wall-Mounted Television Installation After securing the wall mount with slightly loose lag screws, use a level to ensure the mount is perfectly horizontal. Adjust the mount as needed by tapping it gently until the level indicates it is perfectly straight. Once level, fully tighten all the lag screws using your drill/impact driver or socket wrench. It's important to tighten them securely to prevent any movement. Clean up any dust or debris from drilling with a vacuum cleaner. The wall mount should now be firmly attached and level, ready for the TV. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cuI0_0Bb7ic 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10185-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cEiCEPcqMzY/hqdefault.jpg Install Wall Plate and Secure Bolts — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Position the main mounting arm assembly against the pre-drilled holes in the wall. The presenter suggests holding the heavy mount on a shoulder, but a second person or a temporary support would be highly beneficial. Insert the lag bolts into the pre-drilled holes through the mount. Partially drive the bolts using the power drill. Once all bolts are partially in, verify that the mount is level using the built-in level on the mount itself. Once leveled, fully tighten all lag bolts using a socket wrench to ensure the mount is extremely secure to the wall studs. This model's heavy-duty design requires robust fastening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cEiCEPcqMzY 121 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10185-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qogvfyw_9dw/hqdefault.jpg Attach Wall Mount Arms — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Take the main wall mount arm assembly. You will be using six lag bolts for this installation (more are provided for masonry or brick, which is not covered in this guide). To make installation easier, you can support the mount on your shoulder. Align the mount with the pre-drilled pilot holes. Insert one lag bolt loosely into a pilot hole using a power drill or driver. Then, insert the remaining lag bolts loosely into their respective pilot holes. Once all six bolts are in place, use a level on the mount to ensure it is perfectly horizontal. After confirming it's level, proceed to tighten all six lag bolts securely into the wall using the power drill/driver, but do not overtighten until all are snug. The mount should now be very secure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qogvfyw_9dw 84 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10179-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/y0MBMDXFQE0/hqdefault.jpg Pre-assemble Mount to TV — Wall-Mounted Television Installation To simplify the final mounting process, temporarily pre-assemble the TV bracket (the part that attaches to the TV) and the articulating arm to the back of the TV. Consult your mount's instructions for specific assembly steps. The mount kit typically comes with a large assortment of screws and spacers. To select the correct screw length for the TV, gently thread a screw into a mounting hole on the TV; it should bottom out without applying pressure to the TV screen itself. If it feels too long, causing pressure or potentially puncturing the screen, use a shorter screw or a spacer from the kit. The presenter demonstrates using a short screw with a screwdriver to secure the bracket rails to the TV's VESA mounting points. Then, attach the articulating arm to these rails. Once assembled, measure the distance from the top edge of the TV to the top mounting hole on the arm (e.g., 17 inches) and from the bottom edge of the TV to the bottom mounting hole (e.g., 3.5 inches). These measurements will be crucial for positioning the wall mount correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/y0MBMDXFQE0 130 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10179-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cuI0_0Bb7ic/hqdefault.jpg Attach Brackets to the TV — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Unbox your TV and the TV wall mount. The mount typically includes two main components: brackets that attach to the TV and a main bracket that attaches to the wall. Begin by attaching the smaller brackets directly to the back of the TV. Use the screws provided with your TV wall mount that are compatible with your specific TV's screw holes. If necessary, use washers to space them out. Once aligned, hand-tighten the screws into the TV's VESA mounting holes, then use a Phillips head screwdriver to securely tighten them. Ensure they are nice and tight so the brackets will not fall off. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cuI0_0Bb7ic 65 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10179-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6DpuvKG10KA/hqdefault.jpg Attach Monitor Brackets to TV — Wall-Mounted Television Installation Begin by attaching the monitor brackets, which are part of the SANUS mounting kit, to the back of your flat-panel TV. Locate the four mounting holes on the back of the TV. Select the appropriate diameter of bolts from the included hardware that are compatible with your TV's mounting holes. If you are unsure which mounting holes or bolt size to use, consult your television's manual. Choose a bolt length that is neither too long nor too short for a secure fit. If there are any obstructions on the back of the TV, such as uneven surfaces, or if you need additional space for cables, use the provided spacers to create extra room between the TV and the mount. Securely tighten the bolts, ensuring the brackets are firmly attached. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6DpuvKG10KA 39 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10177-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Carpet Stair Covers Installation With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10177-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Installation Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10177-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Carpet Stair Covers Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10176-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — Carpet Stair Covers Installation Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10176-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10176-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZrWNkbh5j4M/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Treads with Adhesive — Carpet Stair Covers Installation Take one carpet tread and flip it over to expose the underside. Unroll the double-sided carpet tape (such as X-Fasten brand) and carefully apply two parallel strips along the long edges of the tread's underside. As you apply, peel off the protective backing from the tape. Use a utility knife (like a DeWalt brand) to cleanly cut the tape once each strip is fully applied. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZrWNkbh5j4M 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10174-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — Carpet Stair Covers Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10174-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10174-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10175-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Carpet Stair Covers With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10175-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10175-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Covers Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10168-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10168-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10168-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10169-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10169-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — Stair Tread Measurement After the risers are installed, measure the depth and length of each individual stair tread. According to these measurements, cut your new hardwood treads. It's crucial to be accurate, as even small errors can lead to visible gaps. You may need to make slight adjustments to ensure a gap-free fit. A track saw, set at a 5-degree angle as demonstrated, can be particularly useful for making precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 81 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10169-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10170-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ubEN4NHJKPI/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Individual Riser Height — Stair Tread Measurement With the total vertical rise determined (173 inches) and the total number of risers known (24 risers for this staircase), use a calculator to divide the total rise by the number of risers. For example, 173 inches / 24 risers = 7.2083333 inches per riser (approximately 7 and 1/4 inches or 7.25 inches). This calculation provides the precise height for each individual riser to ensure uniformity across the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ubEN4NHJKPI 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10170-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/reF4dSqKIho/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Riser Height (Option 1) — Stair Tread Measurement Take the total rise (35 inches) and divide it by a whole number slightly higher than your approximate riser count (e.g., 5, since 4.66666 is closest to 5 when rounding up). In this example, 35 inches divided by 5 risers equals 7 inches per riser. A riser height of 7 inches is considered acceptable, typically falling within the comfortable range of 7 to 8 inches, and ideally between 7.25 and 7.75 inches for optimal comfort. This calculation determines a possible, comfortable, and potentially code-compliant individual riser height. https://www.youtube.com/embed/reF4dSqKIho 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10170-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/reF4dSqKIho/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Riser Height (Option 2) and Verify Code Compliance — Stair Tread Measurement To double-check or explore other potential options, divide the total rise (35 inches) by a whole number slightly lower than your approximate riser count (e.g., 4). In this example, 35 inches divided by 4 risers equals 8.75 inches per riser. This height is typically unacceptable for most building departments and building codes, as the maximum allowable rise for a single step is usually 8 inches. Anything above 8 inches would also be uncomfortable for users, thus compromising both safety and comfort. This step emphasizes the importance of adhering to building codes while prioritizing the overall safety and comfort of the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/reF4dSqKIho 48 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10171-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10171-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Measurement With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10171-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Stair Tread Measurement After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10172-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10172-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10172-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10173-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U_qBttWNBfI/hqdefault.jpg Count Risers and Measure Tread Thickness — Stair Tread Measurement The presenter counts the number of existing risers (steps) from the top landing down to the bottom floor, noting each one. Then, he measures the thickness of one of the granite treads that will be installed on the stairs. He confirms that the staircase has 16 risers and that each granite tread has a thickness of 10.5 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U_qBttWNBfI 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10173-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10173-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2rkFnsTztog/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Risers — Stair Tread Measurement Use a stair tread jig to measure the exact dimensions of each riser. Place the jig on the stair, adjust its arms to fit snugly against the side stringers and the top of the current tread, and then lock it in place. Take the jig to your riser material (e.g., plywood), place the jig on it, and mark the cut lines with a pencil. Repeat this process for each riser, as each stair will likely have slightly different dimensions. Cut the marked riser pieces using a miter saw, carefully aligning the blade with your pencil lines. Label the back of each cut riser with its corresponding stair number and its top edge to maintain organization, as each piece is unique. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2rkFnsTztog 131 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10164-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NcQ4hagFWcs/hqdefault.jpg Mount shelf to wall — Pipe Shelf Construction Mount the finished shelf to the wall. Use a level to ensure the shelf is straight and mark the mounting points through the pipe flanges. Drill pilot holes into the wall and secure the shelf using appropriate screws and anchors for the wall type (e.g., brick, drywall with studs). https://www.youtube.com/embed/NcQ4hagFWcs 102 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10164-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jFBAzFNwiM4/hqdefault.jpg Securing Shelf Unit to Wall Studs — Pipe Shelf Construction To ensure the shelf unit is stable and secure, attach it to the wall. First, use a stud finder to locate the vertical studs behind the drywall. Alternatively, you can use a magnet to find the drywall screws or nails that mark the stud locations, as studs are typically 16 inches apart. Mark the locations of the studs on the wall. Carefully tip the assembled shelf unit onto its front, then use a 'lift with your legs' technique to lift it upright and position it against the wall, aligning the shelf's vertical legs with the marked stud locations. Once aligned, pre-drill holes through the 48-inch horizontal pieces of the shelf frame into the wall studs. Secure these points with 2 1/2 inch screws, making sure each screw firmly hits a stud for maximum stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jFBAzFNwiM4 58 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10164-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7D2-kdPqOD0/hqdefault.jpg Mount Shelf Frame to Wall — Pipe Shelf Construction First, determine the desired height for the shelf, which is 3 feet in the video. Use a measuring tape and a level to mark a straight, level line on the wall studs where the shelf will be installed. With a helper holding the shelf frame in place along the marked line, use a drill to drive long wood screws through the back of the frame and into the wall studs, securing it firmly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7D2-kdPqOD0 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10165-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NcQ4hagFWcs/hqdefault.jpg Assemble pipe frame — Pipe Shelf Construction Begin assembling the pipe structure for the shelf. Start by connecting the pipes and fittings to form the desired shape and size of the shelf supports. This often involves screwing pipes into threaded fittings, ensuring a snug fit. The video shows the assembly of two main pipe sections that will connect to the wooden shelf. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NcQ4hagFWcs 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10165-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7tXYlUMkgY4/hqdefault.jpg Assemble First Pipe Support — Pipe Shelf Construction Start by assembling one end of the black pipe structure. Thread one of the 1-inch nipples into a floor flange. Then, thread one of the 90-degree elbows onto the other end of the nipple. This forms the first support bracket for the main pipe. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7tXYlUMkgY4 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10165-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7tXYlUMkgY4/hqdefault.jpg Assemble Other Pipe Support — Pipe Shelf Construction Now, attach the main 6-foot black pipe to the first assembled support by threading it into the 90-degree elbow. Then, repeat the assembly process from Step 3 for the other end: thread the second 1-inch nipple into the remaining flange, and then thread the nipple into the other end of the 6-foot black pipe. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7tXYlUMkgY4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10167-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NcQ4hagFWcs/hqdefault.jpg Sand and stain wood — Pipe Shelf Construction Sand the wooden shelf to create a smooth surface. Use a power sander to remove any rough spots or imperfections. After sanding, apply a wood stain to enhance the grain and color of the wood. The video shows applying a dark stain, followed by a lighter stain or glaze for a weathered effect. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NcQ4hagFWcs 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10167-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eSm8kNLoQqw/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Stain Shelves — Pipe Shelf Construction Using a 220-grit sandpaper and an orbital sander, thoroughly sand all surfaces of the assembled floating shelves. Pay attention to edges and any rough spots to ensure a smooth finish. Once sanded, wipe away any dust. Then, using a cotton rag, apply your chosen wood stain (a dark brown was used in the video) evenly across all wooden surfaces of the shelves. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eSm8kNLoQqw 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10167-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J2QT3HShQY8/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Finish the Shelving Unit — Pipe Shelf Construction Once the shelving unit is fully assembled and structurally sound, it's time for sanding. Use an orbital sander to smooth all rough surfaces, edges, and corners of the wooden pallets. Pay extra attention to areas where you made cuts or where the wood might have splinters. Sanding will not only improve the aesthetics of the unit but also make it safer to handle and use. After sanding, you can choose to apply a wood finish like stain, varnish, or paint for added durability and a personalized look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J2QT3HShQY8 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10166-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NcQ4hagFWcs/hqdefault.jpg Attach shelf to pipe frame — Pipe Shelf Construction Attach the finished wooden shelf to the pipe frame. Align the shelf with the pipe supports and secure it using screws. Ensure the shelf is level and firmly attached. The video shows attaching the shelf to the pipe structure, which will then be mounted to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NcQ4hagFWcs 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10166-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-4gDnXEXaW8/hqdefault.jpg Attach Shelves and Secure with Tube Straps — Pipe Shelf Construction With all the pipe brackets now level, the wooden shelves can be placed on top. To ensure maximum stability and prevent the shelves from sliding back and forth, the presenter recommends using galvanized tube straps. These straps wrap around the pipe and are screwed into the underside of the wooden shelf, holding it firmly in place. This step is crucial for long-term durability and safety, especially in a high-traffic area like a laundry room. If tube straps aren't used, creating a channel or recess in the underside of the shelf could also help prevent sliding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-4gDnXEXaW8 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10166-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/halohmYz60Q/hqdefault.jpg Place Shelves and Secure with Clips — Pipe Shelf Construction Carefully lift each pre-built and stained wooden shelf box and slide it onto the corresponding pipe supports. The hollow design of the shelves allows them to fit snugly over the pipes, creating the floating effect. Once the shelves are in place, retrieve the small retaining clips that typically come with industrial pipe brackets. Position one clip directly underneath each pipe support where it meets the shelf. Secure these clips to the bottom of the shelf with small screws, using a drill or screwdriver. These clips prevent the shelves from shifting or being accidentally knocked off the supports, adding an extra layer of safety and stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/halohmYz60Q 65 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10163-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aBIc7LcMdPg/hqdefault.jpg Clean Metal Pipe Fittings — Pipe Shelf Construction Begin by thoroughly cleaning all the metal pipe fittings and components in a sink. Use a toothbrush and a kitchen brush with soapy water to remove any grease, dirt, or manufacturing residues. Ensure all threaded parts are clean for proper sealing later. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aBIc7LcMdPg 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10163-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zUxhrHjXItM/hqdefault.jpg Rinse and Dry Pipes — Pipe Shelf Construction After scrubbing, remove each pipe component from the TSP solution. Rinse them thoroughly under clean, running water to wash away all traces of the TSP and any loosened grime. It's crucial to ensure no cleaning solution remains on the metal. Once rinsed, dry the pipes completely with a clean towel or allow them to air dry. The pipes are now prepared and ready to receive your chosen finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zUxhrHjXItM 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10163-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zUxhrHjXItM/hqdefault.jpg Soak and Scrub Pipes — Pipe Shelf Construction Carefully place all the galvanized pipe components into the prepared TSP solution in the bucket. Ensure they are fully submerged. Allow the pipes to soak for a couple of minutes to give the TSP time to break down any remaining grease, oil, or manufacturing residues. After soaking, use a scrub pad to vigorously scrub all surfaces of each pipe piece, including the threaded areas and flanges. Be thorough to remove all contaminants. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zUxhrHjXItM 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10158-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1oZabfoszjc/hqdefault.jpg Cut Components to Size — Pipe Shelf Using your finalized design and measurements, accurately cut all PVC pipes to their required lengths with a PVC pipe cutter or a hacksaw. Ensure that all cuts are clean and straight to allow for proper fitting and a stable structure. After cutting, use sandpaper to smooth any rough edges on the PVC pipes, as well as on the wooden boards to prevent splinters or snags. Next, cut the wooden boards to the specified dimensions for your shelves using a circular saw or hand saw. If you plan to include a mesh backing, cut it to size as well, preparing all components for assembly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1oZabfoszjc 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10158-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lmPrYi-kFeM/hqdefault.jpg Cut the Pipe Squarely — Pipe Shelf Use a hand saw, miter saw, or a specialized plastic tubing cutter to cut the pipe to the desired length. Ensure the cut is as straight and square as possible. A crooked cut can result in an improper fit and a weak joint. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lmPrYi-kFeM 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10158-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/M_HPeH9FsMs/hqdefault.jpg Cut PVC Pipes — Pipe Shelf Begin by using PVC pipe cutters to cut the PVC pipes to the desired lengths. Mark the cutting points with a marker. Ensure clean cuts for proper fitting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/M_HPeH9FsMs 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10161-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NcQ4hagFWcs/hqdefault.jpg Attach shelf to pipe frame — Pipe Shelf Attach the finished wooden shelf to the pipe frame. Align the shelf with the pipe supports and secure it using screws. Ensure the shelf is level and firmly attached. The video shows attaching the shelf to the pipe structure, which will then be mounted to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NcQ4hagFWcs 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10161-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/halohmYz60Q/hqdefault.jpg Place Shelves and Secure with Clips — Pipe Shelf Carefully lift each pre-built and stained wooden shelf box and slide it onto the corresponding pipe supports. The hollow design of the shelves allows them to fit snugly over the pipes, creating the floating effect. Once the shelves are in place, retrieve the small retaining clips that typically come with industrial pipe brackets. Position one clip directly underneath each pipe support where it meets the shelf. Secure these clips to the bottom of the shelf with small screws, using a drill or screwdriver. These clips prevent the shelves from shifting or being accidentally knocked off the supports, adding an extra layer of safety and stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/halohmYz60Q 65 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10161-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-4gDnXEXaW8/hqdefault.jpg Attach Shelves and Secure with Tube Straps — Pipe Shelf With all the pipe brackets now level, the wooden shelves can be placed on top. To ensure maximum stability and prevent the shelves from sliding back and forth, the presenter recommends using galvanized tube straps. These straps wrap around the pipe and are screwed into the underside of the wooden shelf, holding it firmly in place. This step is crucial for long-term durability and safety, especially in a high-traffic area like a laundry room. If tube straps aren't used, creating a channel or recess in the underside of the shelf could also help prevent sliding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-4gDnXEXaW8 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10162-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NcQ4hagFWcs/hqdefault.jpg Mount shelf to wall — Pipe Shelf Mount the finished shelf to the wall. Use a level to ensure the shelf is straight and mark the mounting points through the pipe flanges. Drill pilot holes into the wall and secure the shelf using appropriate screws and anchors for the wall type (e.g., brick, drywall with studs). https://www.youtube.com/embed/NcQ4hagFWcs 102 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10162-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/u9sZSZhNH-0/hqdefault.jpg Mount the Pipe Structure to the Wall — Pipe Shelf After assembling the pipe structure, it is mounted to the wall. The presenter first pre-drills pilot holes into the wall where the pipe flanges will attach. He then positions the entire pipe assembly, ensuring it is level, and uses a DeWalt cordless drill with a screwdriver bit to drive screws through the holes in the black iron pipe flanges, directly into the wall. He secures both the upper and lower flanges, transforming the loose pipe assembly into a fixed, functional wall-mounted holder for paper rolls. https://www.youtube.com/embed/u9sZSZhNH-0 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10162-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jFBAzFNwiM4/hqdefault.jpg Securing Shelf Unit to Wall Studs — Pipe Shelf To ensure the shelf unit is stable and secure, attach it to the wall. First, use a stud finder to locate the vertical studs behind the drywall. Alternatively, you can use a magnet to find the drywall screws or nails that mark the stud locations, as studs are typically 16 inches apart. Mark the locations of the studs on the wall. Carefully tip the assembled shelf unit onto its front, then use a 'lift with your legs' technique to lift it upright and position it against the wall, aligning the shelf's vertical legs with the marked stud locations. Once aligned, pre-drill holes through the 48-inch horizontal pieces of the shelf frame into the wall studs. Secure these points with 2 1/2 inch screws, making sure each screw firmly hits a stud for maximum stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jFBAzFNwiM4 58 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10159-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NcQ4hagFWcs/hqdefault.jpg Assemble pipe frame — Pipe Shelf Begin assembling the pipe structure for the shelf. Start by connecting the pipes and fittings to form the desired shape and size of the shelf supports. This often involves screwing pipes into threaded fittings, ensuring a snug fit. The video shows the assembly of two main pipe sections that will connect to the wooden shelf. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NcQ4hagFWcs 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10159-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7tXYlUMkgY4/hqdefault.jpg Assemble First Pipe Support — Pipe Shelf Start by assembling one end of the black pipe structure. Thread one of the 1-inch nipples into a floor flange. Then, thread one of the 90-degree elbows onto the other end of the nipple. This forms the first support bracket for the main pipe. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7tXYlUMkgY4 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10159-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7tXYlUMkgY4/hqdefault.jpg Assemble Other Pipe Support — Pipe Shelf Now, attach the main 6-foot black pipe to the first assembled support by threading it into the 90-degree elbow. Then, repeat the assembly process from Step 3 for the other end: thread the second 1-inch nipple into the remaining flange, and then thread the nipple into the other end of the 6-foot black pipe. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7tXYlUMkgY4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10160-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NMMpnTeaosU/hqdefault.jpg Gather and Prepare Wood — Pipe Shelf Begin by gathering an assortment of wooden planks, ideally reclaimed wood such as pallet wood, which often has character and is a cost-effective choice. Carefully inspect each plank for any loose nails or splinters and remove them. To achieve a smooth surface, clamp the planks securely together in pairs or individually and sand them thoroughly using various grits of sandpaper, starting with a coarser grit (e.g., P100) to remove rough spots and progressing to a finer grit (e.g., P120) for a smoother finish. This preparation is crucial for a professional look and feel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NMMpnTeaosU 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10160-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/G3TgqozKu6A/hqdefault.jpg Gather Materials and Sand Boards — Pipe Shelf Begin by gathering the necessary wood planks. The initial plan was to use three 8-foot planks left over from a fence and a piece of cedar leftover from a table project. However, the cedar piece was later swapped for another 8-foot cedar plank due to color preference. Once the planks are gathered, sand them thoroughly, focusing on the outside surfaces to achieve a smooth finish. The inside surfaces do not require sanding as they will not be visible. https://www.youtube.com/embed/G3TgqozKu6A 39 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10160-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GEfP1TlwUyw/hqdefault.jpg Sand Wood Pieces — Pipe Shelf Once the wood pieces are cut, place them on saw horses. Use a palm sander to smooth all four sides of each wood piece. While it doesn't need to be perfectly smooth, aim to remove any rough edges and splinters for a comfortable and aesthetically pleasing finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GEfP1TlwUyw 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10152-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Carpet Stair Treads Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10152-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Smooth Stairs — Carpet Stair Treads Before starting the installation, ensure that the existing stairs are thoroughly cleaned and smoothed. Use a broom to remove any dust, debris, or loose particles from the risers and treads. A clean and smooth surface is essential for proper adhesion and a professional finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10152-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3oCZGCgDRZE/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Carpet Stair Treads Prepare a cleaning solution by pouring concentrated sugar soap into a basin or bucket of water. Wearing rubber gloves, immerse a cleaning cloth or sponge into the solution and thoroughly wipe down all sanded stair surfaces. This step removes any remaining dust, dirt, or grease, ensuring optimal adhesion for the paint. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3oCZGCgDRZE 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10153-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GVgCcuwyOEE/hqdefault.jpg Final Curing and Caulking — Carpet Stair Treads Once the entire staircase installation is complete, it's important to allow the adhesive to fully set. Try to limit the use of the stairs for several hours (the video animation suggests around 4-8 hours) to ensure the vinyl bonds securely to the stairs. Depending on the accuracy of your cuts and the desired final aesthetic, you may choose to apply caulking, such as DAP Alex Plus acrylic latex caulk plus silicone, along the sides where the vinyl meets the stringers or walls. This will cover any minor imperfections or gaps, providing a clean and finished look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GVgCcuwyOEE 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10153-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Project Completion — Carpet Stair Treads Once all installation steps are complete, including securing risers, treads, and optional return trim, and after allowing the adhesive to fully dry (typically 24 to 48 hours), your beautiful new stairs are ready to use. Enjoy your newly updated staircase for years to come! https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10153-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Complete Installation and Caulk Gaps — Carpet Stair Treads Continue installing the remaining risers and treads by repeating the process outlined in the previous two steps, working your way up the staircase. Ensure each riser is adhered with polyurethane adhesive and secured with finish nails. Similarly, each tread should be dry-fitted, coated with adhesive (perimeter and zigzag), placed with expansion gaps, and nailed at the back edge. Once all risers and treads are installed, clean the stairs thoroughly. Then, use caulk or clear silicone with a caulking gun to fill in all the 1/16 inch expansion gaps for a seamless and finished look. After completion, it's crucial to stay off the stairs for 24 to 48 hours to allow sufficient time for the construction adhesive to fully dry and cure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10154-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZrWNkbh5j4M/hqdefault.jpg Secure Treads to Stairs — Carpet Stair Treads To install the prepared carpet tread, first ensure your alignment is correct. You can use a laser level to project a straight line from the wall across the stair, or simply use a tape measure to ensure consistent spacing from the wall for each tread. Once aligned, carefully place the tread onto the stair, ensuring the adhesive side makes contact with the hardwood. Apply firm pressure across the entire surface of the tread, using your feet or a specialized roller tool, to ensure the double-sided tape adheres completely and securely to the stair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZrWNkbh5j4M 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10154-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10154-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Carpet Stair Treads Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10156-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — Carpet Stair Treads Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10156-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Carpet Stair Treads With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10156-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10157-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Carpet Stair Treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10157-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads with Template Tool — Carpet Stair Treads Utilize a specialized stair measuring tool, often referred to as a stair jig or tread template tool, to accurately capture the exact length and precise angles of each individual stair tread. Carefully adjust the tool to fit snugly against the walls and any existing nosing, ensuring that it provides a perfect, custom template for the laminate cut that will follow. This step is critical for ensuring a seamless and gap-free fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10157-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Carpet Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10155-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — Carpet Stair Treads Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10155-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kYgqr16we1A/hqdefault.jpg Cut Carpet to Size — Carpet Stair Treads Unroll the carpet onto a flat surface to prepare for cutting. Measure the width of your staircase accurately. The video suggests cutting the carpet 'half an inch wider than my staircase' to allow for tucking and a snug fit. Use a marker and a long, straight edge (like a large ruler or T-square) to draw a straight line along the carpet's backing. Carefully cut along this line using a sharp utility knife, ensuring a clean and precise cut. For long cuts, it might be helpful to use weights, such as dumbbells, to hold the carpet and straight edge in place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kYgqr16we1A 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10155-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hBQ9-Oz5oFc/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Pieces — Carpet Stair Treads Based on the stair measurements, lay out the carpet and carefully cut it into individual pieces for each tread and riser. It's often recommended to cut the carpet slightly larger than the exact dimensions to allow for adjustments and trimming. Use a metal straight edge to guide a sharp utility knife for precise, straight cuts through the carpet backing. Ensure the carpet pile direction is consistent for all stair pieces. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hBQ9-Oz5oFc 70 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10138-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JfjZVklO-5Y/hqdefault.jpg Removing Old Caulk — Bathtub Caulking Before applying new caulk, all existing caulk must be thoroughly removed. Begin by manually pulling off any large, already detached sections of old caulk. For caulk still adhered to the surface, you can score it with a utility knife to break its seal. A sharp painter's tool can then be used to scrape and break up the connection between the caulk and the surface. For areas that are difficult to clean, a specialized caulk remover tool can be effective, especially on hard surfaces like ceramic or porcelain tile. If removing caulk from softer surfaces like acrylic tubs, be extremely careful not to scratch or damage them; a plastic caulk remover tool might be safer. For stubborn residue, you can use isopropyl alcohol (91% or higher) applied with a spray bottle and wiped with a sponge, allowing it to sit for a few seconds first. Vinegar is another common household substance that can help loosen caulk. Some specialized chemical caulk removers like 'Goo Gone Caulk Remover' are also available, but carefully read their labels as some can damage acrylic surfaces. WD-40 is not recommended as it leaves a lubricant residue that prevents new caulk from adhering properly. A heat gun can also be used to soften caulk, making it easier to scrape, but use caution to avoid heat damage to surrounding materials. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JfjZVklO-5Y 206 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10138-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_WGLMgLwRcM/hqdefault.jpg Scrape and Remove the Caulk — Bathtub Caulking Using a plastic putty knife, begin scraping and pulling out the old caulk that was just cut. The plastic putty knife is effective and won't scratch the surfaces. Work your way along the entire joint, digging out as much of the old caulk as possible. You may need to alternate between the putty knife and the utility knife to remove all the pieces. Place a rag over the drain to catch the debris. The goal is to create a clean, open gap for the new caulk to adhere to. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_WGLMgLwRcM 97 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10138-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_WGLMgLwRcM/hqdefault.jpg Scrape and Remove the Caulk — Bathtub Caulking Using a plastic putty knife, begin scraping and pulling out the old caulk that was just cut. The plastic putty knife is effective and won't scratch the surfaces. Work your way along the entire joint, digging out as much of the old caulk as possible. You may need to alternate between the putty knife and the utility knife to remove all the pieces. Place a rag over the drain to catch the debris. The goal is to create a clean, open gap for the new caulk to adhere to. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_WGLMgLwRcM 97 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10141-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0Nc9BOpCFl4/hqdefault.jpg Cure Caulk and Final Review — Bathtub Caulking After successfully applying and smoothing the caulk, it is crucial to allow it to cure completely. The presenter recommends a minimum of 12 hours before using the shower or bathtub. This curing time ensures that the silicone forms a strong, durable, and waterproof seal. Once cured, your shower will look much cleaner and be protected from water damage and mold. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0Nc9BOpCFl4 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10141-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wOAhQSN9-VA/hqdefault.jpg Allow Sealant to Cure — Bathtub Caulking Once the silicone sealant has been applied and smoothed, it is essential to allow it to cure fully before exposing it to water. The manufacturer recommends leaving the silicone to dry for approximately 24 hours before using the shower. This curing period ensures the sealant achieves its maximum strength, adhesion, and waterproofing properties. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wOAhQSN9-VA 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10141-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bpmKZypfo_Q/hqdefault.jpg Cure caulk — Bathtub Caulking Allow the applied caulk to cure for a full 24 hours before using the shower. This ensures the caulk has properly hardened and will form a durable, watertight seal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bpmKZypfo_Q 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10142-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Pg9-SNpBMkw/hqdefault.jpg Mask the Caulking Area with Tape — Bathtub Caulking This step is optional but highly recommended for a professional-looking result. Apply painter's tape along the top and bottom edges of where the caulk bead will be, leaving a gap of approximately 2-4 millimeters (about 0.08-0.16 inches) for the caulk. This creates a guide, ensuring a perfectly straight line for your caulk application. Carefully press down the tape to ensure it adheres firmly to the surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Pg9-SNpBMkw 118 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10142-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xXXMbbcHoGw/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Area with Painter's Tape — Bathtub Caulking Begin by applying painter's tape to define the caulk lines. Place one strip of painter's tape along the tub or floor edge and another strip along the wall, leaving a consistent, small gap between them where the caulk will be applied. This creates a clean, straight line for your caulk bead. For easier removal, slightly fold over a small end piece of the tape on one side, making it easier to grab later. The video demonstrates applying tape to both surfaces (floor and wall) bordering the joint. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xXXMbbcHoGw 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10142-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B-ZYP7C5HWI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Painter's Tape — Bathtub Caulking To achieve a perfectly straight and clean caulk line, apply painter's masking tape along both sides of the joint where the caulk will be applied. Position the tape precisely to define the width and edges of your desired caulk bead. This will act as a guide and prevent excess caulk from adhering to surrounding surfaces, making cleanup much easier. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B-ZYP7C5HWI 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10143-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AcgErpZ_D0c/hqdefault.jpg Apply New Caulk — Bathtub Caulking Position the caulk gun at the start of the joint. Keep the gun relatively level and apply steady, consistent pressure to the trigger. As the caulk begins to flow, move the gun smoothly along the joint, filling the gap between the tape lines. Maintain a constant speed to ensure an even bead of caulk. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AcgErpZ_D0c 92 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10143-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AcgErpZ_D0c/hqdefault.jpg Apply New Caulk — Bathtub Caulking Position the caulk gun at the start of the joint. Keep the gun relatively level and apply steady, consistent pressure to the trigger. As the caulk begins to flow, move the gun smoothly along the joint, filling the gap between the tape lines. Maintain a constant speed to ensure an even bead of caulk. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AcgErpZ_D0c 92 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10143-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7sLSy7A1GYs/hqdefault.jpg Apply New Caulk — Bathtub Caulking Position the tip of the caulk gun in the corner of the joint. Apply steady, consistent pressure to the trigger while moving the gun smoothly along the seam. The goal is to lay down a continuous and uniform bead of caulk that adequately fills the gap. Avoid applying too much caulk, as this will result in a messy and difficult smoothing process. If you notice a spot is too thin, it is easier to add a little more caulk later than to clean up an excessive amount. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7sLSy7A1GYs 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10145-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tMyQ4fS9s_g/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Caulk Tube — Bathtub Caulking Using a utility knife, carefully slice off the very tip of the threaded end of the silicone caulk tube. Next, take the plastic applicator nozzle and cut its tip off at a slight angle. The size of the opening should match the size of the gap you intend to fill. Creating a small opening provides better control over the bead of caulk. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tMyQ4fS9s_g 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10145-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tMyQ4fS9s_g/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Caulk Tube — Bathtub Caulking Using a utility knife, carefully slice off the very tip of the threaded end of the silicone caulk tube. Next, take the plastic applicator nozzle and cut its tip off at a slight angle. The size of the opening should match the size of the gap you intend to fill. Creating a small opening provides better control over the bead of caulk. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tMyQ4fS9s_g 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10145-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hNphNEVd0Ko/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Caulk Tube Nozzle — Bathtub Caulking Prepare the caulk tube by cutting its opening. Use a utility knife to cut the nozzle at a 45-degree angle. Make sure the opening is small to allow for a thin, controlled bead of caulk. After cutting the angle, 'square off' the top of the nozzle with the knife to create a flat, 'shoe-like' shape. This specialized cut helps guide the caulk and makes smoothing easier during application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hNphNEVd0Ko 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10144-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Pg9-SNpBMkw/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Dry the Surface Thoroughly — Bathtub Caulking Once all old caulk is removed, the area must be completely clean and dry. Use a barely damp sponge and rub it along the perimeter of the bathtub/shower, going back and forth a few times to remove any residual particles. Next, take a clean towel and thoroughly dry the entire area, ensuring no water is left. This ensures optimal adhesion for the new caulk. As a final step, use a vacuum cleaner with a nozzle attachment to suck up any lingering dust or small particles along the seam, leaving the surface perfectly smooth and clean. You should feel no bumps when running your finger along the tile or bathtub. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Pg9-SNpBMkw 106 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10144-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B-ZYP7C5HWI/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Caulk and Clean Surface — Bathtub Caulking Begin by assessing the area where the tub meets the wall for any old, cracked, or stained caulk. Using a utility knife or a scraper, carefully cut and scrape away all existing caulk or sealant from the joint. Be cautious to avoid scratching the tub or wall surfaces. Once the old caulk is mostly removed, pull out any loose pieces. Then, thoroughly clean the entire area with water and a disinfectant to eliminate dirt, grime, mold, or mildew. Rinse well and wipe off excess water. For a final cleaning step, wipe the seam with rubbing alcohol to remove any remaining residue or film, ensuring the surface is perfectly clean and dry for optimal caulk adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B-ZYP7C5HWI 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10144-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OTnsdUmKzIY/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Prepare the Surface — Bathtub Caulking After removing the old caulk, clean the area thoroughly. Use water and a disinfectant to scrub away any dirt, grime, mold, or mildew. Rinse the area well to remove cleaning solution residue and wipe off any excess water. As a final cleaning step, wipe the seam or joint with rubbing alcohol to eliminate any remaining residue or film. It is crucial for the area to be completely clean and dry to ensure proper adhesion of the new caulk. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OTnsdUmKzIY 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10139-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Vs5kpPqoIts/hqdefault.jpg Smoothing the Caulk Bead — Bathtub Caulking Immediately after applying the caulk, smooth the bead. You can use a damp paper towel wrapped around your fingertip, or simply your wet finger. Gently run your finger along the fresh caulk bead, applying light pressure. This process, known as 'tooling', pushes the caulk into the joint to create a proper seal and removes excess caulk, leaving a smooth, concave, professional-looking finish. Wipe the excess caulk from your finger onto a separate paper towel as you go. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Vs5kpPqoIts 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10139-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AcgErpZ_D0c/hqdefault.jpg Smooth the Caulk Bead — Bathtub Caulking Immediately after applying the caulk, smooth the bead. Lightly wet your finger and run it along the caulk line with gentle, consistent pressure. This process, called 'tooling,' pushes the caulk firmly into the joint for a good seal and creates a smooth, concave finish. Wipe any excess caulk from your finger onto a clean rag as you go. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AcgErpZ_D0c 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10139-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AcgErpZ_D0c/hqdefault.jpg Smooth the Caulk Bead — Bathtub Caulking Immediately after applying the caulk, smooth the bead. Lightly wet your finger and run it along the caulk line with gentle, consistent pressure. This process, called 'tooling,' pushes the caulk firmly into the joint for a good seal and creates a smooth, concave finish. Wipe any excess caulk from your finger onto a clean rag as you go. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AcgErpZ_D0c 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10140-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8tdp0lLfCw/hqdefault.jpg Remove Painter's Tape — Bathtub Caulking While the caulk is still wet, carefully remove the painter's tape. Start at one end and pull the tape slowly and steadily, at a 45-degree angle away from the fresh caulk line. This will create a sharp, clean edge. If you wait for the caulk to dry, removing the tape can pull the caulk out of the joint, ruining your work. Remove both strips of tape to reveal your perfectly finished, professional-looking caulk bead. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8tdp0lLfCw 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10140-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8tdp0lLfCw/hqdefault.jpg Remove Painter's Tape — Bathtub Caulking While the caulk is still wet, carefully remove the painter's tape. Start at one end and pull the tape slowly and steadily, at a 45-degree angle away from the fresh caulk line. This will create a sharp, clean edge. If you wait for the caulk to dry, removing the tape can pull the caulk out of the joint, ruining your work. Remove both strips of tape to reveal your perfectly finished, professional-looking caulk bead. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8tdp0lLfCw 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10140-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B-ZYP7C5HWI/hqdefault.jpg Remove Painter's Tape — Bathtub Caulking If you used painter's masking tape in step 2, remove it immediately after smoothing the caulk and before the caulk begins to dry or skin over. To remove, lift one edge of the tape and pull it away from the sealed joint at a 45-degree angle. Pull slowly and steadily to avoid disturbing the newly applied caulk bead and ensure a crisp, clean line. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B-ZYP7C5HWI 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10107-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/E6umQQYvOqQ/hqdefault.jpg Apply Joint Compound — Drywall Patch Joint compound is applied over the patch and surrounding area to fill gaps and blend the repair with the existing wall. A putty knife is used to spread the compound smoothly. Multiple coats may be needed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/E6umQQYvOqQ 63 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10107-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9DKCzroGdV8/hqdefault.jpg First Coat Application — Drywall Patch Apply a thin layer of joint compound over the patch using a 6 inch taping knife, smoothing it out to create a smooth, even surface. Overlap the surrounding area slightly to blend it with the existing wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9DKCzroGdV8 107 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10107-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZMfLAEw4ZUw/hqdefault.jpg Drywall Compound Application — Drywall Patch Using a putty knife, apply a generous layer of drywall compound over the patch, ensuring that it completely covers the mesh. Spread the compound evenly, feathering the edges to blend with the surrounding wall surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZMfLAEw4ZUw 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10112-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DXqkab97mTg/hqdefault.jpg Apply Final Primer Coat — Drywall Patch Apply a final coat of primer/sealer over the entire repaired area, extending slightly beyond the edges of the joint compound. This ensures uniform porosity and color, providing an ideal base for the final paint coat. Allow the primer to dry completely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DXqkab97mTg 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10112-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RcbEMGciilI/hqdefault.jpg Apply a Coat of Primer — Drywall Patch Apply a coat of primer over the entire repaired area. This step is vital to ensure that the paint adheres well to the newly patched surface and that the final painted finish appears even and consistent with the rest of the wall. Allow the primer to dry completely according to the manufacturer's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RcbEMGciilI 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10112-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7iHTs5U7CXI/hqdefault.jpg Prime the Repaired Area — Drywall Patch After ensuring the patched area is completely smooth and free of dust, apply a coat of primer, sealer, and undercoat. The video suggests using "Dulux 1 Step Prep Primer, Sealer & Undercoat." Apply the primer evenly over the entire patched area and extend it slightly onto the surrounding wall. This step is essential to seal the porous plasterboard and ensure that the topcoat of paint adheres properly and has a uniform finish, preventing flash marks or differences in sheen. Allow the primer to dry completely according to the product's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7iHTs5U7CXI 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10113-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YU1z2y11KZY/hqdefault.jpg Apply Paint to the Repaired Area — Drywall Patch After the primer has dried completely, apply the final paint coats. Pour the wall paint (matching the existing wall color) into a clean paint tray. First, use a paintbrush to carefully 'cut in' along the edges where the wall meets the cabinets or trim. Then, use a small roller to apply the paint to the main patched area, again starting in the middle and feathering out to blend seamlessly with the surrounding wall. Apply a second coat of paint if necessary, following the same cutting-in and rolling technique, to ensure complete coverage and a uniform finish. The goal is to make the repaired crack completely disappear. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YU1z2y11KZY 69 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10113-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nBeDa3OWzN8/hqdefault.jpg Paint Repaired Area — Drywall Patch After the primer has dried completely, take a small paint roller and apply paint to the primed areas. Make sure to use paint that matches the existing wall color. Apply the paint in a way that blends the repaired spots with the rest of the wall, ensuring seamless coverage. You may need to apply a second coat if necessary, allowing adequate drying time between coats. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nBeDa3OWzN8 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10113-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7iHTs5U7CXI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Topcoat Paint — Drywall Patch Once the primer is completely dry, apply the final topcoat of paint. Use paint that matches the color and finish of the existing wall. Apply the paint evenly over the primed patch, extending slightly beyond its edges to blend seamlessly with the surrounding wall. Depending on the paint and desired coverage, you may need to apply two coats, allowing adequate drying time between each. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7iHTs5U7CXI 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10108-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N_YTNoLKnqs/hqdefault.jpg Drying — Drywall Patch Let the joint compound dry completely (overnight or use a hair dryer). https://www.youtube.com/embed/N_YTNoLKnqs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10108-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N_YTNoLKnqs/hqdefault.jpg Drying — Drywall Patch Let the joint compound dry completely (overnight or use a hair dryer). https://www.youtube.com/embed/N_YTNoLKnqs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10108-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N_YTNoLKnqs/hqdefault.jpg Drying — Drywall Patch Let the joint compound dry completely (overnight or use a hair dryer). https://www.youtube.com/embed/N_YTNoLKnqs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10106-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c85wcsn4nf4/hqdefault.jpg Apply Drywall Patch — Drywall Patch Unpack the drywall repair patch, revealing the metal mesh on one side and a sticky backing on the other. Carefully peel off the protective paper from the sticky side of the patch. Position the patch directly over the hole in the drywall, ensuring it completely covers the damaged area. Apply gentle pressure from the center of the patch outwards towards the edges to adhere it securely to the wall and prevent any wrinkles from forming. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c85wcsn4nf4 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10106-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qvRzqNuJk9E/hqdefault.jpg Apply the Wall Patch — Drywall Patch Now, proceed with applying the self-adhesive patch. If necessary, use a pair of scissors to cut the self-adhesive wall patch to an appropriate size. The patch should be large enough to completely cover the hole with an overlap. Position the patch directly over the hole on the wall, ensuring there's an overlap of at least 3 centimeters (approximately 1.2 inches) between the edge of the hole and the edge of the patch. Remove the protective backing from the patch and firmly press it down onto the wall, paying special attention to the edges to ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qvRzqNuJk9E 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10106-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PzII-9lHoQw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Mesh Patch — Drywall Patch Select a self-adhesive drywall mesh patch that is slightly larger than the hole. Peel back the adhesive backing and carefully apply the patch to the hole, ensuring it adheres firmly to the drywall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PzII-9lHoQw 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10111-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/d8R4t_e-Bqg/hqdefault.jpg Second Compound Coat — Drywall Patch Once the first coat is dry, apply a second coat of joint compound and feather the edges to create a smooth transition with the surrounding wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/d8R4t_e-Bqg 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10111-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/d8R4t_e-Bqg/hqdefault.jpg Second Compound Coat — Drywall Patch Once the first coat is dry, apply a second coat of joint compound and feather the edges to create a smooth transition with the surrounding wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/d8R4t_e-Bqg 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10111-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DXqkab97mTg/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Clean Second Coat of Joint Compound — Drywall Patch After the second coat of joint compound has thoroughly dried, sand the area again with sandpaper (e.g., 120-grit or a finer grit for a smoother finish) until it is perfectly smooth and level with the surrounding wall. Once sanded, wipe away all dust using a damp rag. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DXqkab97mTg 29 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10110-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XFq19HhCnPo/hqdefault.jpg Second Coat — Drywall Patch Apply a second layer of joint compound over the patched areas and smooth using a putty knife. This second layer helps to ensure a smooth and even finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XFq19HhCnPo 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10110-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GRzbOO5Sc_Y/hqdefault.jpg Apply Skim Coat — Drywall Patch Apply a second, thinner coat of joint compound over the entire repair area. Use a wider taping knife (e.g., 10 or 12-inch) for this step. Apply the mud and then, with long, smooth strokes, skim off the excess, feathering the edges well beyond the original patch. This creates a seamless transition between the patch and the existing wall surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GRzbOO5Sc_Y 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10110-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dWq18CGF6OE/hqdefault.jpg Second Coat and Smoothing — Drywall Patch Using the putty knife, apply a second coat of joint compound over the patch, feathering the edges out to blend with the surrounding wall. Use the hawk to support your work. Smooth the joint compound until the patch is completely covered and the surface is relatively smooth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dWq18CGF6OE 60 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10109-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/r9azmWhZ5PU/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Finish — Drywall Patch Once the final coat of joint compound is completely dry, gently sand the patched area using 120-grit sandpaper. The goal is to create a perfectly smooth surface that is flush with the surrounding wall. After sanding, wipe away any dust with a damp cloth. The wall is now ready for priming and painting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/r9azmWhZ5PU 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10109-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DXqkab97mTg/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Clean Second Coat of Joint Compound — Drywall Patch After the second coat of joint compound has thoroughly dried, sand the area again with sandpaper (e.g., 120-grit or a finer grit for a smoother finish) until it is perfectly smooth and level with the surrounding wall. Once sanded, wipe away all dust using a damp rag. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DXqkab97mTg 29 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10109-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tROm2mI3cKo/hqdefault.jpg Sand the Drywall Repair — Drywall Patch Once all coats of joint compound are thoroughly dry, sand the repair area. For the main flat surfaces, use a power sander (like a dust-free drywall sander) to efficiently remove lap marks and achieve a general smoothness. For the edges and corners, use a sanding sponge. The key is to tilt the sponge and apply most of the pressure on the outer edge, feathering it out to prevent creating a sharp ridge or gouge in the finish. The goal is to achieve a gentle, rounded hump with perfectly feathered edges that seamlessly blend into the surrounding wall. After sanding, clean up any dust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tROm2mI3cKo 3102 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10105-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-ozbe2W_xvo/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Damaged Surface — Drywall Patch First, use a 6-in-1 painter's tool to carefully scrape away all loose and torn drywall paper from the damaged area. It is crucial to remove any unstable paper, as neglecting this step will cause the repair to fail and the paper to come off eventually, ruining the work. The goal is to create a clean, stable edge around the damaged section, preparing the surface for subsequent repairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-ozbe2W_xvo 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10105-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/czkWV6BvoS0/hqdefault.jpg Surface Preparation — Drywall Patch Use a putty knife or sandpaper to remove any loose pieces of paint or drywall around the damaged area. This ensures that the spackle adheres properly and creates a smooth finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/czkWV6BvoS0 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10105-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/czkWV6BvoS0/hqdefault.jpg Surface Preparation — Drywall Patch Use a putty knife or sandpaper to remove any loose pieces of paint or drywall around the damaged area. This ensures that the spackle adheres properly and creates a smooth finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/czkWV6BvoS0 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10100-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-dGmgGFVDwA/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Hinge from Door and Select New Hinge — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Place the detached cabinet door on a stable, flat surface like a table. Carefully remove the screws attaching the old hinge to the cabinet door itself using the cordless drill. The presenter stresses the importance of matching the new hinge to the old one, noting that there are many different types of hinges available. In this case, the hinge is an overlay style. Fortunately, he had spare hinges from a previous project that matched perfectly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-dGmgGFVDwA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10100-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RJDgIPKiEig/hqdefault.jpg Remove Hinge from Door — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement If you need to completely separate the hinge from the cabinet door (e.g., for painting the door or replacing the hinge itself), observe how the hinge is attached to the door. For 'Blum Inserta' type hinges, which are often tool-free, simply open the little 'flappy door part' or cover on the hinge cup that's embedded in the door. This will release the hinge from the door. For other types, there will typically be two screws holding the hinge cup to the door. Use a screwdriver to remove these screws. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RJDgIPKiEig 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10100-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lJYFNvL8HZk/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Hinge — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Using a drill equipped with a Phillips head drill bit, proceed to remove all the screws from one of the old door hinges. Work carefully to avoid stripping the screw heads. Once all screws are removed, the hinge might still be stuck due to paint or being tightly set. If so, gently tap the hinge from the backside with a hammer to loosen it, then remove the hinge completely from its mortise. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lJYFNvL8HZk 54 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10099-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DSS4zgma6gw/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Cabinet Door — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Once both screws on each hinge arm are sufficiently loosened, carefully slide the cabinet door upwards and outwards from the cabinet frame. The loosened screws allow the hinge arms to detach from their mounting plates, enabling the smooth removal of the door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DSS4zgma6gw 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10099-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/byqD9OR1Plk/hqdefault.jpg Remove Cabinet Door — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement To remove a cabinet door, first open the door completely to access the hinge mechanism. Locate the push clip, which is typically found at the back of the door hinge. Firmly push this clip inward, away from the cabinet frame. Once the clip is disengaged, gently pull the entire hinge mechanism outward from its mounting plate on the cabinet. Be ready to support the door as soon as the hinge is released to prevent it from falling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/byqD9OR1Plk 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10099-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lKiZ3pa4vAg/hqdefault.jpg Remove Cabinet Door — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Repeat the previous step for all remaining hinges on the cabinet door. Once every hinge is released from its mounting plate, you can carefully lift and remove the entire cabinet door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lKiZ3pa4vAg 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10101-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KJc8Q2mT95Q/hqdefault.jpg Unpack New Hinges — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Once the old hinges are removed, it's time to prepare the new ones for installation. Open the packaging of the new hinges, which in the video are "GATE HOUSE" brand 3 1/2-inch door hinges. Carefully remove the hinges and the accompanying screws. Take a moment to inspect the new hinges for any manufacturing defects or damage and ensure all screws are present. This step ensures that you have the correct and complete set of hardware before proceeding with the installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KJc8Q2mT95Q 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10101-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lJYFNvL8HZk/hqdefault.jpg Orient New Hinge for Installation — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Before installing the new hinge, examine its construction. Hinges typically have a pin that connects the two leaves, with one end often capped (the 'top') and the other end flush or showing a hole. Ensure you install the hinge with the top of the pin pointing upward. Crucially, test the hinge's closure direction: it should only fold completely in one direction. Orient the hinge so that this 'closed' direction allows the door to shut fully. Installing it incorrectly will cause the door to stop short and not close properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lJYFNvL8HZk 53 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10101-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-dGmgGFVDwA/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Hinge from Door and Select New Hinge — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Place the detached cabinet door on a stable, flat surface like a table. Carefully remove the screws attaching the old hinge to the cabinet door itself using the cordless drill. The presenter stresses the importance of matching the new hinge to the old one, noting that there are many different types of hinges available. In this case, the hinge is an overlay style. Fortunately, he had spare hinges from a previous project that matched perfectly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-dGmgGFVDwA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10102-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/glmF-9MqqCU/hqdefault.jpg Install New Hinge on Cabinet Door — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Take one of your new soft-close hinges. Position it on the cabinet door where the old hinge was, ensuring it sits correctly within the pre-drilled cup hole. Secure the hinge to the door using one of the appropriate screws (often a Phillips head) but do not tighten it completely. Then, insert and partially tighten the second screw into the other designated hole on the hinge. Once both screws are in place, you can fully tighten them. Remember to continue supporting the cabinet door if it only has two hinges to prevent any accidental movement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/glmF-9MqqCU 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10102-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xJRTWQokaSI/hqdefault.jpg Attach New Hinges to Door — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Using a Phillips head screwdriver, carefully hand-tighten the smaller screws (intended for the door) into the pilot holes to attach the new hinges to the cabinet door. It is highly recommended to avoid using a cordless drill for this step, as it can easily strip the pilot holes or damage the wood, leading to a longer and more complex repair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xJRTWQokaSI 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10102-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5x4YPIY1Nd0/hqdefault.jpg Attach Hinges to New Doors — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Now, proceed to fix the new standard concealed type hinges to your new cabinet doors. Each hinge is designed with a specific round part that should be pushed into the corresponding circular recess pre-drilled in the door. These parts are typically designed to fit in only one orientation. Once the hinge is correctly seated in its recess, secure it firmly to the door using the screws that are provided with the hinges. If you find it difficult to start the screws or want to prevent splitting the wood, you can use a bradawl to create a small pilot hole before driving in each screw. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5x4YPIY1Nd0 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10103-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-dGmgGFVDwA/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Cabinet Door to Frame — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement Carefully align the cabinet door with the cabinet frame, positioning the newly installed hinge to match the screw holes on the frame. Start by driving one screw into the top hinge, then one into the bottom hinge, to temporarily hold the door in place. Once the door is roughly aligned, insert and tighten the remaining screws into both hinges, ensuring the door is properly seated and operates smoothly. It's helpful to have a second person assist with holding the door for this step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-dGmgGFVDwA 68 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10103-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DSS4zgma6gw/hqdefault.jpg Reattach the Cabinet Door — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement To reattach the cabinet door, align the hinge arms with the slots on their respective mounting plates on the cabinet frame. Carefully slide the hinge arms downwards until they are securely seated in the plates. Ensure both hinges are properly engaged before proceeding to tighten the screws. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DSS4zgma6gw 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10103-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/glmF-9MqqCU/hqdefault.jpg Install New Hinge on Cabinet Frame — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement With the hinge attached to the door, position the door so that the hinge plate aligns with the existing screw holes on the cabinet's side wall. Insert the first screw into one of the aligned holes, but do not fully tighten it yet. This allows for slight adjustments. Then, insert and partially tighten the second screw into the remaining hole. Once both screws are in place, fully tighten them, ensuring the hinge is securely fastened to the cabinet. If the holes do not align, or if they are stripped, refer to the 'Alternative Installation for New Holes' step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/glmF-9MqqCU 56 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10104-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RJDgIPKiEig/hqdefault.jpg Perform Final Check and Adjustment — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement After re-attaching all hinges, perform a final check of the cabinet door. Ensure that it lines up perfectly with adjacent cupboards or drawers, avoiding any gaps or overlaps. Test the door by opening and shutting it several times to confirm smooth operation. If the door doesn't align correctly or doesn't open/close well, minor adjustments can be made using the adjustment screws on the hinge (for screw-release types) or by slightly repositioning quick-release hinges if they allow for it. The goal is a seamless fit and effortless function. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RJDgIPKiEig 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10104-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/glmF-9MqqCU/hqdefault.jpg Adjust Hinges for Proper Alignment — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement After the new hinge is securely installed, you'll likely need to make adjustments to ensure the cabinet door aligns perfectly with the cabinetry and any adjacent doors. Modern soft-close hinges typically have three adjustment screws: 1. The screw indicated by the presenter, often located towards the front of the hinge, adjusts the door 'in or out' from the cabinet. 2. A second screw, usually part of the mounting plate, moves the door 'up or down' by raising or lowering the plate. 3. A third screw, typically located horizontally on the hinge, moves the door 'horizontally' across the face of the cabinet. Use a screwdriver to turn these screws incrementally, testing the door alignment after each adjustment until it sits flush and operates smoothly. The video demonstrates horizontal adjustment, noting that for a two-door cabinet, this helps align them to the center. https://www.youtube.com/embed/glmF-9MqqCU 53 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10104-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NENDZGTFoWI/hqdefault.jpg Final Inspection and Secure Hinges — Cabinet Door Hinge Replacement After completing all three adjustments—horizontal, depth, and vertical—close the cabinet door and visually inspect it. Check the gaps around the door, ensuring they are consistent and that the door aligns perfectly with any adjacent doors. Confirm that the door opens and closes smoothly without rubbing and that it sits flush against the cabinet carcass when closed. Once satisfied with the alignment, double-check that all hinge screws are tightened securely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NENDZGTFoWI 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10093-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-Ojo7ObonCc/hqdefault.jpg Inspect the Flapper and Chain — Running Toilet Repair Remove the lid from the toilet tank and visually inspect the components. Check the chain that connects the flush handle lever to the flapper. If the chain is too tight, it can prevent the flapper from sealing. If it's too loose, it may get caught under the flapper. Also, inspect the flapper itself. Lift it and check for any signs of warping, brittleness, or damage that would prevent it from creating a watertight seal over the flush valve opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-Ojo7ObonCc 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10093-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-Ojo7ObonCc/hqdefault.jpg Inspect the Flapper and Chain — Running Toilet Repair Remove the lid from the toilet tank and visually inspect the components. Check the chain that connects the flush handle lever to the flapper. If the chain is too tight, it can prevent the flapper from sealing. If it's too loose, it may get caught under the flapper. Also, inspect the flapper itself. Lift it and check for any signs of warping, brittleness, or damage that would prevent it from creating a watertight seal over the flush valve opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-Ojo7ObonCc 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10093-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jv_j0imGHM8/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Flush Valve (Flapper) — Running Toilet Repair Another potential cause of a leak is a dirty flush valve (flapper) itself. Over time, the rubber or plastic material of the flapper can accumulate grime, mold, or mineral deposits, preventing it from seating correctly on the flush valve opening. Remove the flapper from its pivots (if applicable) or lift it to thoroughly clean both its top and bottom surfaces. Again, use a sponge with some cleaner to ensure all surfaces that come into contact with the flush valve opening are spotless. A clean flapper will create a much better seal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jv_j0imGHM8 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10094-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mzgvPAQaSs8/hqdefault.jpg Install New Flapper and Adjust Chain — Running Toilet Repair Before installing, check if your new flapper has an adjustable dial for controlling water usage and set it if necessary. Attach the new flapper by clipping its arms onto the overflow tube pegs. Connect the chain to the flush handle lever, ensuring there is about a half-inch of slack in the chain when the flapper is closed. You may need to move the clip to a different chain link to achieve the correct length. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mzgvPAQaSs8 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10094-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8TYdOXs3VIo/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Flapper and Install New One — Running Toilet Repair First, unhook the chain of the old flapper from the flush handle lever. Then, unclip the two rubber 'ears' of the flapper from the small posts on either side of the overflow pipe's base. Lift the old flapper out of the tank and discard it. Take the new flapper and clip its two ears onto the same posts on the overflow pipe. Finally, attach the new chain to an appropriate hole on the flush handle lever. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8TYdOXs3VIo 54 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10094-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LkJS-uQDXog/hqdefault.jpg Install New Flapper — Running Toilet Repair Install the new flapper into the toilet tank. First, re-attach the flapper's 'ears' or hinges onto the overflow tube at the base of the flush valve, ensuring they are securely seated. Next, connect the adjusted chain to the flush handle lever, making sure there is appropriate slack and the chain doesn't interfere with the flapper's movement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LkJS-uQDXog 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10097-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lQQ8j0dIgIs/hqdefault.jpg Clean Flush Valve Seat — Running Toilet Repair Inspect the flush valve seat where the flapper rests. If it's dirty, has mineral buildup, or debris, wipe it clean with a cloth or a paper towel. A clean valve seat ensures a tight seal with the new flapper. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lQQ8j0dIgIs 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10097-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OdyPZOKBqTU/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Inspect Flush Valve Seat — Running Toilet Repair Before installing the new flapper, inspect and clean the flush valve seat, which is the circular rim that the flapper rests on. Use your fingers or a soft cloth to wipe away any mineral deposits, rust, or debris. A smooth, clean surface is essential for the new flapper to create a watertight seal. Feel for any nicks or cracks in the plastic, as this would indicate the entire flush valve needs to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OdyPZOKBqTU 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10097-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uyCyQa8H8Pk/hqdefault.jpg Check Flush Valve and Flapper Seal — Running Toilet Repair Next, inspect the flush valve, specifically the flapper seal. Clean any debris or mineral deposits from the flapper and its seat. Check for any leaks or damage to the flapper seal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uyCyQa8H8Pk 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10096-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PF6gKvlxICA/hqdefault.jpg Adjust Fill Valve Height — Running Toilet Repair If you determined in the previous step that the water level is rising above the top of the flush valve overflow tube, the fill valve's height may be incorrect. First, confirm that the waterline mark on your fill valve is set to the same height as the toilet's manufacturer's water line. If the manufacturer's waterline isn't visible, set the waterline on the fill valve 1/2 inch below the top of the flush valve overflow tube. If the valve is currently set too high, turn off the water supply to the toilet (usually a small valve near the base of the toilet on the wall). Flush the toilet to empty the tank. If your fill valve has a tamperproof key (like the Korky QuietFill valve), remove it. Adjust the height of the fill valve by twisting the top half of the valve counter-clockwise, pushing it down until the correct water level is set, and then turning it clockwise until it snaps into the locked position. Finally, reinstall the tamperproof key if it was present, and turn the water supply back on. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PF6gKvlxICA 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10096-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SKx-ZVc0u0E/hqdefault.jpg Test the Fill Valve — Running Toilet Repair As the tank is refilling, or after it should have stopped, use your finger to gently press down on the top of the fill valve float. This action manually stops the flow of water into the tank, simulating the float reaching its highest position. Listen carefully. If the sound of running water stops when you press down on the float, it indicates that the fill valve is the source of the leak because it is not shutting off on its own. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SKx-ZVc0u0E 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10096-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yXPPsLz1MMQ/hqdefault.jpg Adjust Fill Valve Float — Running Toilet Repair If your diagnosis in the previous step indicated that lifting the fill valve arm stopped the water flow, then the fill valve float needs to be lowered. For a Fluidmaster fill valve, locate the float adjustment screw, which is typically at the top of the fill valve arm, and turn it counterclockwise for a few turns. This action will lower the float and, consequently, the water level when the tank refills. To test the new water level, gently lift the flapper by its chain to drain some water from the tank. Once the water has drained, release the flapper to allow the tank to refill. The water level should now stop filling approximately one-half to one inch (0.5"-1") below the top of the overflow pipe. If the water level is still too high, repeat this adjustment process as needed until the correct level is achieved. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yXPPsLz1MMQ 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10091-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/H5A4mGqjhH4/hqdefault.jpg Flush and Empty Toilet Tank — Running Toilet Repair Press the toilet flush lever and hold it down for 10 to 15 seconds. This action flushes the toilet and ensures that the tank completely empties of water, allowing you to work on the internal components without spillage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/H5A4mGqjhH4 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10091-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0HLD8jq9kZs/hqdefault.jpg Empty the tank — Running Toilet Repair Flush the toilet to empty the tank. Hold the lever down to ensure as much water as possible drains out. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0HLD8jq9kZs 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10091-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0HLD8jq9kZs/hqdefault.jpg Empty the tank — Running Toilet Repair Flush the toilet to empty the tank. Hold the lever down to ensure as much water as possible drains out. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0HLD8jq9kZs 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10095-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/13lBoZTifug/hqdefault.jpg Determine Leak Cause — Running Toilet Repair If you notice water constantly running into your toilet tank and overflowing into the overflow tube, the fill valve is likely the problem. If water runs intermittently but does not flow into the overflow tube, then the flapper is probably the culprit. To diagnose, remove the toilet tank lid and place it in a safe, flat location to prevent it from breaking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/13lBoZTifug 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10095-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PF6gKvlxICA/hqdefault.jpg Check Water Level Against Overflow Tube — Running Toilet Repair To begin troubleshooting, observe the water level inside your toilet tank. Determine whether the water level is rising above the top of the flush valve overflow tube. This initial observation will help diagnose if the fill valve is set too high, causing overfilling, or if there's a flapper leak allowing water to escape, causing the fill valve to activate unnecessarily. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PF6gKvlxICA 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10095-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/X0KXt_TEGIk/hqdefault.jpg Fill Valve Inspection — Running Toilet Repair Examine the fill valve, the mechanism that brings water into the tank, to check if it continues to flow water even after the tank has filled to its correct level. The float on the fill valve should rise and shut off the water supply when the tank is full. A faulty diaphragm or seal within the fill valve will prevent this shut-off, leading to water constantly flowing into the flush valve's overflow tube and into the bowl. Also, check if the refill tube from the fill valve is submerged below the water line, as this can cause siphoning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/X0KXt_TEGIk 84 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10092-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2DTNLwuigTw/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Toilet Tank Lid — Running Toilet Repair To access the internal components, carefully lift the toilet tank lid straight up. Be cautious as it is made of porcelain and can be heavy and fragile. Set the lid down gently in a safe place where it won't be broken, such as on a towel on the bathroom floor or flat on the closed toilet seat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2DTNLwuigTw 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10092-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EvCAC8Bl4wo/hqdefault.jpg Remove Toilet Tank Lid — Running Toilet Repair Carefully lift and remove the toilet tank lid. Place the lid in a safe, secure location where it won't be accidentally dropped or broken. Many plumbers have broken these lids, which can be costly and difficult to replace. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EvCAC8Bl4wo 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10092-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e3_vK2NniYw/hqdefault.jpg Remove Toilet Tank Lid — Running Toilet Repair Carefully remove the toilet tank lid. This lid is typically made of ceramic and can be heavy and fragile. Place it in a secure and safe location, away from where it might be accidentally bumped or fall, to prevent breakage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e3_vK2NniYw 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10090-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2RsnLbqcEVU/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Water Supply — Running Toilet Repair Locate the water shut-off valve, typically on the wall behind the toilet. Turn the valve handle clockwise all the way to stop the flow of water to the toilet tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2RsnLbqcEVU 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10090-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mpMjfEa5qVk/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Water Supply — Running Toilet Repair Locate the water supply shut-off valve, which is typically found on the wall or floor behind the toilet and connected by a hose to the toilet tank. Turn the valve handle clockwise until it is fully closed to stop the flow of water to the toilet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mpMjfEa5qVk 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10090-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/H5A4mGqjhH4/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Water Supply — Running Toilet Repair Locate the water supply valve connected to the toilet, usually found on the wall or floor behind the toilet. Turn the valve clockwise to completely shut off the water supply to the toilet tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/H5A4mGqjhH4 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10098-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/D5QXwNe-r1s/hqdefault.jpg Test and Adjust — Running Toilet Repair Turn the water supply back on by rotating the shut-off valve counter-clockwise. Allow the toilet tank to fill completely. Observe the water level to ensure it stops at the appropriate mark, usually indicated inside the tank or on the fill valve itself. Adjust the float on the fill valve as needed to achieve the correct water level. Finally, test the flush several times to ensure both the fill valve and flapper are working correctly, and check for any leaks. Once satisfied, place the toilet tank lid back on. https://www.youtube.com/embed/D5QXwNe-r1s 26 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10098-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZM3_Dct5f_w/hqdefault.jpg Turn on Water and Test — Running Toilet Repair Turn the water shut-off valve counter-clockwise to turn the water supply back on. Allow the tank to fill completely with water. Once the fill valve stops, listen to ensure the toilet is no longer running. Perform a test flush by pressing the handle. Observe the flapper to make sure it lifts high enough for a full flush and then settles back down to create a firm seal. If the flush is too short or long, you may need to adjust the settings on the flapper itself, if available. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZM3_Dct5f_w 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10098-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/R2-DqrJFB7c/hqdefault.jpg Restore Water and Test — Running Toilet Repair Carefully place the tank lid back onto the toilet tank. Turn the water shut-off valve counter-clockwise to restore the water supply. Allow the tank to fill completely. Once full, listen to ensure the water stops running. The repair is complete. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R2-DqrJFB7c 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10083-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/w1O60cr5e88/hqdefault.jpg Remove retaining nut or clip — Faucet Repair Once the handle is removed, you will see the faucet cartridge. There may be a retaining nut or clip holding it in place. Use adjustable pliers or a wrench to carefully unscrew the retaining nut or remove the clip to free the cartridge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/w1O60cr5e88 48 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10083-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lW4fFBY6g_s/hqdefault.jpg Remove Retaining Nut and Cartridge — Faucet Repair With the handle removed, you will see a retaining nut that holds the cartridge in place. To avoid scratching the faucet's finish, wrap a cloth or paper towel around the retaining nut. Use channel locks or an adjustable wrench to carefully unscrew and remove this retaining nut. Once the nut is off, gently pull the old cartridge straight up and out of the faucet body. Inspect the cartridge for any visible damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lW4fFBY6g_s 66 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10083-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CqIuYm_rvuA/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Retaining Nut and Cartridge — Faucet Repair With the handle removed, you will see a retaining nut (often brass or chrome) holding the cartridge in place. Use an adjustable wrench to turn this nut counter-clockwise to loosen and remove it. Once the nut is off, you can firmly grasp the stem of the old cartridge and pull it straight up and out of the faucet body. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CqIuYm_rvuA 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10084-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pyBTL7GugHo/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Cartridge — Faucet Repair Unscrew the black plastic retainer nut. Next, use a small tool or screwdriver to carefully pry up and pull out the U-shaped copper retainer clip that holds the cartridge in place. Grab the stem of the old cartridge with a pair of pliers and pull it straight out of the valve body. A dedicated cartridge puller tool may be needed if it's stuck. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pyBTL7GugHo 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10084-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pyBTL7GugHo/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Cartridge — Faucet Repair Unscrew the black plastic retainer nut. Next, use a small tool or screwdriver to carefully pry up and pull out the U-shaped copper retainer clip that holds the cartridge in place. Grab the stem of the old cartridge with a pair of pliers and pull it straight out of the valve body. A dedicated cartridge puller tool may be needed if it's stuck. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pyBTL7GugHo 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10084-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z9Bim3tU3sg/hqdefault.jpg Remove cartridge retaining clip and old cartridge — Faucet Repair Locate the retaining clip that holds the cartridge in place. This clip may require pliers to gently pry it out. Once removed, the old cartridge can be pulled out. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z9Bim3tU3sg 56 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10087-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ge0AOYZLgV0/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall retainer clip — Faucet Repair Once the new cartridge is in place, reinsert the retainer clip. Align the ears of the clip with the notches on the cartridge and push it down until it snaps into place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ge0AOYZLgV0 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10087-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VBLHEz26J4w/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall packing nut — Faucet Repair Once the new cartridge is in place, reattach the packing nut. Screw it back on by hand first to ensure it's not cross-threaded, then use your pliers or wrench to tighten it securely. Do not overtighten. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VBLHEz26J4w 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10087-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bfVJRvADXpw/hqdefault.jpg Fasten the Retainer Nut — Faucet Repair Once the new cartridge is seated, reapply the retainer nut over the cartridge. Hand-tighten it as much as possible, then use your pliers to tighten it securely. Do not overtighten, but ensure it's snug enough to hold the cartridge firmly in place and prevent leaks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bfVJRvADXpw 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10080-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JbobHlxWabU/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Water Supply and Verify — Faucet Repair Locate the hot and cold water shut-off valves, which are typically found in the cabinet directly beneath the sink. Turn the handles on both valves clockwise until they are fully closed. This will stop the water supply to the faucet. After shutting them off, turn the faucet handle on to drain any residual water and verify that the flow has stopped. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JbobHlxWabU 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10080-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JbobHlxWabU/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Water Supply and Verify — Faucet Repair Locate the hot and cold water shut-off valves, which are typically found in the cabinet directly beneath the sink. Turn the handles on both valves clockwise until they are fully closed. This will stop the water supply to the faucet. After shutting them off, turn the faucet handle on to drain any residual water and verify that the flow has stopped. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JbobHlxWabU 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10080-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8fJlp34FW80/hqdefault.jpg Turn off the Water — Faucet Repair Find the hot and cold shutoff valves for the faucet, usually located beneath the sink. Turn both valves clockwise to shut off the water supply. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8fJlp34FW80 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10081-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CP0YXKNd91A/hqdefault.jpg Identify Faucet Brand — Faucet Repair Identify the brand of your faucet so you can purchase the correct replacement cartridge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CP0YXKNd91A 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10081-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e2W2E-1RryY/hqdefault.jpg Identify Faucet Brand — Faucet Repair Identify the brand or make of the shower faucet. This information is typically located on the escutcheon plate, usually near the 'off' indicator. In this video, the faucet is identified as a 'Moen' model. Knowing the brand is crucial for purchasing the correct replacement cartridge, although the general procedure is similar for common brands like Delta and Moen. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e2W2E-1RryY 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10081-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ED54ngQonDo/hqdefault.jpg Find replacement cartridges — Faucet Repair Check the label on the faucet for the model number. Look up the model number on the manufacturer's website to find the correct replacement cartridges. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ED54ngQonDo 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10082-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fqAjKh4sAGg/hqdefault.jpg Remove Faucet Handle — Faucet Repair First, use a small, pointed tool (like a pick or flat-head screwdriver) to carefully pry off the decorative cap from the top of the faucet handle. Once the cap is removed, locate the retaining screw inside. Use an appropriate screwdriver (often Phillips head) to loosen and remove this screw. With the screw removed, pull the faucet handle straight up and off the stem. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fqAjKh4sAGg 31 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10082-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s8bpfAP9GYQ/hqdefault.jpg Disassemble Faucet Handle — Faucet Repair Use a small, pointed tool like a dental pick or a small flathead screwdriver to carefully pry off the decorative cap on the front of the faucet handle. This will expose the set screw. Insert an Allen wrench into the set screw and turn it counter-clockwise to loosen it. You do not need to remove the screw completely. Once loose, lift the handle straight up to remove it from the faucet body. Then, unscrew the chrome decorative dome cover by hand. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s8bpfAP9GYQ 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10082-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s8bpfAP9GYQ/hqdefault.jpg Disassemble Faucet Handle — Faucet Repair Use a small, pointed tool like a dental pick or a small flathead screwdriver to carefully pry off the decorative cap on the front of the faucet handle. This will expose the set screw. Insert an Allen wrench into the set screw and turn it counter-clockwise to loosen it. You do not need to remove the screw completely. Once loose, lift the handle straight up to remove it from the faucet body. Then, unscrew the chrome decorative dome cover by hand. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s8bpfAP9GYQ 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10085-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pi2tN0aZMk4/hqdefault.jpg Clean faucet body — Faucet Repair Clean the inside of the faucet body where the cartridge sits. Remove any mineral deposits, debris, or old sealant using a cloth and possibly a small brush or scraper. A clean surface ensures a good seal for the new cartridge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pi2tN0aZMk4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10085-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VBLHEz26J4w/hqdefault.jpg Clean faucet body — Faucet Repair Before installing the new cartridge, clean the inside of the faucet body where the old cartridge was removed. Wipe away any debris or mineral buildup with a rag or paper towel. This ensures a good seal for the new cartridge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VBLHEz26J4w 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10085-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FJOqYL9ollE/hqdefault.jpg Clean Faucet Body — Faucet Repair With the handle and internal components removed, clean the grooves and threads inside the faucet body where the cartridge will sit. Use an old toothbrush to scrub away any mineral deposits, grime, or debris. After brushing, wipe the area thoroughly with a piece of paper towel to ensure all loose particles are removed. A clean seating surface is crucial for the new cartridge to function properly and prevent future leaks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FJOqYL9ollE 34 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10086-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Im0kpjATo5A/hqdefault.jpg Install New Faucet Cartridge — Faucet Repair Align the new cartridge with the faucet body. Note the orientation: the 'half-moon' key or stopper portion on the cartridge must line up with the corresponding offset hole at the bottom of the faucet body. Carefully push the cartridge down firmly until it clicks or seats completely into place. Ensure it is fully depressed and level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Im0kpjATo5A 34 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10086-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VBLHEz26J4w/hqdefault.jpg Install new cartridge — Faucet Repair Insert the new faucet cartridge into the faucet body. Ensure it is oriented correctly, aligning any notches or grooves with those in the faucet body. Push it down firmly until it is seated properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VBLHEz26J4w 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10086-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wcT1BKJE7WM/hqdefault.jpg Install New Cartridge — Faucet Repair Carefully insert the new cartridge into the faucet body, ensuring it is positioned exactly the same way as the old one. Pay close attention to any alignment pegs on the cartridge and make sure they properly line up with the corresponding holes or slots in the faucet body. Verify that the cartridge is correctly seated and aligned before proceeding. Finally, replace any retainer nuts or clips that were removed in the earlier step to securely hold the new cartridge in place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wcT1BKJE7WM 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10088-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/C78BQik6-ag/hqdefault.jpg Replace handle and set screw — Faucet Repair Place the faucet handle back onto the stem and secure it by tightening the set screw using the Allen wrench. Ensure the handle is firmly attached. https://www.youtube.com/embed/C78BQik6-ag 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10088-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ng484pwhBRI/hqdefault.jpg Reattach Faucet Handle — Faucet Repair With the base secured, place the faucet handle back onto the stem, aligning the set screw hole. Insert the 7/64 inch Allen wrench into the set screw and turn it clockwise to tighten it, securing the handle in place. Once the handle is firm, snap the hot/cold indicator cap back onto the handle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ng484pwhBRI 58 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10088-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VBT4gQNaqWM/hqdefault.jpg Reattach Faucet Handle — Faucet Repair Place the faucet handle back onto the faucet stem, aligning it properly. Secure the handle by tightening the screw with a screwdriver. Finally, snap the decorative cap back into place on top of the handle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VBT4gQNaqWM 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10089-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s8bpfAP9GYQ/hqdefault.jpg Restore Water and Test — Faucet Repair Go back under the sink and turn the water shut-off valve handles counter-clockwise to restore the water supply. Return to the faucet and operate the handle, turning the water on and off for both hot and cold. Carefully inspect the base of the handle and faucet for any signs of leaking. If no leaks are present, the repair is successful. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s8bpfAP9GYQ 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10089-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ng484pwhBRI/hqdefault.jpg Restore Water Supply and Test Faucet — Faucet Repair Go back under the sink and turn the hot and cold water supply valves back on. Return to the sink and slowly open the faucet handle to test the water flow for both hot and cold. Check for any leaks around the base of the faucet and connections under the sink. Confirm that the hot and cold water mix properly and that the faucet turns completely off without dripping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ng484pwhBRI 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10089-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JbobHlxWabU/hqdefault.jpg Restore Water and Test for Leaks — Faucet Repair Go back under the sink and slowly turn both the hot and cold water shut-off valves counter-clockwise to restore the water supply. Return to the faucet, ensure the handle is in the off position, and check for any leaks around the base. Then, slowly turn the handle on and test both the hot and cold water flow. Check again for leaks while the water is running. Turn the faucet off and confirm that the original leak has been resolved. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JbobHlxWabU 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10062-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AcZm4RFx6fw/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose the Leak Source — Sink Repair The video (0:09-0:11) shows a clear visual of water dripping from under a kitchen sink. For any DIY sink repair, the crucial first step is to accurately diagnose the source of the leak. This involves visually inspecting all plumbing connections, the P-trap, the faucet base, and drain assembly. To help pinpoint the exact location, run water through the sink while using a flashlight and wiping suspected areas with a paper towel or tissue to observe fresh drips. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AcZm4RFx6fw 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10062-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BhHagzqkG1w/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose the Leak — Sink Repair Begin by observing the plumbing under the sink. Turn on the faucet and fill the sink basin. Then, release the drain stopper and let the water flow through the P-trap. Carefully watch all pipe connections to pinpoint the exact source of the leak. In the video, a drip is clearly visible at a slip-nut connection on the P-trap, which confirms the location of the problem. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BhHagzqkG1w 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10062-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/X6Ebv51Z9Xw/hqdefault.jpg Test for Leaks — Sink Repair Turn on the water at the faucet. Let it run for a minute, then plug the drain and fill the sink basin with a few inches of water. Once filled, release the stopper and let all the water drain out at once. While the water is draining, use a flashlight and a dry paper towel to check every connection point under the sink for any signs of moisture or drips. Ensure the repair is completely dry. https://www.youtube.com/embed/X6Ebv51Z9Xw 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10020-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Enb5bQ_uYac/hqdefault.jpg Apply Polyurethane Finish to Treads — Stair Treads Using a good quality paint brush, apply the polyurethane to the stair treads. Work with the grain of the wood, using nice, even strokes. The goal is to achieve a smooth and consistent coat without drips or brush marks. For the final pass on each tread, make one long, continuous stroke with the grain to even out the finish. The presenter recommends applying three coats of polyurethane for maximum durability. Allow each coat to dry for a couple of hours (refer to product instructions for exact drying times), then lightly sand the surface with a fine-grit sandpaper (e.g., 220-grit) and wipe clean with a tack cloth before applying the next coat. This inter-coat sanding helps to smooth out any imperfections and ensures better adhesion for subsequent layers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Enb5bQ_uYac 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10020-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xrqO6WsnouE/hqdefault.jpg Seal Stained Treads — Stair Treads After the stain has completely dried, apply four coats of a clear sealant, such as Varathane NanoDefence Premium Clear Floor Finish (Satin), to protect the treads. Apply thin, even coats, allowing each coat to dry for the recommended time (2 hours for re-coat) before applying the next. This step will protect the stained wood from wear and tear. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xrqO6WsnouE 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10020-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AI1poE8dn10/hqdefault.jpg Stain and Seal Treads — Stair Treads Apply painter's tape to the perimeter of the treads, along the stringers and risers, to protect them from stain and polyurethane. Apply your chosen wood stain to the oak plywood treads and bullnose using a cloth or brush. The video creator initially used 'Early American' but found it too brown, so a second coat of a 'beige' tone was applied to achieve a greyish shade that matched the existing flooring. Continue applying coats of stain until the desired color is achieved. Once the stain is dry, apply a single coat of Minwax One Coat Polyurethane to the stained treads and bullnose using a natural bristle brush. Ensure even coverage and smooth out any brush marks with light strokes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AI1poE8dn10 59 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10021-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Dry Fit Tread and Nosing — Stair Treads Once the stair tread and nosing pieces are cut, bring them back to the stairs for a dry fit. Place them into their final positions without adhesive to ensure all cuts are perfect and the pieces fit snugly against the riser and along the stair's edges. Make any necessary micro-adjustments at this stage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10021-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Dry-Fit Laminate Pieces to Each Tread — Stair Treads Prior to applying any adhesive, carefully place all the freshly cut laminate pieces, including both the nosing and the main tread pieces, onto their respective stair tread. This 'dry-fit' allows you to ensure that all pieces fit perfectly. Visually inspect for tight seams, check for flush edges against the wall, and confirm proper alignment with the nosing. Make any necessary minor adjustments to the cuts at this stage before final installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10021-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Test Fit and Adjust Treads — Stair Treads Once a new stair tread has been cut, take it inside and test its fit on the corresponding stair. Place it gently into position to check for proper length and alignment. The presenter found that some of her cuts, made conservatively, were still slightly too long. If a tread doesn't fit perfectly, take it back to your cutting area and trim off just a tiny bit more to achieve a snug fit, then re-test. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10022-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fgKYII9TM7E/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stair Structure — Stair Treads After removing the old stair tread, thoroughly clean the exposed stair stringers and riser. Use a hammer and a pry bar or pliers to remove any remaining nails, staples, or debris from the wood surfaces. This ensures a clean and flat surface for the new stair tread to sit flush and bond properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fgKYII9TM7E 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10022-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2rkFnsTztog/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Existing Stairs for Installation — Stair Treads Before installing the new riser and tread pieces, sand the existing wooden stair treads with 80-grit sandpaper to rough up the surface. This creates a better bonding surface for the adhesive and helps remove any paint drips. Thoroughly vacuum all dust and debris from the stairs to ensure a clean surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2rkFnsTztog 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10022-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9iOsbprpe5g/hqdefault.jpg Remove Carpet & Prepare Subtreads — Stair Treads The project begins by showing existing carpeted stairs, which are then stripped of their old carpet, revealing the wooden subtreads and risers underneath. To enhance stability and prevent future squeaks, 2-inch deck screws are driven into the subtreads using a Milwaukee cordless drill. Subsequently, the installer carefully checks for any exposed staples or nails left over from the carpet installation, removing them with a hammer or pry tool, or hammering them flush with the wood surface. This ensures a perfectly smooth and clean base, essential for the proper installation of the new treads and risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9iOsbprpe5g 39 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10023-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hOcPPO4LRfI/hqdefault.jpg Install New Treads — Stair Treads Apply a generous bead of construction adhesive along the top edge of the riser and along any stringer supports that the tread will rest on. This adhesive will act as a lubricant, aiding in the installation of the tread into the dado, and will also help secure the tread, preventing future squeaks. Carefully slide the new tread with its rabbit cut into the dado of the riser. Once the tread is properly seated, use a nail gun with 2.5-inch 8-penny finish nails to secure the tread in place. Repeat this process for all remaining treads and risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hOcPPO4LRfI 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10023-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Install Your Treads — Stair Treads In some cases, you may need to install risers before installing your new treads. If this is the case, use construction adhesive and finish nails to secure them. After this, install the treads by applying construction adhesive on the top and front of the nosing of the sub-treads of the stairs. Then, use 1 1/2-inch finish nails with a finish nailer to attach the replacement treads securely. Repeat this step for each of your treads, working your way up the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 26 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10023-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Install First Tread — Stair Treads After the riser is installed, it's time for the new stair tread. First, set the pre-cut tread in place without adhesive to ensure a proper dry fit. Once confirmed, remove the tread and apply a thick bead of polyurethane construction adhesive around the entire perimeter of the back of the tread. Then, apply a zigzag pattern of adhesive across the center of the tread for maximum hold. Carefully place the stair tread back into position, ensuring a 1/16 inch expansion gap all around. To secure, nail the tread within a quarter inch of the back edge only, as the next riser will hide these nail holes. If you are not installing optional risers, you will need to use matching wood putty to fill these nail holes later. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10019-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Carefully Remove Old Treads — Stair Treads Carefully remove the old, damaged deck treads. For boards that are already loose, gently pry them up with a large screwdriver, avoiding excessive force. If a board is tightly secured, do not immediately reach for a pry bar, as this can damage the fragile stair stringers underneath. Instead, use a large screwdriver and a hammer to split the board into pieces by driving the screwdriver beside the nail heads. This action forces the wood grain around the nails to split, allowing the pieces to be removed easily without stressing the stringers. For very stubborn boards that require more force, use a pry bar, but apply leverage as slowly and carefully as possible. It is crucial to prevent damage to the stair stringers, which are the structural pieces below the treads. These stringers are shaped like a sawtooth, with diagonal grain lines that make them very weak and prone to fracturing. Avoid hitting them sideways or applying excessive leverage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 82 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10019-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/diTxF53fdrA/hqdefault.jpg Physically Remove Old Stair Treads — Stair Treads For the initial removal of the old stair treads, which were extensively glued and nailed, the video suggests using robust tools. Insert a crowbar underneath the edge of an old tread, and then use a sledgehammer to drive the crowbar deeper, creating leverage. Pry the tread upwards forcefully. It's important to note that the treads, often made of composite wood, are likely to break into multiple pieces during this process due to the strong adhesive. The video shows broken pieces with nails still attached, indicating the force needed and the integrity of the original installation. After the main pieces are detached, extract any exposed, large nails from the underlying wooden structure using the claw of a hammer or the crowbar. https://www.youtube.com/embed/diTxF53fdrA 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10019-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KMoh0dp78ek/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Wooden Treads — Stair Treads With the new treads prepared, it's time to remove the old wooden treads that were beneath the carpet. Use a pry bar and hammer to carefully pry up each old tread from the stair stringers. The video shows the treads being removed one by one, exposing the framework beneath. Collect the removed treads and any remaining nails for disposal. After removing all old treads, clean up any debris, dust, or old adhesive from the stringers and risers, possibly using a vacuum or shop vac, to ensure a clean surface for the new tread installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KMoh0dp78ek 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10024-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — Stair Treads After the risers are installed, measure the depth and length of each individual stair tread. According to these measurements, cut your new hardwood treads. It's crucial to be accurate, as even small errors can lead to visible gaps. You may need to make slight adjustments to ensure a gap-free fit. A track saw, set at a 5-degree angle as demonstrated, can be particularly useful for making precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 81 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10024-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — Stair Treads Measure each stair tread individually from front to back and side to side, as stairs are rarely perfectly uniform. Cut the new hardwood treads to the precise dimensions of each step. Double-check all measurements before making cuts to ensure accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10024-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Stair Treads After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10004-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N5xVJ2fg2YQ/hqdefault.jpg Allow for Curing and Final Cleanup — Stair Tread Installation Allow the construction adhesive to cure completely. The video mentions a cure time of 2 to 7 days, so avoid stepping on the newly repaired steps during this period to allow the adhesive to fully bond and strengthen. The man places a traffic cone as a visual reminder to prevent anyone from walking on the step prematurely. After the curing time, blow away any residual dirt or debris from the area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/N5xVJ2fg2YQ 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10004-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XF5qIw-yOMY/hqdefault.jpg Allow Glue to Cure and Plan Reinforcement — Stair Tread Installation Allow the wood glue to fully cure while the step remains securely clamped. The presenter suggests a curing time of 'a few days' for optimal strength. Once the glue is completely dry and strong, carefully remove all clamps, brackets, and screws. Inspect the step to ensure it is now level and firmly re-bonded. The presenter notes that for high-traffic areas, further reinforcement (such as drilling and inserting rods through the step) may be considered to prevent future issues, although this additional step is not detailed in this video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XF5qIw-yOMY 150 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10004-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mjZqhxztKJ8/hqdefault.jpg Apply Weights for Adhesive Bonding — Stair Tread Installation Once the wooden pieces are in place on a stair, immediately apply heavy weights, such as metal blocks or other dense objects, to the newly installed wooden tread. This pressure helps to ensure a strong and even bond between the wooden covering and the concrete as the hot adhesive cools and cures. Leave the weights in place for several hours or overnight, as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mjZqhxztKJ8 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10003-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hOcPPO4LRfI/hqdefault.jpg Tighten Loose Risers — Stair Tread Installation Before proceeding, inspect the exposed risers for any looseness. If a riser is loose or not tight against the skirt board, use a hammer to gently tap the riser outwards from behind until it's snug against the skirt board. To secure it in place, insert a wooden shim into the gap behind the riser. Apply construction adhesive to the shim before driving it in to ensure a firm hold. Repeat this process for all accessible loose risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hOcPPO4LRfI 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10003-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YAi3vAulu7A/hqdefault.jpg Assess Stair Structure and Plan Riser Installation — Stair Tread Installation Analyze the existing stair structure. The primary issue is that the old treads (the horizontal part) hung over the risers (the vertical part), creating a gap. The underlying wood is often 'crummy' and unsuitable for direct finishing. The solution proposed is to install new, primed 1x8 pine boards as risers to cover the gap and provide a clean, flush surface for the new treads. Small blocks are shown being used as temporary spacers or permanent supports behind the risers to prevent them from pushing back. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YAi3vAulu7A 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10003-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Install Risers — Stair Tread Installation Start by installing the new risers. Use a pencil to mark the height of the riser on the inner stringer. If the height of the riser is consistent, multiple pieces can be cut in advance using a table saw set at the appropriate angle (e.g., 5 degrees as shown in the video). Apply a strong construction adhesive, such as PL Premium, to the back of the riser before placing it firmly against the existing stair structure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 90 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10005-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xrqO6WsnouE/hqdefault.jpg Seal Stained Treads — Stair Tread Installation After the stain has completely dried, apply four coats of a clear sealant, such as Varathane NanoDefence Premium Clear Floor Finish (Satin), to protect the treads. Apply thin, even coats, allowing each coat to dry for the recommended time (2 hours for re-coat) before applying the next. This step will protect the stained wood from wear and tear. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xrqO6WsnouE 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10005-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Enb5bQ_uYac/hqdefault.jpg Apply Polyurethane Finish to Treads — Stair Tread Installation Using a good quality paint brush, apply the polyurethane to the stair treads. Work with the grain of the wood, using nice, even strokes. The goal is to achieve a smooth and consistent coat without drips or brush marks. For the final pass on each tread, make one long, continuous stroke with the grain to even out the finish. The presenter recommends applying three coats of polyurethane for maximum durability. Allow each coat to dry for a couple of hours (refer to product instructions for exact drying times), then lightly sand the surface with a fine-grit sandpaper (e.g., 220-grit) and wipe clean with a tack cloth before applying the next coat. This inter-coat sanding helps to smooth out any imperfections and ensures better adhesion for subsequent layers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Enb5bQ_uYac 28 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10005-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/F8eLXPuMBiw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Polyurethane Sealer — Stair Tread Installation Once the stain has completely dried (refer to product instructions for recommended drying times, usually a few hours), it's time to apply the polyurethane sealer. Sealer is extremely important for high-traffic areas like stair treads as it provides durability and protection against wear and tear. Using a clean paintbrush, apply the polyurethane in the direction of the wood grain. Similar to staining, use cardboard to protect the adjacent white risers and walls, ensuring a clean application line. The biggest tip when working with sealer is to make sure to brush out any drip marks or excess product immediately to avoid visible streaks and uneven finish. Apply multiple thin coats, allowing adequate drying time between each coat, according to the manufacturer's instructions, for maximum durability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/F8eLXPuMBiw 43 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10006-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — Stair Tread Installation After the risers are installed, measure the depth and length of each individual stair tread. According to these measurements, cut your new hardwood treads. It's crucial to be accurate, as even small errors can lead to visible gaps. You may need to make slight adjustments to ensure a gap-free fit. A track saw, set at a 5-degree angle as demonstrated, can be particularly useful for making precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 81 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10006-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — Stair Tread Installation Measure each stair tread individually from front to back and side to side, as stairs are rarely perfectly uniform. Cut the new hardwood treads to the precise dimensions of each step. Double-check all measurements before making cuts to ensure accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10006-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Each stair in a staircase is often slightly different in length, so it's crucial to measure and cut each new tread individually. Place an old, removed stair tread side-by-side with a new, uncut tread. Use the old tread as a template to mark the exact length needed on the new tread with a pencil. The presenter uses a circular saw for cutting; a table saw is another suitable option. When operating the circular saw, ensure both hands are firmly on the tool and your feet are well out of the way to prevent accidents, as this is a common point of injury. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 57 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10007-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ztC3KfZEjO0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Construction Adhesive — Stair Tread Installation Before installing the newly cut tread, a generous bead of construction adhesive is applied to the horizontal wood supports (ledgers) within the stair frame where the tread will rest. This adhesive (a caulk gun loaded with a tube of adhesive is shown) serves two primary purposes: to firmly bond the tread to the frame and to prevent future squeaks that can arise from wood-on-wood friction as the stairs are used. The adhesive is applied to all contact points, including the vertical stringer/riser faces. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ztC3KfZEjO0 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10007-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Install First Tread — Stair Tread Installation After the riser is installed, it's time for the new stair tread. First, set the pre-cut tread in place without adhesive to ensure a proper dry fit. Once confirmed, remove the tread and apply a thick bead of polyurethane construction adhesive around the entire perimeter of the back of the tread. Then, apply a zigzag pattern of adhesive across the center of the tread for maximum hold. Carefully place the stair tread back into position, ensuring a 1/16 inch expansion gap all around. To secure, nail the tread within a quarter inch of the back edge only, as the next riser will hide these nail holes. If you are not installing optional risers, you will need to use matching wood putty to fill these nail holes later. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10007-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hOcPPO4LRfI/hqdefault.jpg Install New Treads — Stair Tread Installation Apply a generous bead of construction adhesive along the top edge of the riser and along any stringer supports that the tread will rest on. This adhesive will act as a lubricant, aiding in the installation of the tread into the dado, and will also help secure the tread, preventing future squeaks. Carefully slide the new tread with its rabbit cut into the dado of the riser. Once the tread is properly seated, use a nail gun with 2.5-inch 8-penny finish nails to secure the tread in place. Repeat this process for all remaining treads and risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hOcPPO4LRfI 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10008-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hOcPPO4LRfI/hqdefault.jpg Install New Treads — Stair Tread Installation Apply a generous bead of construction adhesive along the top edge of the riser and along any stringer supports that the tread will rest on. This adhesive will act as a lubricant, aiding in the installation of the tread into the dado, and will also help secure the tread, preventing future squeaks. Carefully slide the new tread with its rabbit cut into the dado of the riser. Once the tread is properly seated, use a nail gun with 2.5-inch 8-penny finish nails to secure the tread in place. Repeat this process for all remaining treads and risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hOcPPO4LRfI 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10008-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Install First Tread — Stair Tread Installation After the riser is installed, it's time for the new stair tread. First, set the pre-cut tread in place without adhesive to ensure a proper dry fit. Once confirmed, remove the tread and apply a thick bead of polyurethane construction adhesive around the entire perimeter of the back of the tread. Then, apply a zigzag pattern of adhesive across the center of the tread for maximum hold. Carefully place the stair tread back into position, ensuring a 1/16 inch expansion gap all around. To secure, nail the tread within a quarter inch of the back edge only, as the next riser will hide these nail holes. If you are not installing optional risers, you will need to use matching wood putty to fill these nail holes later. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10008-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J4Pg0uZ_9Jw/hqdefault.jpg Install Treads and Risers — Stair Tread Installation Cut the treads (the horizontal walking surface) and risers (the vertical panels) to the exact dimensions required for each step. Precision is key to a snug fit. Apply construction adhesive, commonly referred to as 'glue,' to the top of the stringers and the back of the riser where it meets the stringer. This adhesive helps prevent squeaks and adds significant structural strength. Then, carefully install each riser, followed by its corresponding tread. Secure both with appropriate fasteners, such as finish nails or screws, ensuring they are flush and level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J4Pg0uZ_9Jw 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10009-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Dry Fit Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Installation Once the stair tread and nosing pieces are cut, bring them back to the stairs for a dry fit. Place them into their final positions without adhesive to ensure all cuts are perfect and the pieces fit snugly against the riser and along the stair's edges. Make any necessary micro-adjustments at this stage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10009-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Install New Treads and Secure with Shims/Glue/Nails — Stair Tread Installation Before permanent installation, dry-fit each new tread and riser combination. Check everywhere for a good, tight fit and minimal gaps. While tiny gaps can be filled later, strive for as few as possible to avoid relying on excessive filler. To ensure a gap-free fit at the bottom of the tread against the previous riser, place cardboard shims at the top of the newly installed riser. Apply a generous amount of strong construction adhesive (like PL Premium) to the underside of the new tread, then press it firmly down onto the existing tread and against the riser. Use a nail gun to secure the tread in place by firing nails into the tread and riser. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 78 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10009-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9iOsbprpe5g/hqdefault.jpg Install Retro Treads — Stair Tread Installation Before permanent installation, each cut pre-finished retro tread is dry-fitted to ensure a snug and accurate fit against the installed riser and skirt boards. Once the fit is confirmed, the tread is removed, and a generous serpentine bead of PL Premium construction adhesive is applied to its underside. The tread is then carefully placed back into its position, ensuring perfect alignment. A rubber mallet is used to gently tap the tread into place, promoting good contact with the adhesive and securing a tight fit. Finally, the corners of the tread are reinforced and secured with 2-inch finish nails using a Porter Cable finish nail gun. This installation process is repeated for all remaining treads until the entire staircase is completed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9iOsbprpe5g 36 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no